31A-067 (10) ..
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA .�
bid.
3.7 TESTING
A. Balancing Loads:
1 . Circuits shall be connected to the panelboards so that the total load
is distributed equally between each line and neutral to within ten
percent. Branch circuits shall be balanced on their own
panelboards, and feeder loads balanced on the main distribution
panel. Reasonable load testing shall be arranged for verification if
requested by the Public Works Department.
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 32
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
height from the floor and shall hang plumb.
G. Upon completion of the installation of the lighting fixtures and lighting
equipment, they must be in first-class operating order and in perfect
condition as to finish, etc. Check for proper operation and appearance,
alignment of fixtures and proper placement of lenses, louvers, lamps and
!" other light controlling or modifying appurtenances.
3.5 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Receptacle boxes, unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 18"
above finished floor, aligned above or below closest block course, except
at locations where wall mounted equipment precludes this mounting
height. At such locations, receptacle height shall be as directed by the
Architect. Switch outlets shall be 48" above finished floor, unless aligned
above or below closest block course. The Electrical Contractor shall check
with the Architectural and Structural Plans for interferences.
B. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to the weather and wet
locations, shall be of the threaded hub type and provided with watertight
screw-on cover and gasket.
C. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed
therein without excessive bending of the conductors, which would damage
the conductor insulation.
D. All outlet boxes installed in masonry shall be so set that their outer edges
are 1 /4" back of finished surface.
E. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by the conduit. Suitable means shall
be provided to support the outlet box to take the weight of the fixture.
F. Fixture outlet boxes used as junction boxes or outlets not used, shall be
provided with covers.
3.6 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance
with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown
on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish
this shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor and be included in his
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 31
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA ••�
B. Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall
be suitably protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during
construction.
C. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof.
Connections to junction boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using
insulated bushings on conduit 1 -1 /4" or larger. Grounding bushings shall
be provided at all panel connections.
D. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have minimum of 18" of
flexible steel conduit to eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to
other parts of the building, with cable jumper across greenfield and
fittings. This flexible conduit shall also be installed at ceiling mounted
lighting fixtures to facilitate alignment of fixtures.
3.4 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Installation of all lighting fixtures shall be done by experienced mechanics.
Lighting fixtures shall not be installed where finished coat of paint has
been applied to ceiling and walls until paint is thoroughly dry. R*
B. Lighting fixtures in equipment rooms shall not be installed until after all
piping and duct work is in place. Lighting fixture layout shown on the •
Drawings is typical layout, but may be modified to provide adequate
lighting of the equipment space according to final construction conditions.
Any relocation of fixtures due to duct or piping interference shall be as
directed by the Architect, at no expense to the Owner.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for proper co-ordination of
all lighting fixture locations. Provide support for all fixtures mounted on
or recessed in hung ceiling. He shall confer with Ceiling Contractor and
Heating and Ventilating Contractor to co-ordinate lighting system with
other trades.
D. Provide and install suitable cover plate or canopy for each fixture outlet
box where the fixture does not provide a suitable cover.
E. Fixtures located on exterior of building shall be installed with cadmium-
plated brass screws and gasketed.
F. All pendant type fixtures in the same room shall be installed at a uniform
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 30
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
" Code and local inspection authorities.
E. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, control, and
apparatus, shall be made accessible.
F. All wiring shall be concealed in finished spaces, except as otherwise
specified.
3.2 GROUNDING
i A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current
carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems,
grounding conductor in non-metallic raceways and neutral conductor of
the wiring system shall be grounded. The ground connection shall be
made at the main service equipment.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all material required for
the grounding and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and
,w lighting systems installed under this Contract.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall make tight and proper all metallic
components and equipment to one another and to ground, using a positive
foolproof system of connections. Provide and install bonding and
grounding conductors with approved termination where required,
conforming with the latest Massachusetts Electrical Code and other
applicable specification standards.
D. A #12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in
each length of flexible metallic conduit connection to motors, recessed
lighting fixtures and other equipment components for continuity. Positive
ground connections with the ground wire shall be made at each outlet box,
lighting fixture, motor and other equipment components by means of
positively secured ground clamp in each.
3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. All conduit shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run
with not more than the equivalent of three 90o bends in a single run.
Where more bends are necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall provide
suitable pull boxes.
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 29
I"
4"
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA •�
continuous row fixtures. These support wires (min. No. 12 ga
wire) will be capable of supporting four times the support load.
g. A supporting assembly, which is intended to be mounted on an
outlet box, will be designed to accommodate mounting
features on four-inch boxes, three inch plaster rings, and
fixture studs.
h. Each surface mounted fluorescent individual or continuous row
of fixtures shall be attached to a seismic resistant ceiling
support system. Fixture support devices shall be locking type
scissor clamp, or a full loop band, which will securely attach to
the ceiling support.
i. Fixtures attached to the underside of a structural slab shall be
properly anchored to the slab at each corner of the fixture.
j. Each wall mounted emergency light unit shall be secured in a
manner to hold the unit in place during a seismic disturbance.
k. Suspension systems for lighting fixtures that are free to swing
a minimum of 450 from the vertical in all directions are *�*
acceptable if a passing shaking table test approved by the
using agency is conducted and will withstand without failure a
force of not less than four times its own weight.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in
such a manner as to cause no delay in the construction by other trades.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be ,
responsible for the correctness of same. No allowance will be made for
differences between actual measurements and those shown on plans.
C. If, in laying out his work, the Electrical Contractor finds that the work of
other trades might interfere with his, the Architect shall be notified.
D. The locations of outlets, apparatus, and equipment are approximate only
and the runs of feeders, mains, and branches are not necessarily to be
made exactly as shown on the plans. The exact locations of such work
shall be determined after full consideration has been given to work of
other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire
installation shall conform to the latest issue of the Massachusetts Electrical
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 28
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Service, Inc. verifying its allowable loads. Drill-in stud wedge
anchors shall be type SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries or
equal.
15. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators
or equipment can be slid into place after the anchors are installed.
Anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall
have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load.
Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number
from the I.C.B.O Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable
loads. Drill-in female wedge anchors shall be type SAB as
manufactured by Mason Industries or equal.
16. Housekeeping pad anchors shall consist of a ductile iron casting
that is tapered and hexagonal, smaller at its base than at its top.
The upper portion shall have holes for rebar to pass through. The
anchor shall be continuously threaded from top to bottom for the
attachment of soleplates. Housekeeping pad anchors shall be
attached to the structural slab using a stud wedge anchor.
Housekeeping pad anchors shall be type HPA and stud wedge
anchor shall be type SAS both as manufactured by Mason
Industries or equal.
Lighting Fixtures:
a. Lighting fixtures and supports shall conform to the Standard
for Safety UL-57.
b. Provide a lateral bracing system.
c. Fixture supports will employ materials, which are suitable for
the purpose.
d. Loop and hook or swivel hanger assemblies for pendant
fixtures shall be filled with a restraining device to hold the
stem in the support position during earthquake motions.
e. Pendant supported fluorescent fixtures shall also be provided
with a flexible hanger device at the attachment to the fixture
channel to preclude breaking of the support. The motion of
swivels or hinged joints shall not cause sharp bends in
conductors or damage to insulation.
f. Each recessed fluorescent individual or continuous row of
fixtures shall be supported by a seismic resistant suspended
ceiling support system, and shall be fastened thereto at each
corner of the fixture; or shall be provided with fixture support
wired attached to the building structural members using two
wires for individual fixtures and one wire per unit of
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 27
go
.0
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
through a 308 arc from side to side before contacting the rod
bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a
hanger Drawing showing the 308 capability. Hangers shall be Type
30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
11 . Hangers shall be as described in 10, but they shall be
precompressed and locked at the rated deflection by means of a
resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed
elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a
release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is
complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection
shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Submittals shall
include a Drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability.
Hangers shall be Type PC30N as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
12. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft
cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor
of two (2) and arranged to provide all-directional restraint. Cable
end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final
installation angle and utilize two (2) clamping bolts to provide
proper cable engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend ••
across sharp edges. Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage
Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California
verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Cable assemblies
shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH
between the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a
beam all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
13. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to
resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2 and
arranged to provide all directional restraint. Seismic solid brace
end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final
installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper
attachment. Seismic solid brace assembly shall have anchorage
pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California
verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Solid seismic
brace assemblies shall be Type SSB as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
14. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter
wire, not from undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the
thread. The stud anchor shall also have a safety shoulder, which
fully supports the wedge ring under load. The stud anchors shall
have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O Evaluation
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 26
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
W Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
7. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile iron or
steel housing to provide all directional seismic snubbing. The
snubber shall be adjustable vertically and allow a maximum if 1 /4
in. travel in all directions before contacting the resilient snubbing
collars. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R"
Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the
maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings
shall be SSLFH as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
8. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower steel
sections connected by a replaceable flexible nylon reinforced
neoprene element. Air spring configuration shall be multiple
bellows to achieve a maximum natural frequency of 3 Hz. Air
Springs shall be designed for a burst pressure that is a minimum
of three times the published maximum operating pressure. All air
spring systems shall be connected to either the building control
air or a supplementary air supply and equipped with three (3)-
leveling valves to maintain leveling within plus or minus 1 /8 in.
Submittals shall include natural frequency, load and damping tests
performed by an independent lab or acoustician. Air Springs shall
be Type MT and leveling valves Type LV as manufactured by
Mason Industries, Inc.
9. Restrained air spring mountings shall have an MT air spring as
described in Specification 8, within a rigid housing that includes
vertical limit stops to prevent air spring extension when weight is
removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A
steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and
operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1 .2 in. shall
be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing
and the air spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact
during normal operation. Housing shall be designed to resist all
seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR-MT as manufactured by
Mason Industries, Inc.
10. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1 -
1 /4 in. thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with
general characteristics as in Specification 5 seated in a steel
washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene
element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting
! ► through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be
articulated as clevis hangers nor the neoprene element stacked on
top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole
sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 25
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA ..
structure by assemblies consisting of a neoprene bushing
cushioned between 2 steel sleeves. The outer sleeve prevents the
sheet metal from cutting into the neoprene. Enlarge panel holes as
required. Neoprene elements pass over the bushing to cushion the
back panel horizontally. A steel disc covers the inside neoprene
element and the inner steel sleeve is elongated to act as a stop so
tightening the anchor bolts does not interfere with panel isolation
in three (3) planes. Bushing assemblies can be applied to the ends
of steel cross members where applicable. All assemblies shall be
Type PB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
4. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The
bushing shall surround the anchor bolt and have a flat face to
avoid metal to metal contact. Neoprene bushings shall be Type HG
as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
5. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without
any housing and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1 /4 in.
neoprene acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the -�
support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be
rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less
than 0.8 if the compressed height of the spring at rated load. *
Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to
50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring
diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring
height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
6. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as
described in Specification 5, within a rigid housing that includes
vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is
removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A ,
steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and
operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1 /2 in. shall
be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing
and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit
stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Since
housings will be bolted or welded in position there must be an
internal isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all
seismic forces. Mountings shall have Anchorage Pre-approval "R"
Number from OSHPD in the state of California certifying the
maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings
shall be SLR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 24
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
BOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.15 0.1 0.15 0.6 0.2
SBCCI
I. Product Intent:
1 . All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this
section shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Mason
Industry's products are the basis of these Specifications; products
of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems
strictly comply with the Specifications and have the approval of the
" specifying engineer. Submittals and certification sheets shall be in
accordance with Section D.
2. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the
discontinuance of any attachment point between equipment or
. structure, vertical permanent deformation greater than 1 /8 in.
and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater than 1 /4 in.
j. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints:
1 . Two (2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 in.
square waffle modules separated horizontally by a 16 gauge
galvanized shim. Load distribution plates shall be used as
required. Pads shall be Type Super "W" as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
2. Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static
deflection of 0.2 in. and all directional seismic capability. The
mount shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two
separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements
shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from
contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock
absorbing neoprene materials shall be compounded to bridge-
'" bearing Specifications. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Pre-
approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California
verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load
ratings. Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
!! 3. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 23
..s
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA .�
a. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad
attachment to the structure details and design shall be
prepared by the restraint vendor if not already indicated on
The Drawings.
b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint
vendor and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of
ten 0 0) bolt diameters all around the outermost anchor
bolt to allow development of full drill-in wedge anchor
ratings. If cast-in anchors are to be used, the
housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate the ACI
requirements for bolt coverage and embedment.
2. Supplementary Support Steel: Contractor shall supply
supplementary support steel for all equipment, piping, ductwork,
etc. including roof mounted equipment, as required or specified.
3. Attachments:Contractor shall supply restraint attachments plates
cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam -�
clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the vibration
vendor's calculations.
H. Seismic Force Levels:
1 . The following force levels will be used on this project.
Minimum "G" Forces Equal to or Exceeding Building Code Listed in
E.
Building "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force For
Code for all pipes, Duct for Rigidity for Flexibility Life Safety
& Conduit Mounted Mounted Equipment Either ..
Equipment Equipment Rigidity or
Flexibility
Mounted
Zon Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert.
e
UBC
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 22
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
` Smith College, Northampton, MA
" location. Testing and calculations must include both shear and
tensile loads as well as one test or analysis at 45 degrees to the
weakest mode.
3. Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static seismic loads
and capacity of materials utilized for connections to equipment
and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt
diameter, emdbedment and/or welded length. All seismic
restraint devices shall be designed to accept, without failure, the
forces detailed in Section H acting through the equipment center
of gravity. Overturning moments may exceed forces at ground
level.
E. Code and Standards Requirement:
1 . Typical Applicable Codes and Standards - most recent or enforced
code:
a. Massachusetts State Building Code.
b. BOCA Massachusetts Electrical Code.
C. NFPA-13, 14, 20, and 90A.
d. Massachusetts State Plumbing and Gas Code.
e. Massachusetts Electrical Code.
F. Manufacture's Responsibility:
1 . Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment
shall have the following responsibilities:
a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes
and locations.
b. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as
scheduled or specified.
C. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint
of un-insolated equipment.
d. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field
supervision to insure proper installation and performance.
G. Related Work:
1 . Housekeeping Pads:
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 21
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA •
2. Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted
equipment, showing vibration isolators and seismic
restraints by referencing numbered descriptive
Drawings.
b. Shop Drawings:
1 . Submit fabrication details for equipment bases
including dimensions, structural member sizes and
support point locations.
2. Provide all details of suspension and support for
ceiling hung equipment.
3. Where walls, floors, slabs, or supplementary
steelwork are used for seismic restraint locations,
details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts,
conduit and pipe must be included and approved
before the condition is accepted for installation.
Restraint manufacture's submittals must include
spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all
attachment and support points.
4. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and
anchors; include number, size and locations for each
piece of equipment. ..
C. Seismic Certification and Analysis:
1 . Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections
of equipment to the structure. Calculations must be stamped by a
registered professional engineer with at least five (5) years of ,
seismic design experience, licensed in the state of the job
location.
2. All restraining devices shall have a pre-approval number form
California OSHPD or some other recognized government agency
showing maximum restraint ratings. Pre-approvals based on
independent testing are preferred pre-approvals based on
calculations. Where pre-approved devices are not available,
submittals based on independent testing are preferred.
Calculations (including the combing of tensile and shear loading)
to support seismic restraint designs must be stamped by a "
registered professional engineer with at least five (5) years of
seismic design experience and licensed in the state of the job
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 20
wr
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
B. Definitions
1 . Life Safety Systems:
a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler
piping, fire pumps, jockey pumps, fire pump control panels,
service water supply piping, water tanks, fire dampers and
smoke exhaust systems.
'! b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency
power supply including all generators, transfer switches,
transformers and all flowpaths to fire protection and/or
emergency lighting systems.
C. All medical and life support systems.
d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence
including air handlers, conduit, duct, dampers, etc.
e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the equipment
schedule.
2. Positive Attachment: A positive attachment is defined as a
cast-in-anchor, a drill-in wedge anchor, a double sided beam
clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a welded "C" type beam
clamps for support rods of electrical conduit, bus duct, or cable
trays, or any other equipment are not acceptable on this project as
seismic anchor points.
3. Transverse Bracing: Restraint (s) applied to limit motion
perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit.
4. Longitudinal Bracing: Restraint (s) applied to limit motion
parallel to the centerline of the pipe.
D. Manufacturer's Data:
1 . The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints
shall provide submittals for products as follows:
a. Descriptive Data:
1 . Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and
specific restraints detailing compliance with the
Specification.
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 19
N.
OR
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA ,
standards, the most stringent shall apply.
5. The Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for seismic
consideration and is not intended as a substitute for legislated, more
stringent, national, state or local construction requirements (i.e.
California Title 24, California OSHPD, Canadian Building Codes, or other
requirements).
6. Any variance or non-compliance with these Specification requirements
shall be corrected by the Contractor in an approved manner.
7. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic force
levels as detailed in Section H.
A. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1 . Vibration isolation for equipment.
2. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment.
3. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment.
4. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation
supervision.
5. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads.
6. All electrical systems. Equipment buried underground is excluded w,
but entry of services through the foundation wall is included.
Equipment referred to below is typical. (Equipment not listed is
still included in this Specification.)
Battery Packs
Generators
Bus Ducts
Light Fixtures
Cable Trays
Comp. Room Units
Switching Gear
Conduit
Transformers
Electrical Panels
Unit Substitutions
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 18
�r
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit.
G. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current
rating equal to or greater than 10,000 amps.
H. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and bear the UL
label. Panelboards shall be Square D, "NQOD" series for 120/208 volts.
No substitutions will be allowed.
2.10 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. The Electrical Contractor shall install fire alarm system components as
u shown on Drawings. All fire alarm equipment shall be shall be as
manufactured by Simplex or Edwards to match existing system.
B. All wiring in conduit shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical
Contractor.
C. Contractor is responsible for providing power supplies if required to power
additional strobe light or audio/visuals and/or initiation devices added by
this project.
`
2.11 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
1 . It is the intent of the seismic portion of this Specification to keep all
r- electrical building system components in place during a seismic event.
2. All electrical equipment and conduit, as noted on the equipment
schedule or in the Specification, shall be mounted on vibration isolators
and with flexible connections to prevent the transmission of vibration
and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration
isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so
as to produce reasonably uniform deflections.
3. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same manufacturer
and shall be certified by the manufacturer.
4. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with seismic
codes, component manufactures and building construction standards.
Whenever a conflict occurs between the manufactures or construction
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 17
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA •
Off-Auto" selector switch in cover of general purpose
enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 509. No substi-
tutions will be allowed.
C. A control transformer shall be furnished and installed in each
starter, fused, with 24 volt secondary. Starter coils shall be
24 volt.
d. Furnish a minimum of one auxiliary contact in each starter
for use by others for interlocking purposes.
E. Equivalent equipment by Cutler-Hammer, General Electric will be
considered.
2.9 PANELBOARDS
A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting and receptacle panelboards as
required and where shown on the Plans. Panelboards shall be equipped
with thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers with frame and trip ■*
ratings as required.
B. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip •
indicating, and have common trip on all multi-pole breakers. Trip
indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking position
between "On" and "Off' when the breaker is tripped. Connections to the
bus shall be bolt-on.
C. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breaker shall be the "distributed
phase" or "phase sequence" type. All current-carrying parts of the bus
assembly shall be plated.
D. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall
be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. Terminals for
branch circuit wiring, both breaker and neutral, shall be UL listed as
suitable for the type of conductor specified.
E. Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top, odd
numbers shall be used in sequence down the left-hand side and even
numbers shall be used in sequence down the right-hand side.
F. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be
provided on the inside of the door. The directory card shall provide a
space at least 1 /4" high by 3" long or equivalent for each circuit. The
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 16
10
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
be plated to resist corrosion and promote cool operation.
2. Switches shall be quick-made and quick-break such that, during
normal operation of the switch, the operation of the contacts shall
not be capable of being restrained by the operating handle after the
closing or opening action of the contacts has started. The handle
and mechanism shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover,
with positive pad-locking provisions in the "Off' position.
3. Switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures
unless NEMA 311 (rainproof) is required. Enclosures shall have gray
enamel, electro-deposited on cleaned phosphatized steel.
4. Switches shall be horsepower rated for 240 volts AC.
5. Fuses shall be as required.
6. Switches shall be Square D, heavy duty type in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R
enclosures, or equal.
C. Disconnect switches for 120 volt, single phase motors shall be single or
double pole toggle switches as specified, or required.
D. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance
with NEMA Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be
mounted in general purpose enclosures unless otherwise indicated on the
Plans.
1 . Across-the-line magnetic starters shall be equipped with double
break silver alloy contacts. All contacts shall be replaceable without
removing power wiring or removing starter from panel.
2. Coils shall be of molded construction, replaceable from the front
without removing the starter from the panel.
3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable
control circuit module. Thermal units shall be of one-piece
construction and interchangeable. The starter shall be inoperative if
"M the thermal unit is removed.
a. All three phase magnetic starters shall have "Hand-Off-Auto"
selector switch, three-pole, three-phase of NEMA size
applicable, with three melting alloy overload relays and
three-position H-O-A switch in cover of general purpose
enclosure. To be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 522. No
substitutions will be allowed.
b. All single phase magnetic starters shall be single pole
magnetic contactor without overload protection, with "Hand-
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 15
no
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA �*
time delay adjustment from 30 seconds to 30 minutes, and daylight
level sensor adjustable from 2.4 to 300 f.c. Provide decorator style
ivory phenolic plastic cover. To be Watt Stopper Cat. No. WS-120,
or equal for 120 volt operation.
2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures on all light outlets shown on plans. All
lighting fixtures to have label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fixtures
to be complete in all respects with all required glassware and lamps. All
lamps to be new. Furnish and install all required hardware to fit in all type
ceilings. Fixtures are to be cleaned after lamps and diffusers are installed.
Any chipped, cracked or otherwise defective material shall be replaced.
B. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid state electronic type, approvable for use
on their system by the Massachusetts Electric Co. Fixture/lamp
combinations for which electronic ballasts are not available shall be high
power factor, energy efficient magnetic type, complete with automatic
reset thermal protector, and shall be CBM certified.
C. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of the stated type and
size. T-8 lamps shall be 3500 K. Compact fluorescent PL lamps shall be
3,500 K. *•
D. All fixtures to be independently supported from building structure.
E. Fixtures are identified by letter on the Fixture Schedule and by
corresponding letter on Drawings. Manufacturers' names and catalogue
numbers are listed to show type and standard of quality. Complete
schedule of lighting fixtures shall be submitted to and approved by the
Architect and Owner.
2.8 MOTOR STARTERS AND SWITCHES
A. Furnish and install motor starting, protecting, and controlling devices for
motors.
B. Furnish and install heavy duty fused safety switches as required.
1 . All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the
"Off' position with the door open. All current-carrying parts shall
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 14
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
2.6 WIRING DEVICES
A. The Electrical Contractor shall install devices where shown on the plans.
Where two or more devices occur at one location, they shall be provided
with a gang plate. All unused boxes to be furnished with blank plates.
1 . Duplex Receptacles - 20 amp, 125 volt with grounding screw, side
and back wired. To be Leviton Cat. No. 5352-I, or equal.
2. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be Leviton Cat. No.
6898-HGI, or equal.
3. Weatherproof cover for receptacles shall be lockable, vertical, UL
Listed, with Lexan base and lid, 4 screw attachment, Tay Mac Cat.
No. 20-3-5-0, or equal.
4. Duplex receptacles, isolated ground - 20 A, 125 V, side and back
wired, Leviton Cat. No. 5362-IG, or equal.
5. Light Switches, Single Pole - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side
wired, Leviton Cat. No. 1221-2, or equal.
6. Light Switches, 3 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired,
Leviton Cat. No. 1223-2, or equal.
7. Light Switches, 4 Way - 20 amp, 120/277 volt, back and side wired,
Leviton Cat. No. 1224-2, or equal.
8. Switch and Pilot Light - 20 amp, 120 volt, side and back wired, red
Handle, Leviton Cat. No. 1221-PLR, or equal.
9. Power receptacles shall be flush type, of NEMA configuration shown,
with matching cord and cap, Leviton, or equal, as follows:
a. Type "R" - 50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat.
No. 279.
b. Type "D" - 30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, Leviton Cat.
No. 278.
10. Clock hanger outlet with single receptacle and strong hook for
hanging heavy clocks, Leviton Cat. No. 688-I, ivory finish, or equal.
Clocks shall be provided by the Owner.
11 . Wall plates shall be smooth molded urea or. phenolic plastic, ivory
with matching screws. To be Leviton Cat. No. 86000 series, or
equal.
12. Occupancy sensors shall consist of wall mounted passive infrared
sensors mounted in standard size switch box at standard switch
height. Sensor to include integral manual auto/off bypass switch,
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 13
an
so
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized or sheradized pressed steel
unless otherwise noted or required by the National Electrical Code, and
shall be as required for their use.
B. junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations
shall be of the cast aluminum, threaded hub type and provided with
watertight screw-on cover and gasket.
C. Outlet boxes shall be of sizes and types to accommodate:
1 . structural conditions.
2. size and number of raceways and conductors or cables
entering.
3. device of fixture for which required.
D. Boxes occurring at plastered surfaces shall have a suitable plaster ring
installed.
E. Where multiple devices are located at one point, gang type boxes shall be
used.
F. Pull and junction boxes, whether surface or flush, shall be galvanized code
gauge.
G. Pull boxes and wireways shall be standard NEMA-1 enclosures with cover
plates and screws, bonderized paint finished.
H. Pull and splice boxes not indicated on the Drawings shall be provided as
required by the National and the Massachusetts Electrical Codes.
I. Outlet boxes and covers shall be as manufactured by Steel City electrical
Company, General Electric Company, Raco, or approved equal.
2.5 NAMEPLATES
A. Furnish and install nameplates identifying all apparatus, controls, panels
and safety switches. The nameplates shall be Seton style 2060 engraved
plastic, or equal, screw attached. Submit schedule of nameplate lettering
for approval.
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 12
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
be EMT with bushed ends. (Note: Fire safing specified in
subsection 3.08.)
G. Surface raceway shall be Wiremold Series 5,400, Panduit Twin-70, or
equal, twin cover, complete with wire clips, couplings, cover,
divider, duplex receptacles, device-mounting plates, covers, and
all other accessories required to complete the installation.
2.2 WIREWAYS
A. Wireways shall be made to accommodate conductors as required in
accordance with applicable rules of the National Electrical Code. To be of
code gauge steel and supported as required by Code. Wireways shall be
furnished and installed complete with the necessary complement of
fittings, connectors, and accessory parts. Wireways shall be of the "lay-
, „ inn" type with standard knockouts and with screw covers for full channel
access. All sheet metal parts shall be coated with a rust inhibitor and
finished in grey baked enamel. All hardware shall be plated to prevent
corrosion.
2.3 CONDUCTORS
A. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity copper, with 600 volt insulation, and
shall be of types indicated below unless otherwise shown on the plans.
Aluminum conductors shall not be used.
B. Conductors #10 AWG and smaller, Type THWN, solid.
C. Conductors #4 AWG through #8 AWG, Type THWN, stranded.
D. Conductors #3 AWG and larger, Type THW, stranded.
E. Branch circuit wiring located above lay in tile ceilings or fished in stud
partitions may be Type MC cable; single and multi-circuit home runs shall
be raceway and wire as specified.
F. Wire and cable for special systems shall be as specified in those
specification sections.
G. Wire and Cable to be by Cerro, Southwire, Triangle/PWC, or equal.
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 11
w
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1 .19 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1 .
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 RACEWAYS
A. Rigid galvanized steel or intermediate steel conduit shall be used for all
raceway runs concealed in concrete, run under slabs, run in trenches or
pits, exposed below 6' above floor, and for service entrance conductor
sweeps. Conduit shall comply with the latest applicable Federal
Specifications.
B. Electrical metallic tubing may be used for all raceways run in walls or
partitions, run exposed inside the building, or run concealed in or
above furred spaces unless otherwise specified above. Electrical
metallic tubing shall comply with the latest applicable requirements of
the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Couplings,
connectors, and fittings for electrical metallic tubing may be of the set •�
screw type.
C. Raceways for site communications and site power and light shall be
Schedule 40 PVC with solvent welded fittings, or Type EB where
shown to be encased in concrete. Use steel sweeps on conduit 3" and
larger.
D. Flexible Steel Conduit shall be used for final connections to motors or
other removable equipment to facilitate removal and connections.
E. At Electrical Sub-contractor's option, conduit run under slab-on-grade
floors may be schedule 40 PVC with solvent welded fittings. Use
RGC or IMC for sweeps exiting the concrete slab. All such construction
shall be provided with a green insulated equipment grounding
conductor, from box to box, sized to the over current protection as
required by the M.E.C.
F. Sleeves provided for future installation of data and television cables shall
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 10
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive
maintenance shall be considered as being defective.
OR 1 .17 ALTERNATES
A. Refer to drawings for alternate bid items.
1 .18 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller,
required for the installation of electrical apparatus in the building, shall be
�• performed by the Electrical Contractor. All work and materials shall be
installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching
to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (i.e. beams or
joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location
for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error
due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the
responsibility of the Electrical Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall
make the corrections at his own expense.
B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General
Contractor.
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required
before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and
patching required for conduit and equipment where sleeves were not
installed or where incorrectly located. The Electrical Contractor shall do all
drilling required for the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be
performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the
Owner.
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed
concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this
area be necessary, the Electrical Contractor shall cover the entire working
area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner.
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 9
w
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
take over operation and maintenance procedures.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and
Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover:
the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of
the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and the
Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab
sheets placed before each Section. The instructions shall be legible and
easily read, with large sheets of Drawings folded in. The manuals shall be
bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The manual shall include the following information:
1 Description of systems.
2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for
each item of equipment.
3. Winter/summer changeover procedures.
4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each
item of equipment.
5. Lubrication chart.
6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation
and control of each item of equipment.
7. Valve chart, if applicable.
8. List of recommended spare parts.
9. Copies of all service contracts.
10. Performance curves for pumps, fans, etc. .�.
11 . List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors
as well as the local representative for each item of equipment.
1 .16 GUARANTEE
A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his �.
work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of final
acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his
work which are found to be defective during this period.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building
caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other
materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire
satisfaction of the Architect.
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 8
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all
offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Electrical
Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions
' affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing
such accessories as may be required to meet such conditions, at no
additional cost.
1 .12 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials
and fixtures to the building site when required, so as to carry on his work
efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades.
1 .13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for
completion of his Contract shall be provided by the individual Contractor.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines
and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the
General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall
provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work
shall be removed by the individual Contractor.
1 .14 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping, duct work, cable, and raceway shall be installed concealed in all
areas except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical
equipment rooms.
B. Exposed runs shall be run straight and level, parallel or perpendicular to
the lines of the building.
1 .15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the
proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment
installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient
* length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 7
.w
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA *+
which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which
are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Electrical Contractor will
be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at
his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1 .8 PERMITS, FEES, AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required
for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all
other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the
Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of
the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections
of his work.
1 .9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for
the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out
apparatus as specified in Division 1 .
1 .10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A. The General Contractor will furnish and install temporary light and power
as specified in Division 1 . .,
1 .11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of
interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his
estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical
and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or
implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements.
B. The Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or
reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa,
shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall not scale the Drawings.
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 6
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in
this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the
General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for
items where the words, "or equal" appear in product specifications and as
approved by the Architect and Owner.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests
secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will
be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements.
1 .6 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted other-wise, all materials
used shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect,
without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the
work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of
manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials
and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories
standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their
requirements and be so labeled.
1 .7 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Electrical Contractor shall
submit to the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data
sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of
all materials to be furnished.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for
` compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to
the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be
required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the Electrical
Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance
with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for
errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Contractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 5
w
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA '
and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The ,
Electrical Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, sup-
ports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor
may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Electrical ,
Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear
the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated
on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum
requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the
actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Electrical Contractor
shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof.
Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measure-
ments.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of
cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of
pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Electrical Con-
tractor installing such items.
G. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of
his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall
make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open
during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times.
All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable
means.
H. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and
materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the ,
project by the Owner.
I. Before submitting his bid, the Electrical Contractor shall visit the site with
the Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with
all conditions affecting his work since the Electrical Contractor will be held
responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto.
J. The Electrical Contractor shall check the Architectural Plans and
Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work.
Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before
proceeding with the work.
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 4
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
relocated and reconnected as required.
1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements
of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Massachusetts Electrical Code,
and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining thereto. Where
provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or
regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract requirements are
in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract provisions
shall govern unless the Architect rules otherwise.
+ » B. The Electrical Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement
Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner.
1 .4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Electrical Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced
„ workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on
the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in
regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work.
B. The Electrical Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned
to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive
instructions exactly as if the Electrical Contractor himself were present.
The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without
the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or
damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other
Contractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in
any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or
share of responsibility incurred by the Electrical Contractor, it is agreed
between the Owner and the Electrical Contractor that such liability and
extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose
decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the
work in question.
D. The Electrical Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all
other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall
furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations,
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 3
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 266100 - ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and
applicable parts of Division 1 , as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which
affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically
mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the
work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady
progress of all work under the Contract.
1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for
and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all electrical work
specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not
limited to, the following:
1 . Branch Circuit Wiring and Conduit.
2. Feeders.
3. Panelboards.
4. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps.
S. Fire Alarm System Modifications.
6. Wiring devices and plates.
7. Power wiring to motors and equipment furnished by other trades or
Owner including final connections to kitchen equipment.
8. Arrange for inspections and perform tests.
9. Guarantee and instructions.
10. Disconnect and remove existing electrical equipment made obsolete
by new construction. All removed equipment shall be the property
of the Owner and delivered to such places as designated by the
Owner.
11 . All existing electrical systems and equipment which are to remain in
operation and which interfere with new construction shall be
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 2
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
INDEX
SECTION 266100 - ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL PART 3 - INSTALLATION
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 GROUNDING
1.3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3.3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.4 LIGHTING FIXTURES
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.5 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
00 1.6 PRODUCTS 3.6 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
1.7 SUBMITTALS 3.7 TESTING
1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
r„ 1.9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
1.10 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
1.11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1.14 WORK CONCEALED
1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1.16 GUARANTEE
1.17 ALTERNATES
1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 RACEWAYS
2.2 WIREWAYS
2.3 CONDUCTORS
2.4 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
2.5 NAMEPLATES
2.6 WIRING DEVICES
2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURES
2.8 MOTOR STARTERS AND SWITCHES
2.9 PANEL BOARDS
2.10 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
2.11 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
ELECTRICAL 266100 - 1
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
po D. Preparation
1 . At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes.
E. Application
1 . Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no
voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment
clips where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing
insulation with sealing compound.
END OF SECTION 235500
�w
HVAC 235500 - 79
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
E. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the
Architectural section of these Specifications has been accomplished.
3.11 SPARE PARTS
A. Filters: Each air handling unit shall be provided with three (3) extra sets of
filters for each unit. One (1) set shall be installed by this Contractor after
substantial completion is issued and the two (2) remaining sets shall be
delivered to the Owner.
B. Fan Belts: This Contractor shall provide one (1) spare fan belt of each fan
installed.
D. Furnish a typewritten certificate confirming the above and stating the
Owner designated location to which the spare parts have been delivered.
Delivery of parts shall be confirmed by the Owner's representative, who
shall countersign the Certificate.
3.12 FIRE SAFING
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to
complete the work including, but not limited to the following:
1 . Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers.
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural
Drawings. ,.
4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor
walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults,
storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms,
and receiving rooms.
B. Safing Insulation
1 . Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by
USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4"
minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as
indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal
compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal,
over Thermafiber fire safing.
HVAC 235500 - 78
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
r Smith College, Northampton, MA
3.9 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP
A. The entire Heating and Ventilating system shall be tested at completion of
the building, and it shall be established that all controls are calibrated
accurately and performing satisfactorily and that all units are heating and
ventilating satisfactorily. The systems shall be checked for vibration and
excessive noise and all such conditions corrected.
B. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be
checked and thoroughly cleaned including coils, plenums, under
equipment and any and all other areas around or in equipment provided
under this Section. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced
with new filters during final clean-up.
C. At the completion of all work, all equipment on the project shall be
checked for painting damage, and any factory finished paint that has been
damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas.
D. Any metal or especially covered areas that have been deformed shall be
replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.
3.10 IDENTIFICATION
A. All piping, valves, controls and equipment on the project shall be identified
as specified herein. All marks of identification shall be easily visible from
the floor or usual point of vision.
B. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal
direction of flow. The letters shall be 1" high and the flow arrows shall be
at least 6" long. The letters and flow arrows shall be made by precut
stencils and black oil base paint with aerosol can or snap-on, pre-printed
plastic labels. Install identification in each room and additionally so that
markers are not over 50 feet on center.
C. Each valve, except runout valves, but including control valves, shall be
tagged with a brass disc 1-1 /2" in diameter. The disc shall contain a
number, and a valve list shall be provided under glass in the Boiler Room
showing the location of the valve, the service and the valve and any
pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve. Securely fasten the
discs to the valves with brass "S" hooks or chains.
D. All panel mounted controls and instruments, and all equipment shall be
identified by engraved nameplates mounted just under the control or
instrument. The engraved nameplates shall be engraved on "Lamacoid", or
approved equal plastic which will be black and show white letters when
engraved. Letters shall be 1 /2" high.
HVAC 235500 - 77
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
to be still on the acid side, the cleaning by the use of trisodium phosphate
shall be repeated.
E. The HVAC Contractor shall not add any water treatment chemicals, or at
any time "stop-leak" compounds to the system.
3.6 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS
A. After completion of the installation of the heating, ventilating, and exhaust
systems, and prior to acceptance by the Owner, all systems and
appurtenances applicable to the above systems shall be adjusted and
balanced to deliver the water and air quantities as specified, indicated on
the Drawings, or as directed.
B. Balancing shall be performed by an independent contractor hired directly
by the Owner.
3.7 INSULATION
A. All pipe and duct insulation shall be installed by an independent insulation
contractor regularly engaged in that business.
B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls nor on branches running
through radiator covers. Longitudinal seams on jackets shall be located so
that they are not visible from the floor. Remove all stickers from covering.
C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly
together and sealed with butt strips. Insulation shall run through all ...
hangers and sleeves and have an 18 gauge sheet metal saddle equal to
three times the pipe diameter in length. All pipes over 2" in diameter shall
be supported through insulation by fitting a protection saddle to the
thickness of the insulation inside the vapor barrier jacket.
D. All fittings, valves, etc. shall be insulated with the proper factory pre-cut
insulation. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly into the
throat of the fitting and the edge adjacent to the pipe covering tufted and
tucked into fully insulated pipe fitting. The one piece PVC fitting cover
shall then be secured by taping the ends of the adjacent pipe covering. '
3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance
with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown
on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish
this shall be furnished by the HVAC Contractor and be included in his bid.
HVAC 235500 - 76
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
"SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31 .9, Code for Pressure Piping, Building
Services Piping.
D. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10
minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate
leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate,
and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
E. After system has been determined to be leak-free, the Engineer shall be
- notified and the test shall be repeated in his or his representative's
presence.
F. When delicate control mechanisms are installed in the piping system, they
shall be removed during the tests to prevent shock damage. This does not
apply to control valves.
G. Leaks developing subsequent to these tests shall not be repaired by mastic
or other temporary means. All leaks shall be repaired by removal of the
valve, fitting, joint, or section that is leaking and reinstalling new material
with joints as specified herein before.
3.5 CLEANING AND FLUSHING
A. All water circulating systems for the project shall be thoroughly cleaned
before placing in operation to rid the system of dirt, piping compound,
mill scale, oil, and any and all other material foreign to the water being
circulated. Clean all strainers.
B. Extreme care shall be exercised during construction to prevent all dirt and
other foreign matter from entering the pipe or other parts of the system.
Pipe stored on the project shall have the open ends capped and equipment
shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each piece of pipe,
fitting, or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed.
C. After system is complete, the Heating & Ventilating Contractor shall add
trisodium phosphate in an aqueous solution to the system at the propor-
tion of one pound per fifty gallons of water in the system. After the
system is filled with this solution, the system shall be brought up to
temperature and allowed to circulate for two hours. The system shall then
be drained completely and refilled with fresh water. The Engineer shall be
given notice of this cleaning operation and he or his representative shall be
present to observe the cleaning operation, and, if he deems it necessary,
r* the cleaning operation shall be repeated.
D. After the system has been completely cleaned as specified herein, it shall
• be tested by litmus paper or other dependable method and shall be left on
the slightly alkaline side (ph = 7.5 plus or minus). If the system is found
�„ HVAC 235500 - 75
R
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA '
B. Where screwed fittings are used, bushings shall not be used from branch
connections or reducers. Connections to equipment shall be full size of .�
tappings. Reductions in the run of pipe shall be made with eccentric or
concentric reducers as required for draining and venting.
C. All piping shall be run concealed throughout finished spaces either in
furred spaces, shafts, chases, or above hung ceilings.
D. Special care must be taken throughout the equipment rooms, vertical pipe
shafts, above hung ceilings, and elsewhere throughout all floors to
maintain maximum headroom and clearances for access to other
equipment and to avoid conflict with electrical conduits, lighting fixtures,
other piping, ducts, and equipment of other trades.
E. Connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit
future replacement, removal and servicing of equipment. Flexible connec-
tions where required to isolate movement of equipment from piping
system or of piping system from equipment, shall be as specified.
F. Before any part of the various piping systems is placed in operation, blow
out piping with compressed air and/or water to remove all chips and scale
and flush and drain until all traces of dirt, scale and other foreign matter
have disappeared. Refer to other sections for additional requirements.
G. Vent all high points and drain all low points throughout the system.
3.4 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS
A. All piping installed on the project, unless specifically shown otherwise,
shall be hydraulically tested as specified herein. The HVAC Contractor ,
shall provide all equipment required to make the tests specified herein.
Piping may be tested a section at a time in order to facilitate the
construction.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall fill the section of pipe to be tested with water
and bring the section up to pressure with a test pump. These tests shall
be conducted before any insulation is installed and any insulation installed
prior to these tests shall be removed. Gauges used in the tests shall have
been recently calibrated with a dead weight tester.
C. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in
the system is not less than 1 .5 times the design pressure. The test
pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump,
valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a check to verify
that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not
exceed either 90% of specified minimum yield strength, or 1 .7 times the
HVAC 235500 - 74
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
` 3.1 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM
A. No air handling units shall be run for temporary heating, ventilating,
testing, or otherwise without filters in place.
B. Upon completion of construction and before testing, the interior of all air
handling units and plenums shall be vacuum cleaned to remove all
OR construction dirt, dust, etc. before the units are turned on, and clean filters
shall be installed.
3.2 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING
A. Drilling of all holes 2" diameter and smaller required for the installation of
heating and ventilating piping and equipment shall be performed by the
HVAC Contractor. Cutting and patching shall be performed by the General
Contractor in accordance with the General Conditions. All work and
materials shall be installed in such a manner and at such time to keep
! cutting and patching to a minimum. Location for chases, openings, etc.
shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to co-
ordinate work with other Divisions shall be the responsibility of the HVAC
Contractor, who shall make the corrections as his own expense.
B. Work shall include furnishing and locating inserts required before the
floors and walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and
patching required for pipes where sleeves and inserts were not installed, or
where incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling
required for the installation of hangers. Patching of all holes, after
installation of piping or equipment shall be performed by the General
Contractor.
C. As the work nears completion, all pipe cutting and threading, etc. shall be
done in a location approved by the Engineer.
D. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed
concrete floor slab is to remain as finished or be painted later. Should use
of such an area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor shall cover the working
area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner.
3.3 PIPE INSTALLATION
A. All piping shall be run true and straight at proper pitch without strain and
shall be firmly supported throughout. Provision for expansion and
contraction shall be made with offsets or expansion loops. All pipe shall
be cut off clean and threaded with sharp dies, reamed and burrs removed.
HVAC 235500 - 73
w
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
aluminum inlet cone to provide maximum performance and efficiency.
Wheel shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard 204-96,
Balancing Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.
F. Motor: Motor shall be heavy duty, premium efficiency type with
permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings and furnished for the ,.
specified voltage, phase and enclosure.
G. Blower Shaft: Blower shaft shall be AISI C-1045 hot rolled and accurately
turned, ground and polished. Shaft shall be sized for critical speed of at
least 125% of maximum RPM.
H. Bearings: Bearings shall be designed and tested specifically for use in air
handling applications. Construction shall be heavy duty regreaseable
ball or roller type in a cast iron pillow block housing and selected for a
minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged
operating speed.
I. Belts and Drives: Belts shall be oil and heat resistant, non-static type.
Drives shall be precision machined cast iron type, keyed and securely
attached to the wheel and motor shafts. Drives shall be sized for 150%
of the installed motor horsepower. The variable pitch motor drive must
be factory set to the specified fan RPM. All drives shall utilize a minimum
of two belts. Provide each fan with a belt guard. Fabricate guard to
comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements. Secure to fan or fan
supports without short-circuiting vibration isolators. Include provisions
for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication and use of tachometer while
guard is in place. *
J. Accessories: Provide the following accessories as required by the
drawings, schedules or application:
1 . Non-fused disconnect switch.
2. Scroll access doors with quick-opening latches and gaskets.
3. Companion flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same
material as fan housing.
4. Scroll drain connection: NPS 1 steel pipe coupling welded to low point
of fan scroll.
5. Inlet screens: Grid screen of same material as housing on all open
inlets.
6. Seismic restrained spring vibration isolators.
7. Weather cover: Enameled steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to
housing for all units mounted outdoors.
K. Fan shall be Cook model CA-SWSI or equal by Greenheck or Twin City.
HVAC 235500 - 72
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
o. insulation practices
P. installation method by construction type
q. control applications
r. system start-up procedures
2. Drawings: All drawings or design plans of the radiant tubing
system shall be in accordance with manufacturer recommended
procedures for the products utilized.
3. Components: All product components of the radiant tubing
system shall be supplied by one company, including: PEX tubing,
fittings, manifolds, and other recommended and required
hardware to assure a compatible and a complete radiant tubing
system.
2.23 UTILITY FANS
A. Description: The fan shall be a single width, single inlet backward
inclined airfoil, belt-driven centrifugal blower.
B. Certifications: Fan shall be manufacturer at an ISO 9001 certified facility.
Fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL/cUL 705) for U.s. and
Canada. Fan shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air
performance.
C. Construction: The fan shall be of bolted and welded construction
utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. The scroll wrapper and scroll side
panels shall be a minimum of 12 gauge steel. The entire fan housing
` shall have continuously welded seams for leakproof operation and shall
have a minimum of 1 %" outlet discharge flange. A performance cut-off
shall be furnished to prevent recirculation of air in the fan housing.
' Bearing support shall be minimum 10 gauge welded steel. Lifting eyes
shall be provided for ease of installation. Unit shall bear an engraved
aluminum nameplate. Nameplate shall indicate design CFM, static
pressure and maximum fan RPM. Unit shall be shipped in ISTA certified
transit tested packaging.
D. Coating: Steel fan components shall be Lorenized with an electrostatically
applied, baked polyester powder coating. Each component shall be
subject to a five stage environmentally friendly wash system, followed by
a minimum 2 mil thick baked powder finish. Paint must exceed 1 ,000
hour salt spray under ASTM B1 17 test method
E. Wheel: Wheel shall be steel, non-overloading, centrifugal backward
inclined, airfoil type. Blades shall be continuously welded to the
backplate and deep spun inlet shroud. All sizes shall be keyed and
securely attached to the fan shaft. Wheel shall overlap an aerodynamic
,,,� HVAC 235500 - 71
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
valve shall be able to fully close to allow complete loop
isolation.
f. Supply/Return Indication: Each loop supply module shall be
red to indicate incoming hot water, and each return loop
module shall be blue to indicate cooler return water.
g. Loop Isolation: Each loop supply and return module shall
have a means of fully isolating the loop from the rest of the
system. ,
h. Piping Inlet/Outlet Size: All manifold inlets/outlets shall be
1 -1 /4" NPT female, to fit maximum size plumbing and
greater system adaptability.
3. Fittings
a. Fitting Composition: Brass compression fittings consisting
of nut, ferrule and insert with a ring for connecting PEX or
copper tubing to manifold.
b. Fitting Types: Manifold to PEX tubing sizes 3/8", 1 /2",
5/8" 3/4"
Manifold to 1 /2" copper tubing
Hose Bib
Manifold Cap
C. Required Features: Well fitting, easily installed. Copper
tubing should not require soldering.
D. System Requirements
1 . Installations: Radiant tubing systems shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. All relevant information shall be included
relating to the following:
a. tube handling
b. tube measuring
C. tube cutting
d. tube bending ,
e. tube repairing
f. tube connections
g. tube solvent sensitivity
h. tube UV light sensitivity
i. tube capacity and pressure drop
j. tube loop layout patterns
k. tube fastening procedures '"
I. manifold assembly instructions
M. manifold location
n. fitting assembly instructions
HVAC 235500 - 70
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
3/8" tubing 3.0" radius
1 /2" tubing 3.75" radius
5/8" tubing 4.5" radius
3/4" tubing 5.75" radius
n. Marking: All PEX tubing shall be marked at intervals of not
more than five (5) feet in accordance with ASTM F876 as
follows:
1 . Nominal tubing size.
2. Type of plastic tubing material.
3. Standard dimension Ratio, SDR9.
4. Pressure rating for water and temperature for which the
pressure rating is valid.
5. ASTM designation, ASTM F876.
6. Manufacturer's name and production code.
Additional Marking
1 . Date of manufacturing.
2. Oxygen diffusion protection to DIN4726.
3. Length indications in five (5) foot intervals, for ease of
measuring the tubing.
2. Manifolds: Manifolds used in PEX tubing installation shall consist
of individual loop control and adaptation utilizing modular
Polyacrylamide thermoplastic components ready for assembly.
The manifold should also include the following features:
a. Modular Design: This eliminates the need for multiple
manifold configurations and allows for future expansion.
b. Venting: Each supply and return vent/temperature module
shall have an automatic integrated air vent.
C. Temperature Measurements: Each supply and return
manifold shall have a thermometer integrated to indicate
supply and return water temperatures. Temperature
readouts will assist in the diagnostics and set up of a
radiant heating system.
d. Flow Measurements: Each loop return block shall have
incremental adjustment and flow rate indication.
Temperature and flow readouts will assist in the diagnostics
and set up of a radiant heating system.
e. Balancing Valves: Each return block will provide a balancing
valve and a visual flow meter for proper balancing of the
radiant heating system allowing different loop lengths and
tube sizes to be connected to the same manifold. Each
HVAC 235500 - 69
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
5/8" 0.750" 0.083" 3/4"
0.875" 0.097"
g. Density: The crosslinked polyethylene tubing material shall
have a density in the range from 0.926 to 0.949 Mg/m3.
h. Sustained Pressure:
Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Minimum Burst
Size Pressure Pressure
psi @ 1 80o psi @ 1 80o
3/8" 250 210
1 /2" 195 165
5/8" 190 165
3/4" 190 165
i. Burst Pressure: The minimum burst pressure for PEX plastic
tubing shall be as given.
Nominal Tube Minimum Burst Minimum Burst
Size Pressure Pressure '
psi @ 1 80o psi @ 1 80o
3/8" 275 235
1 /2" 215 185
5/8" 210 180 +
3/4" 210 180
j. Environmental Stress Cracking: 'There shall be no loss of
pressure in the tubing when tested in accordance with 7.9"
(paragraph of ASTM F876).
k. Degree of Crosslinking: "When tested in accordance with
7.9, (paragraph of ASTM F876), the degree of crosslinking
for PEX tubing material shall be within the range of 65% to
89% inclusive."
I. Stabilizer Migration Resistance: "When tested in accordance
with 7.10 (paragraph of ASTM F876), the time t2 (t2 = time
to failure of boiled sample) shall be at least 50% of the time,
t," (t, = time to failure of unboiled sample). '
M. Bend Radius: The minimum bend radius for cold bending
of the tube shall not be more than six (6) times the outside
diameter for up to a 90 degree bend. For 180 degree
bends, the minimum bend radius shall be as follows:
HVAC 235500 - 68
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
B. References
1 . American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification
F876, entitled "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing".
2. American Society of Testing and Materials, Standard Specification
F877 entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic Hot and Cold
Water Distribution Systems".
3. German Standard DIN 4726, "Pipelines of plastic materials used in
warm water floor heating systems".
C. Materials
1 . Tube
a. Tube Composition: Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) in
accordance with ASTM F876.
b. Manufacturing Method: All PEX tubing shall be
manufactured using the "electron beam method of
crosslinking, performed at ambient temperature and
pressure.
C. Working Pressure/Temperature: The minimum continuous
working pressure rating of the PEX tubing shall be 100 psi
@ 180 F working temperature and 80 psi @ 200 F working
temperature.
d. Physical Properties: As supplied by Embassy Industries,
Inc., all PEX tubing shall conform to ASTM F876 "American
Society of Testing and materials, Standard Specification
` F876 entitled, "Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing", and
German Standard DIN 4726 for "Oxygen Permeation" as
related to the following paragraphs:
e. Tubing: The tubing shall be homogeneous throughout and
essentially uniform in color, opacity, density, and other
properties. The inside and outside surfaces shall be matte
or glossy in appearance. the tubing walls shall be free of
cracks, holes, blisters, voids, foreign inclusion, or other
defects that are visible to the naked eye and that may affect
the wall integrity.
f. Dimensions and Tolerances
Nominal Average Outside Minimum
Tubing Size Diameter Wall
Thickness
3/8" 0.500" 0.070"
1 /2" 0.625" 0.070"
, , HVAC 235500 - 67
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
C. All piping in mechanical equipment rooms less than 1 -1 /4
in. 1.D.
d. All clevis or trapeze supported piping suspended from
hanger rods where the point of attachment is less than the
12 in. in length from the structure to the structural
connection of the clevis or trapeze.
e. All PVC and fiberglass suspended waste or vent pipe 6 in. in
diameter and smaller.
2. Ductwork:
a. Rectangular, square or oval ducts less than 6 sq. ft. in
cross sectional area.
b. Round duct less than 28 in. in diameter.
C. Duct supported by hanger rods where the point of
attachment is less than 12 in. in length from the structure
to the structural connection of the duct work.
R. Suspended Equipment:
1 . VAV boxes and fan powered equipment weighing less than 50 lbs.
and rigidly connected to the supply side of the duct system and �*
supported with a minimum if 4 hanger rods.
S. Schedules:
Vibration Isolation and / or
Seismic Restraint
Equipment Schedule Specification Static
Deflection
Air Handling Units and Centrifugal 1 , 4, 19 Internal
Exhaust Fans Isolation
Pumps - In-Line 23
2.22 RADIANT HEATING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
A. Scope of Work
1 . This Specification is to provide relevant product data for a radiant
tubing system consisting of PEX tubing with oxygen permeation .�
protection, distribution manifolds and associated fittings.
HVAC 235500 - 66
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
O. Seismic Restraint of Ductwork:
1 . Seismically restrain all duct work with Specification 12 or 13
restraints as listed below:
a. Restrain rectangular ducts with cross sectional area of 6 sq.
ft. or larger.
b. Restrain round ducts with diameters of 28 in. or larger.
C. Restrain flat oval ducts the same way as rectangular ducts
of the same nominal size.
2. Transverse restraints shall occur at 30' intervals or at both ends of
the duct run if less than the specified interval. Transverse
restraints shall be installed at each duct turn and at each end of a
duct run.
3. Longitudinal restraints shall occur at 60' intervals with at least one
restraint per duct run. Transverse restraints for one duct section
connected perpendicular to it if the restraints are installed within
4' of the intersection of the ducts and if the restraints are sized for
the larger duct. Duct joints shall conform to SMACNA duct
construction standards.
4. The ductwork must be reinforced at the restraint locations.
Reinforcement shall consist of an additional angle on top of the
ductwork that is attached to the support hanger rods. Ductwork is
to be attached to both upper angle and lower trapeze.
5. A group of ducts may be combined in a larger frame so that the
combined weights and dimensions of the ducts are less than or
equal to the maximum weight and dimensions of the duct for
which bracing details are selected.
6. Walls, including gypsum board non bearing partitions, which have
ducts running through them may replace a typical transverse
brace. Provide channel framing around ducts and solid blocking
between the duct and frame.
P. All mechanical equipment shall be vibration isolated and seismically
restrained as per the schedules in paragraph S of this Specification.
Q. Seismic Restraint Exclusions:
1 . Piping:
a. All piping less than 2-1 /2 in. in diameter except those
listed below.
b. All gas piping and medical gas piping less than 1 in. I.D.
OR
HVAC 235500 - 65
�w
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
a. Fuel oil piping, gas piping, medical gas piping, and
compressed air piping that is 1 in. I.D. or larger.
b. Piping located in Mechanical Rooms, mechanical
equipment (fan) rooms, and refrigeration equipment
rooms that is 1 -1 /4 in. I.D. and larger.
C. All other piping 2-1 /2 in. diameter and larger.
2. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40' maximum
spacing for all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is
required to limit anchorage loads.
3. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80' maximum spacing for
all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to
limit anchorage loads.
4. Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and
anchors may be used as transverse and longitudinal
restraints provided they have a capacity equal to or greater
than the restraint loads in addition to the loads induced by
expansion or contraction.
5. For fuel oil and all gas piping transverse restraints must be
at 20 ft. maximum and longitudinal restraints at 40 ft.
maximum spacing.
6. Transverse restraint for one (1) pipe section may also act as
a longitudinal restraint for a pipe section of the same size
connected perpendicular to it if the restraint is installed
within allowable limits at longer distances.
7. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all
trapeze members before applying restraints in a manner
similar to clevis supports.
8. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main lines.
9. Cast-iron pipe of all types, glass pipe and any other pipes
joined with a four band shield and clamp assembly in Zones
213, 3 and 4 shall be braced as in sections 3.02.C.2 and 3.
For Zones 0, 1 and 2A, 2 band clamps may be used with
reduced spacings of 1 /2 of those listed in sections 3.02.C2
and 3.
N. Vibration Isolation of Ductwork:
1 . All discharge runs for a distance of 50' from the connected
equipment shall be isolated from the building structure by means
of Specification 10 hangers or Specification 5 floor isolators.
Spring deflection shall be a minimum 0.75 in.
2. All duct runs having air velocity of 1000 fpm or more shall be
isolated from the building structure by Specification 11 hangers or
5 floor supports. Spring deflection shall be a minimum of 0.75 in.
HVAC 235500 - 64
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
L. Vibration Isolation of Piping:
1 . Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three (3) pipe hangers in
the main lines near the mechanical equipment shall be as
" described in Specification 11 . Specification 11 hangers
must also be used in all transverse braced isolated
locations. Brace hanger rods with SRC clamps Specification
14. Horizontal runs in all other locations throughout the
building shall be isolated by hangers as described in
Specification 10. Floor supported piping shall rest on
isolators as described in Specification 6. Heat exchangers
and expansion tanks are considered part of the piping run.
The first three (3) isolators from the isolated equipment will
have the same static deflection as specified for the
mountings under the connected equipment. If piping is
connected to equipment located in basements and hangs
from ceilings under occupied spaces the first three hangers
shall have 0.75 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and
including 3 in., 1 -1 /2 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and
including 6 in., and 2-1 /2 in. deflection thereafter.
Hangers shall be located as close to the overhead structure
as practical. Where piping connects to mechanical
equipment install Specification 23 flexible piping
connection or Specification 24 stainless steel hoses is 23 is
not suitable for the service.
2. Riser Isolation: Risers shall be suspended from
Specification 10 hangers or supported by Specification 5
mountings, anchored with Specification 25 anchors, and
guided with Specification 26 sliding guides. Steel springs
shall be a minimum of 0.75 in. except in those expansion
locations where additional deflection is required to limit
load changes to 6 25% of the initial load. Submittals must
include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated
expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and
final changes and seismic loads. Submittal data shall
include certification that the riser system has been
examined for excessive stresses and that none will exist in
the proposed design.
M. Seismic Restraint of Piping:
1 . Seismically restrain all piping listed as a, b or c below. Use
Specification 12 cables if isolated. Specification 12 or 13
restraints may be used on unisolated piping.
HVAC 235500 - 63
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
8. Correct, at no additional cost, all installations which are
deemed defective in workmanship and materials at the
Contractor's expense.
9. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur
because of overhead support of equipment. Contractor
must submit loads to the structural engineer of record for
approval. Generally bracing may occur from:
a. Flanges of structural beams.
b. Upper truss cords in bar joist construction.
C. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete
anchors.
10. Specification 12 cable restraints shall be installed slightly
slack to avoid short circuiting the isolated suspended
equipment, piping or conduit.
11 . Specification 12 cable assemblies are installed taut on non-
isolated systems. Specification 13 seismic solid braces may
be used in place of cables on rigidly attached systems only.
12. At locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are
located, the support rods must be braced when necessary
to accept compressive loads with Specification 14 braces.
13. At all locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are
located, the support rods must be braced when necessary
to accept compressive loads with Specification 14 braces.
14. Drill-in concrete anchors for ceiling and wall installation
shall be Specification type 18, and Specification type 19
female wedge type for floor mounted equipment.
15. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral
structural steel bases as required. Independent steel rails
are not permitted on this project.
16. Hand built elastomeric expansion joints may be used when
pipe sizes exceed 24 in. or specified movements exceed
Specification 23 capabilities. ,
17. Where piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings the
vibration isolation manufacturer shall provide Specification
27 wall seals.
18. Air handling equipment and centrifugal fans shall be
protected against excessive displacement which results
from high air throughst in relation to the equipment weight.
Horizontal throughst restraint shall be Specification type
28 (see selection guide).
19. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support
structure as possible.
HVAC 235500 - 62
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
the sponge. Seals shall be Type SWS as manufactured by
Mason Industries, Inc.
28. The horizontal throughst restraint shall consist of a spring
element in series with a neoprene molded cup as described
in Specification 5 with the same deflection as specified for
the mountings or hangers. The spring element shall be
designed so it can be preset for throughst at the factory
and adjusted in the field to allow for a maximum of 1 /4 in.
movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be
furnished with one (1) rod and angle brackets for
attachment to both the equipment and the duct work or the
equipment and structure. Horizontal restraints shall be
attached at the centerline of throughst and symmetrical on
either side of the unit. Horizontal throughst restraints shall
!" be Type WBI/WBD as manufactured by Mason Industries,
Inc.
K. Execution - General:
1 . All vibration isolators and seismic restraint systems must be
installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers written
instruction and all certified submittal data.
2. Installation of vibration isolators and seismic restraints
must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping
or duct work resulting in stresses or misalignment.
3. No rigid connections between equipment and the building
structure shall be made that degrades the noise and
vibration control system herein specified.
4. The Contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, duct
or conduit which makes rigid connections with the building
unless isolation is not specified. "Building" includes, but is
not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls.
5. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact
with the building.
6. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid
contact with equipment or piping due to inadequate space
or other unforeseen conditions should be brought to the
architects/engineers attention prior to installation.
Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation
shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense.
7. Bring to the architects/engineers attention any
discrepancies between the Specifications and the field
+► conditions or changes required due to specific equipment
selection, prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated
by discrepancies after installation shall be at the
• responsible Contractor's expense.
HVAC 235500 - 61
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SFDCR or SFU and Control Rods CR as manufactured by
Mason Industries, Inc.
24. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid
and carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3 in. and larger shall be
flanged. Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Minimum
lengths shall be as tabulated:
Flanged Male Nipples
3x 14 10x26 1 /2x9 1 -1 /2x 13
4x 1512x28 3/4x10 2x14
5x1914x30 1 x11 2-1 /2x18
6x2016x32 1 /4x12
Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-
off valves horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts
wherever possible. Hoses shall be Type BSS as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
25. All-directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of two
sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1 /2 in. thick
60 durometer neoprene. Vertical restraint shall be provided
by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in
either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material
should not exceed 500 psi and the design shall be balanced
for equal resistance in any direction. All-directional
anchors shall be Type ADA as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
26. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two
sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1 /2 in.
thickness of 60 durometer neoprene. The height if the
guides shall be preset with a shear pin to allow vertical
motion due to pipe expansion or contraction. Shear pin
shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of
pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of 6 1 -5/8 in.
motion, or to meet location requirements. Pipe guides shall
be Type VSG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
27. Split Wall Seals consists of two bolted pipe halves with
minimum 3/4 in. thick neoprene sponge bonded to the
inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to
eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the
piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it
integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not
already in place around the pipe prior to the construction of
the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of 1
in. past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed
240 dig. F., 10 lb. density fiberglass may be used in lieu of
HVAC 235500 - 60
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
to the top floating rail, and the lower Z section anchored to
the roof structure. Curb shall have anchorage pre-approval
"R" from OSHPD in the State of California attesting to the
maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings.
Curb shall be Type RSC as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
23. Flexible spherical piping connectors shall employ peroxide
cured EPDM in the covers, liners and Dacron tire cord
frictioning. Solid steel rings shall be used within the raised
face rubber ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead
wire is not acceptable. Sizes 2 in. and larger shall have two
spheres reinforced with a ring between spheres to maintain
shape and complete with split ductile iron or steel flanges
with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16 in. to 24 in. may
be single sphere. Sizes 3/4 in. to 1-1 /2 in. may have
threaded bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and cable
retention. 14 in. and smaller connectors shall be rated at
250 psi up to 1908 F with a uniform drop in allowable
pressure to 190 psi at 2508 F. 16 in. and larger connectors
are rated 180 psi at 1908 F and 135 psi at 2508 F. Safety
factors to burst and flange pullout shall be a minimum of
3/1 . All joints must have permanent markings verifying a 5
minute factory test at twice the rated pressure. Concentric
reducers to the above Specifications may be substituted for
equal ended expansion joints.
Pipe connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to
the length of the expansion joints under pressure. Control
rods need only be used in unanchored piping locations
p• where the manufacturer determines the installation exceeds
the pressure requirement without control rods, as control
rods are not desirable in seismic work. If control rods are
used, they must have 1 /2 in. thick Neoprene washer
bushings large enough in area to take the throughst at
1000 psi maximum on the washer area. Expansion joints
shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off
valves.
Submittals shall include two (2) test reports by independent
consultants showing minimum reductions of 20 DB in
vibration accelerations and 10 DB in sound pressure levels
at typical blade passage frequencies on this or a similar
product by the same manufacturer. All expansion joints
shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off
valves. Expansion joints shall be SAFEFLEX SFDEJ, SFEj,
,, HVAC 235500 - 59
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
its allowable loads. Drill-in stud edge anchors shall be
Type SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
19. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so
isolators or equipment can be slid into place after the
anchors are installed. Anchors shall be manufactured from
full diameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully A,
support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge anchors
shall have an evaluation report number from I.C.B.O.
Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable loads.
Drill-in female wedge anchors shall be Type SAB as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
20. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular
steel concrete pouring forms for floating and inertia w
foundations. Bases for split case pumps shall be large
enough to provide for suction and discharge of elbows.
bases shall be a minimum of 1 /12 of the longest dimension
of the base but not less than 6in. The base depth need not
exceed 12 in. unless specifically recommended by the base
manufacturer for mass or rigidity. Forms shall include
minimum concrete reinforcing consisting of 1 /2 in. bars
welded in place on 6 in. centers running both ways in a
layer 1 -1 /2 in. above the bottom. Forms shall be furnished
with steel templates to hold the anchor bolt sleeves and
anchors while concrete is being poured. Height saving
brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to *■
maintain a 1 in. clearance below the base. Wooden formed
bases leaving a concrete rather than a steel finish are not
acceptable. Base shall be Type BMK o K as manufactured by
Mason Industries, Inc.
22. Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on
spring isolation curbs. The lower member shall consist of a
sheet metal Z section containing adjustable and removable
steel springs that support the upper floating section. The
upper frame must provide continuous support for the
equipment and must be captive so as to resiliently resist
wind and seismic forces. All directional neoprene snubber
bushings shall be a minimum of 1 /4 in. thick. Steel springs
shall be laterally stable and rest on 1 /4 in. thick neoprene
acoustical pads. Hardware must be plated and the springs
provided with a rust resistant finish. The curbs
waterproofing shall consist of a continuous galvanized
flexible counter flashing nailed over the lower curbs
waterproofing and joined at the corners by EPDM bellows.
All spring locations shall have access ports with removable
waterproof covers. Lower curbs shall have provision for 2
in. of insulation. The roof curbs shall be built to seismically
contain the rooftop unit. The unit must be solidly fastened
HVAC 235500 - 58
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
15. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint
locations. They shall be special purpose performed
channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts passing
over the cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall have an
Anchorage Pre-approval "R"Number from OSHPD in the
State of California. Clevis cross brace shall be Type CCB as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
16. All-directional seismic snubbers shall consist of
interlocking steel members restrained by a one-piece
molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing neoprene.
Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of 1 /4 in.
thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. A
minimum air gap of 1 /8 in: shall be incorporated in the
snubber design in all directions before contact is made
between the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps
shall be removable t allow inspection of internal clearances.
Neoprene bushings shall be rotated to insure no short
circuits exist before systems are activated. Snubbers shall
have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in
the State of California verifying the maximum certified
horizontal and vertical load ratings. Snubber shall be Type
Z-1225 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
17. All directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking
steel members restrained by shock absorbent rubber
materials compounded to bridge bearing Specifications.
Elastomeric materials shall be replaceable and a minimum
of 3/4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi.
Snubbers shall be manufactured with air gap between hard
and resilient material of nor less than 1 /8 in. nor more than
1 /4 in. Snubbers shall be installed with factory set
clearances. The capacity of the seismic snubber at 3/8 in.
deflection shall be equal or greater than the load assigned
to the mounting grouping controlled by the snubber
multiplied by the applicable "G" force. Submittals shall
include the load deflection in the x, y and z planes.
Snubbers shall have an anchorage pre-approval "R"Number
from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the
maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings.
Snubbers shall be series Z-101 1 as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
18. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full
diameter wire, not from undersized wire that is "rolled up"
to create the thread. The stud anchor shall also have a
safety shoulder which fully supports the wedge ring under
load. The stud anchors shall have an evaluation report
number from the I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying
HVAC 235500 - 57
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Hangers shall be Type 30N as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
11 . Hangers shall be as described in 10, but they shall be pre-
compressed and locked at the rated deflection by means of
a resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or equipment
at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall
be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring
after the installation is complete and the hanger is
subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly
indicated by means of a scale. Submittals shall include a
Drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability.
Hangers shall be Type PC30N as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
12. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel
aircraft cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum
safety factor of two (2) and arranged to provide all-
directional restraint. Cable end connections shall be steel
assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize
two (2) clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement.
Cables must not be allowed to bend across sharp edges.
Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R"
Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the
maximum certified load ratings. Cable assemblies shall be
Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH between
the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a
beam all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
13. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or
channels to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety •
factor of 2 and arranged to provide all directional restraint.
Seismic solid brace end connectors shall be steel
assemblies that swivel to the final installation angle and
utilize two through bolts to provide proper attachment.
Seismic solid brace assembly shall have anchorage pre-
approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California
verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Solid seismic
brace assemblies shall be Type SSB as manufactured by
Mason Industries, Inc.
14. Steel angles, sized to pre-vent buckling, shall be clamped
to pipe or equipment rods utilizing a minimum of three
ductile iron clamps at each restraint location when required.
Welding of support rods is not acceptable. Rod clamp
assemblies shall have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R"
Number from OSHPD in the State of California. Rod clamp
assemblies shall be Type SRC as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
HVAC 235500 - 56
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
allow a maximum if 1 /4 in. travel in all directions before
contacting the resilient snubbing collars. Mountings shall
have an Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in
the State of California verifying the maximum certified
horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be
SSLFH as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
8. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower
steel sections connected by a replaceable flexible nylon
reinforced neoprene element. Air spring configuration shall
be multiple bellows to achieve a maximum natural
frequency of 3 Hz. Air Springs shall be designed for a burst
pressure that is a minimum of three times the published
maximum operating pressure. All air spring systems shall
be connected to either the building control air or a
supplementary air supply and equipped with three (3)
leveling valves to maintain leveling within plus or minus
1 /8in. Submittals shall include natural frequency, load, and
damping tests performed by an independent lab or
acoustician. Air Springs shall be Type MT and leveling
valves Type LV as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
9. Restrained air spring mountings shall have a MT air spring
as described in Specification 8, within a rigid housing that
includes vertical limit stops to prevent air spring extension
when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as
blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed
after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal.
A minimum clearance of 1 .2 in. shall be maintained around
restraining bolts and between the housing and the air
spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during
normal operation. Housing shall be designed to resist all
seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR-MT as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
10. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing
minimum 1 -1 /4 in. thick neoprene elements at the top and
a steel spring with general characteristics as in Specification
5 seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the
bottom. The neoprene element and the cup shall have
neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. To
maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as
clevis hangers or the neoprene element stacked on top of
the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole
sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to
swing through a 308 arc from side to side before contacting
the rod bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals
shall include a hanger Drawing showing the 308 capability.
HVAC 235500 - 55
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
outer sleeve prevents the sheet metal from cutting into the
neoprene. Enlarge panel holes as required. Neoprene
elements pass over the bushing to cushion the back panel
horizontally. A steel disc covers the inside neoprene
element and the inner steel sleeve is elongated to act as a
stop so tightening the anchor bolts does not interfere with
panel isolation in three (3) planes. Bushing assemblies can
be applied to the ends of steel cross members where
applicable. All assemblies shall be Type PB as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
4. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene
washer/bushing. The bushing shall surround the anchor
bolt and have a flat face to avoid metal to metal contact.
Neoprene bushings shall be Type HG as manufactured by
Mason Industries, Inc.
5. Spring isolators shall be free standing, laterally stable
without any housing, and complete with a molded neoprene
cup or 1 /4 in. neoprene acoustical friction pad between the
baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have
leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment.
Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 if the
compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs *
shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50%
of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring
diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid *�+
spring height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
6. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as
described in Specification 5, within a rigid housing that
includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension
when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as
blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed
after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal.
A minimum clearance of 1 /2 in. shall be maintained
around restraining bolts and between the housing and the
spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit
stops shall be out of contact during normal operation.
Since housings will be bolted or welded in position there
must be an internal isolation pad. Housing shall be
designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall have
Anchorage Pre-approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the
state of California certifying the maximum certified
horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be SLR
as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
7. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile
iron or steel housing to provide all directional seismic
snubbing. The snubber shall be adjustable vertically and
HVAC 235500 - 54
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
BOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.15 0.1 0.15 0.6 0.2
SBCCI
I. Product Intent:
1 . All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in
this section shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
Mason Industry's products are the basis of these
Specifications; products of other manufacturers are
acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with the
Specifications and have the approval of the specifying
engineer. Submittals and certification sheets shall be in
accordance with Section D.
2. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the
discontinuance of any attachment point between equipment
or structure, vertical permanent deformation greater than
1 /8 in. and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater
than 1 /4 in.
J. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic
Restraints:
1. Two (2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2
„ in. square waffle modules separated horizontally by a 16
gauge galvanized shim. Load distribution plates shall be
used as required. Pads shall be Type Super "W” as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
2. Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum
static deflection of 0.2 in. and all directional seismic
capability. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron casting
containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene
elements. The elements shall prevent the central threaded
sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting
during normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene
materials shall be compounded to bridge-bearing
Specifications. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Pre-
'"' approval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California
verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load
ratings. Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by
Mason Industries, Inc.
3. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or
supporting structure by assemblies consisting of a
• neoprene bushing cushioned between 2 steel sleeves. The
HVAC 235500 - 53
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA "
a. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad
attachment to the structure details and design shall
be prepares by the restraint vendor if not already „
indicated on the Drawings.
b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with
restraint vendor and sized to provide a minimum
edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters all around
the outermost anchor bolt to allow development of
full drill-in wedge anchor ratings. If cast-in anchors
are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be sized
to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt
coverage and embedment.
2. Supplementary Support Steel:
a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel
for all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. including
roof mounted equipment, as required or specified.
3. Attachments:
a. Contractor shall supply restraint attachment plates
cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts,
double-sided beam clamps, etc. in accordance with
the requirements of the vibration vendor's **
calculations.
H. Seismic Force Levels ,
1 . The following force levels will be used on this project.
Minimum "G" Forces Equal to or Exceeding Building Code Listed in
E.
Building "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force For
Code for all pipes, Duct for Rigidity for Flexibility Life Safety
& Conduit Mounted Mounted Equipment Either
Equipment Equipment Rigidity or
Flexibility
Mounted
Zon Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Vert.
e
UBC
HVAC 235500 - 52
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
support seismic restraint designs must be
stamped by a registered professional engineer
with at least five years of seismic design
experience and licensed in the state of the job
location. Testing and calculations must
include both shear and tensile loads as well as
one test or analysis at 458 to the weakest
mode.
(3) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads,
static seismic loads, and capacity of materials
utilized for connections to equipment and
structure. Analysis must detail anchoring
methods, bolt diameter, embedment, and/or
welded length. All seismic restraint devices
shall be designed to accept, without failure,
the forces detailed in Section H acting through
the equipment center of gravity. Overturning
moments may exceed forces at ground level.
E. Code and Standards Requirements:
1 . Typical Applicable Codes and Standards - most recent or
enforced code:
a. Massachusetts State Building Code.
b. BOCA National Mechanical Code.
C. NFPA 90A.
F. Manufacturer's Responsibility:
1 . Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control
equipment shall have the following responsibilities:
a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint
sizes and locations.
b. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as
scheduled or specified.
C. Provide calculations and materials if required for
restraint of un-isolated equipment.
± " d. Provide installation instructions, drawings, and
trained field supervision to insure proper installation
and performance.
G. Related Work:
1 . Housekeeping Pads:
HVAC 235500 - 51
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
(1) Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration
isolators and specific restraints detailing
compliance with the Specification.
(2) Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly
mounted equipment, showing vibration
isolators and seismic restraints by referencing
numbered descriptive Drawings.
b. Shop Drawings:
(1) Submit fabrication details for equipment bases OR
including dimensions, structural member sizes
and support point locations.
(2) Provide all details of suspension and support
for ceiling hung equipment.
(3) Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary
steel work are used for seismic restraint
locations, details of acceptable attachment
methods for ducts, conduit and pipe must be
included and approved before the condition is
accepted for installation. Restraint
manufacturer's submittals must include
spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all
attachment and support points.
(4) Provide specific details of seismic restraints
and anchors; include number, size, and
locations for each piece of equipment.
C. Seismic Certification and Analysis:
(1) Seismic restraint calculations must be
provided for all connections of equipment to
the structure. Calculations must be stamped
by a registered professional engineer with at
least five years of seismic design experience,
licensed in the state of the job location.
(2) All restraining devices shall have a pre-
approval number from California OSHPD or
some other recognized government agency
showing maximum restraint ratings. Pre-
approvals based on independent testing are
preferred to approvals based on calculations.
Where pre-approved devices are not available,
submittals based on independent testing are
preferred. Calculations (including the
combining of tensile and shear loadings) to
HVAC 235500 - 50
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Condensers
C. Definitions:
1. Life Safety Systems
a. All systems involved with fire protection including
sprinkler piping, fire pumps, jockey pumps, fire
pump control panels, service water supply piping,
water tanks, fire dampers and smoke systems.
b. All systems involved with and/or connected to
emergency power supply including all generators,
transfer switches, transformers, and all flowpaths to
fire protection and/or emergency lighting systems.
C. All medical and life support systems.
d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control
sequence including air handlers, conduit, duct,
dampers, etc.
e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the
equipment schedule.
2. Positive Attachment:
a. A positive attachment is defined as a cast-in anchor,
a drill-in wedge anchor, a double-sided beam clamp
loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a welded or
bolted connection to structure. Single sided "C" type
beam clamps for support rods of overhead piping,
ductwork, or any other equipment are not acceptable
on this project as seismic anchor points.
3. Transverse Bracing:
a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to
the centerline of the pipe, duct, or conduit.
4. Longitudinal Bracing:
a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the
centerline of the pipe, duct, or conduit.
D. Manufacturer's Data:
1 . The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic
restraints shall provide submittals for products as follows:
a. Descriptive Data:
, , HVAC 235500 - 49
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce
reasonably uniform deflections.
2. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same
manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer.
3. It is the intent of the seismic portion of Specification to keep all
mechanical building system components in place during a seismic
event.
4. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with
seismic codes, component manufacturer's, and building
construction standards. Whenever a conflict occurs between the
manufacturers or construction standards, the most stringent shall
apply.
5. This Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for
seismic consideration and is not intended as a substitute for
legislated, more stringent, national, state or local construction
requirements (i.e. California Title 24, California OSHPD, Canadian
Building Codes, or other requirements).
6. The Contractor shall correct any variance or non-compliance with
these Specification requirements in an approved manner. "
7. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic
force levels as detailed in Section H.
B. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, the *R
following:
1 . Vibration isolation for piping, ductwork and
equipment.
2. Equipment isolation bases.
3. Flexible piping connections. .
4. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment.
5. Seismic restraints for non-isolated
equipment. ,
6. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation
supervision.
7. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads.
8. All mechanical systems: Equipment buried underground is
excluded but entry of services through the foundation wall
is included. Equipment referred to below is typical.
(Equipment not listed is still included in this Specification).
AC Units Condensing Units
Air Distrib. Boxes Ductwork
Air Handling Units Unit Heaters
Air Separators Fans (all types)
Boilers Heat Exchangers
Cabinet Heaters Piping
Chillers Pumps (all types)
Compressors Rooftop Units
Comp. Room Units Tanks (all types)
HVAC 235500 - 48
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
2.20 STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
A. Configuration: Duplex floor-mounting pumps with receiver and float
switches; rated to pump minimum 210 deg F steam condensate.
1 . Manufacturers:
a. Domestic Pump; Div. of ITT Industries.
b. Skidmore Div.; Vent-Rite Valve Corp.
C. Federal Pump Corp.
2. Receiver: Floor-mounting, close-grained cast iron; externally adjustable
float switches; with water-level gage, steam condensate thermometer,
discharge-pressure gage for each pump, bronze gate valves between
;. receiver and pumps, flanges for pump mounting, and lifting eyebolts.
3. Inlet Strainer: Cast iron with self-cleaning bronze screen, dirt pocket,
and cleanout plug on receiver inlet.
4. Pumps: Centrifugal, close coupled, vertical design, permanently aligned,
and bronze fitted; with replaceable bronze case rings, stainless-steel
shafts, and mechanical seals; mounted on receiver flanges; rated to
operate with a minimum of 2 feet of NPSH.
5. Control Panel: NEMA 250, Type 2 enclosure with hinged door and
grounding lug, mounted on pump; factory wired for single external
electrical connection; and with the following components within cabinet:
a. Motor controller for each pump.
b. Electrical pump alternator to operate pumps in lead-lag sequence
and allow both pumps to operate on receiver high level.
C. Manual lead-lag control to override electrical pump alternator to
manually select the lead pump.
d. Momentary contact "TEST" push button on cover for each pump.
e. Numbered terminal strip.
f. Disconnect switch.
!*! g. Fused transformer for control circuit.
h. Auxiliary contacts and float switches for high condensate level
alarm.
2.21 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Intent:
1 . All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as noted on the
equipment schedule or in the Specification shall be mounted on
vibration isolators and with flexible connections to prevent the
transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to
the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in
,�, HVAC 235500 - 47
�e
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
spaces. Access panels in plastered ceilings shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL
(12" x 12"); access panels in walls shall be Karp type DSC-21 1 "Universal"
0 2" x 12").
2.19 SHELL-AND-TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Manufacturers:
1 . API Heat Transfer Inc.
2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
3. ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett.
4. Taco, Inc.
B. Configuration: U-tube with removable bundle.
C. Shell Materials: Steel. •�
D. Head:
1 . Materials: Cast iron.
2. Flanged and bolted to shell.
E. Tube:
1 . Seamless copper tubes.
2. Tube diameter is determined by manufacturer based on service.
F. Tubesheet Materials: Steel tubesheets.
G. Baffles: Steel
H. Piping Connections: „
1 . Shell: Flanged (larger sizes)/threaded (smaller sizes) inlet and outlet
fluid connections, threaded drain, and vent connections.
2. Head: Flanged inlet and outlet fluid connections for larger sizes,
threaded for smaller.
I. Support Saddles:
1 . Fabricated of material similar to shell.
2. Foot mount with provision for anchoring to support.
3. Fabricate attachment of saddle supports to pressure vessel with
reinforcement strong enough to resist heat-exchanger movement during
a seismic event when heat-exchanger saddles are anchored to building
structure.
HVAC 235500 - 46
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
* Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
requirements, Bonney "Weldolets" or 'Threadolets", or equal.
8. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected
pipe; except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length
remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1 /2" and where pipe size is
less than 1-1 /2", and do not thread nipples full length (no close-
nipples).
9. Copper Tube: ASTM B88; Type as indicated for each service; hard-
drawn temper for water piping; soft temper for oil piping.
10. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306.
11 . ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B280.
12. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22.
13. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI 1316.23.
14. Wrought-Copper Solder joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI 1316.29.
15. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B43.
*! 16. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI 1316.15.
17. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding
materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation
requirements. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials.
18. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide
soldering materials as determined by Installer to comply with instal-
lation requirements.
19. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing
materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation
requirements. Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials.
20. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21 ; full-faced for cast-iron
flanges; raised-face for steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated.
21 . Note: Grooved piping will NOT be allowed.
2.17 STRAINERS
A. Pipeline strainers shall be full size, iron body, "Y" pattern and shall be
installed on the inlet side of each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated
on the Drawings. Strainers 2" and smaller shall have screwed ends; 2-1 /2"
and larger shall have flanged ends.
B. Strainers for steam and condensate systems over 50 psig. shall be 250 lb.
class. Strainers for other systems shall be 125 lb. class. Strainers shall be
Illinois, Barnes and hones, Armstrong, or equal, and shall be so installed as
to permit ready removal of basket. Each strainer 2-1 /2" and larger shall
be provided with hose end globe valve on blow-off.
2.18 ACCESS PANELS
A. Furnish and install access panels at all valves, volume dampers, tec.
installed above plastered ceilings, in walls, and all other non-accessible
,� HVAC 235500 - 45
■
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA '"
b. Mains 1 %z" or less : 1 Y2 in.
C. Mains 2 in. to 6 in.: 3 in.
2.16 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. General
1 . Reference is made to specifications of recognized authorities to
establish quality. Latest editions of their publications at time of
bidding shall be in force.
2. All piping shall have manufacturer's name or trademark rolled into
each and every length of pipe.
3. All threads for screwed joints shall be National Taper Pipe Thread
conforming to ANSI B2.1 -1968.
4. Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance
with ASME B31 .1 , or ASME B31 .9, as applicable, for shop and project
site welding of piping work.
B. Application
1 . Hot Water Supply and Return and Steam Supply and Condensate
Return: Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, size 2" and smaller threaded,
2-1 /2" and larger welded, or Type "L" copper for hot water.
C. Materials ..
1 . Black Steel Pipe : ASTM A53, Al 06 or Al 20; except comply with
ASTM A53 or Al 06 where close coiling or bending is required.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized
as indicated. Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300 for
Schedule 80.
3. Yoloy Steel Pipe: ASTM A714; Class 4; Grade IV.
4. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI 1316.5, including bolting and gasketing
of the following material group, end connection and facing except
as otherwise indicated, Class 150 for Schedule 40 piping, Class 300
for Schedule 80.
a. Material Group: Group 1 .1
b. End Connections: Buttwelding
C. Facings: Raised-face
5. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI
B16.28 for short-radius elbows and returns; rated to match
connected pipe.
6. Yoloy Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ASTM A714.
7. Forged Branch Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated,
provide type as determined by Installer to comply with installation
HVAC 235500 - 44
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
4. A vapor barrier shall be installed on all new hot water/chilled water
piping. It shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions to maintain the integrity of the vapor barrier.
5. Attention is called for to the fact that on all hot water and chilled
water, refrigerant, and condensate drain piping, oversized pipe
hangers shall be furnished and pipe insulation shall be applied
continuous along the pipe passing inside the hanger.
6. Pipe insulation shall be closed cell Armaflex insulation as
manufactured by Gustin-Bacon, Manville, or other approved equal.
7. All heating hot water and make up water piping shall be insulated
with Armaflex, closed cell pipe insulation, or approved equal. The
insulation shall have an average thermal conductivity not to exceed
.25 BTU in. per sq. ft. per F. per hour at a mean temperature of 75
degrees F. Thickness of the insulation shall be as scheduled below.
!* The insulation shall be applied over clean dry pipe with all joints
firmly together. Longitudinal jacket laps and the butt strips shall be
smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive.
• 8. Insulation of all steam and condensate piping shall be fiberglass
with jacketed cover, thickness to be as listed below.
,. G. Insulation thickness shall be as follows:
Minimum Pipe Insulation Required:
1 . Heating Hot Water in Heated Spaces:
a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 1-1 /2 in.
b. Mains 1 in. and less: 1 -1 /2 in.
C. Mains 1 -1 /4 in. to 2 in.: 2 in.
2. Heating Hot Water in the Attic:
a. Runouts up to 2 in.: 3 in.
b. Mains 1 in. and less: 3 in.
C. Mains 1-1 /4 in. to 2 in.: 3 in.
3. Equipment:
a. Air separator: 3/4 in. armaflex.
b. Expansion tanks: 3/4 in. armaflex.
C. Steam-to-Water Heat Exchangers: 3" fiberglass with PVC
jacket.
4. Steam and Condensate Return:
a. Run outs up to 2 in. : 1 %z in.
HVAC 235500 - 43
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
F. Install Figure 167 insulation shield between hanger and insulation on all
piping; hangers to be installed outside pipe insulation.
G. Vertical risers shall be supported with Grinnell Figure CT-121C plastic
coated riser clamp; to be installed immediately below a coupling.
2.15 INSULATION
A. All new air supply and outdoor air ducts shall be insulated. Insulation for
concealed ducts shall be 1-1 /2 in. thick, 1 pound density glass fiber (flexi-
ble) duct insulation with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket
equal to Manville Type FSK. Secure to duct with Benjamin Foster No.
85-20 adhesive. Lap jacket 2 in. at all seams and secure flaps with staples '
and adhesive to provide complete vapor barrier. In addition, this concealed
duct insulation shall be tied 18 in. o.c. with 18 gauge aluminum or copper
wire where ducts exceed 24 in. in width.
B. All concealed air ducts from the outdoor air intakes to the air handling
units shall be insulated in the same manner as for the ductwork for
concealed supply ducts.
C. All exposed outdoor air and supply ducts in the attic shall be insulated
with 3 in. thick, 6 pound density, rigid glass fiberboard with Manville Type
EAF vaporseal facing. Attach board to ducts with double prong stick clips.
Seal at joints to maintain vapor barrier. All edges and angles shall be
reinforced with corner beads. Finish shall consist of tackboard of Benjamin
Foster No. 30-36 Sealfas, embedded Manville Duramesh 205, and a heavy
finish coat of Benjamin Foster No. 30-35 Sealfas, all applied according to
manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Pipe Insulation: New piping in all locations shall be insulated.
1 . All insulation including covering shall be fire resistant and fire
retardant and shall have a flame spread rating not exceeding 25,
smoke developed rating not exceeding 50, all complying with NFPA
225 and/or U.L. 723. Adhesives used for applying and sealing
jackets shall also conform to these same fire retardant and smoke
ratings.
2. On exposed insulation, all longitudinal seams shall be kept at the
top of the pipe and circumferential joints shall be kept to a
minimum. Raw ends of insulation shall be concealed by neatly
folding in the ends of the jackets. Fittings, valve bodies, and flanges
shall be furnished with the same jacket materials used on adjoining
insulation.
3. Covering shall not be applied until all parts of the work have been
tested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
HVAC 235500 - 42
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
G. Automatic Make-Up Water Valve: Provide with three valve bypass for water
system shall be Bell & Gossett, Cash, Taco, or Watts equal to Bell & Gossett
No. B-3 Reducing alve set for approximately 60 si inlet and 21
9 pp Y p 9 � psi9
outlet, field adjustable. Install backflow preventer piped to drain in inlet to
automatic valve. Bypass to be 1 in. size with globe valve and one check
valve in series. Strainers shall be as specified in other paragraphs of this
Section of the Specifications.
H. Furnish and install all temperature - pressure relief valves for all hot water
heater systems. All to be ASME rated and similar to that manufactured by
WATTS.
I. Pump Suction Diffusers
1 . Furnish and install at each pump a suction diffuser of the size and
type required. Suction diffusers shall be Bell & Gossett, Armstrong,
Taco, or approved equal.
2. Units shall consist of angle type body with inlet valves combination
diffuser-strainer-orifice cylinder with 3/16 in. diameter openings
for pump protection. A permanent magnet shall be located within
the flow stream and shall be removable for cleaning. The orifice
cylinder shall be equipped with a disposable fine mesh strainer
which shall be removed after system start-up. The orifice cylinder
shall be designed to withstand a pressure differential equal to pump
shut-off head and shall have a free area equal to five times the
cross section area of the pump suction opening. Valve length shall
be no less than 2-1 /2 times the pump connection diameter. The
units shall be provided with adjustable support foot to carry the
weight of the suction piping.
2.14 HANGERS
A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter &
Paterson, Fee & Mason, or equal.
B. For all pipe 2-1 /2" and larger - Grinnell Figure No. 20, at 10' intervals.
C. For all other suspended piping - Grinnell Figure 70 at 6' intervals for
tubing 1-1 /4" or less, 10' intervals for piping at 1-1 /2" and larger.
D. All hangers directly in contact with non-ferrous pipe or tubing shall be
copper plated or plastic coated.
E. Hangers or supports shall be placed within 1 ' of each horizontal elbow.
Vertical runs of pipe not over 5' in length shall be supported on hangers
placed not over 12" from the elbow on the connecting horizontal run.
HVAC 235500 - 41
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Flanged joints shall be packed with impregnated asbestos gaskets placed
inside the bolt circle with graphite applied to both faces.
C. Dielectric unions shall be provided between ferrous and non-ferrous
piping to prevent galvanic corrosion. The dielectric unions shall meet the
requirements for tensile strength of pipe fittings in accordance with
Federal Specification WW-U-531 and shall be suitable for temperatures
and pressures encountered. The ends shall be threaded, flanged, brazed,
or soldered to match adjacent piping. The metal parts of the union shall
be separated so that the electrical current is below I percent of the galvanic
current which would exist with metal to metal contact.
2.12 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Standard IPS steel or wrought iron sleeves shall be provided wherever
exposed pipes pass through masonry walls or partitions. Pipe sleeves are
to be two pipe sizes larger than line size. Insulated piping sleeves shall be
sized to allow insulation to pass through the sleeve without gouging.
2.13 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
A. Expansion tank fitting shall be Taco 'Taco-Trot" No.438.
B. Tank drainer shall have drain body with air vent tube, Taco No. 440, with
hose end drain valve. Pipe with auxiliary drain to within 6 ft. 0 in. of finish
floor.
C. Air removal fitting shall be in-line type, welded steel, with internal ,
circuiting causing entrained air to be separated from the water. To be
Spiro Vent "Air Separator", line size, with drain valve and strainer. No
substitutions will be allowed. ,
D. Expansion tank shall be size as noted on Drawings, all steel, A.S.M.E.
construction
E. Equivalent products for items A through C as manufactured by Bell &
Gossett, Amtrol, or equal will be approved.
F. Air Vents: Air vents shall be provided where shown and at all other high
points, where shown or not. Vents shall be of the manual type and shall
be full line size, but in no case shall they be less than 2 in, steel pipe. '
Chambers shall be a minimum of 12 in. high. Drain tubing shall be
extended in such a manner that the globe valve and end of drain line are
readily accessible. Air vents for radiation shall be installed in the return
side of each loop of radiation before piping drops down to return main.
These vents to be key or screw type equal to Dole or Taco.
HVAC 235500 - 40
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
• Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
STAD or STA-D, semi-steel body, bronze plug with neoprene or Teflon
resilient face, bronze top and bottom bushings, complete with lever.
Provide open position stop and plastic cap on all valves which are labeled
"Balance Valves" on the Drawings. All valves at fan coil unit shall be
furnished with drain kit.
Pump discharge check valves shall be Muessco, Williams & Hager, or
Smolensky equal to Muessco 105-DT silent type, steel body, stainless steel
trim and spring, renewable seat, 150 psig ASME rated.
2.09 THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers shall be Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice or Weiss, equal to
Taylor 30EJ31009 with aluminum case, industrial glass, red reading
mercury, 9" scale length, 2oF subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient
to assure accurate and fast response but in no case less than 3-1 /2" nor
less than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer
shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket
of matching length, and with lagging extension when installed in insulated
pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned as required
to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position.
B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following:
1 . Hot water heating system: 25-240oF
2.10 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Gauges shall be Ashcroft, Marsh, U.S. Gauge Company or Trerice equal to
Ashcroft "Quality" line gauges, Grade A, 1% accuracy. Each gauge shall be
installed with a pulsation damper (Ashcroft #1106B) and a brass lever
handle gauge cock (Ashcroft #1095).
B. Model number, size and range to be as follows:
1 . Ashcroft - #1018, 3-1 /2" dial, red tipped pointer with scale range
*" such that normal operating pressure is approximately at mid-scale.
2.11 UNIONS
A. Unions shall be of the same class and material as the pipe and fittings of
the system in which they are installed. In black steel piping systems, they
shall be 200 lb. black malleable iron with brass ground joint equal to Dart
Figures 0832, 0834, 0835, 0836 or 0838. In copper and brass piping,
they shall be 125 lb. bronze or brass with ground joint.
B. Flanged unions for welded pipe shall be weld neck, 150 lb. raised face.
HVAC 235500 - 39
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
substitutions will be allowed.
B. All water valves installed in copper tube piping shall be, in general, solder ,
end pattern, all bronze with iron hand wheel, rated for not less than 200
pounds non-shock water pressure. In general, all line service valves are to
be gate valves, manual vents are to be globe type.
C. Solder end valves are as follows:
1 . Gate Valves - Stockham Figure B-109.
2. Globe Valves - Stockham B-14T.
3. Check Valves - Stockham B-309.
4. Drain Valves - Watts No. B-6000 ball valve with hose adapter, cap
and chain.
5. Ball Valves - Watts Series B-6001-SS-XH.
D. Screw end and flanged valves shall be as follows:
1 . Gate: 2-1 /2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120; 3 in. and
larger - Stockham Figure G-620 or G-623.
2. Globe: 2-1 /2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-120 or 752; 3 in.
and larger - Stockham Figure G-609 or G-613.
3. Check: 2-1 /2 in. and smaller - Stockham Figure B-319; 3 in. and
larger - Stockham Figure G-931 .
4. Ball Valves: Watts Series 600-SS-SH. •�•
E. All shut-off valves 2-1 /2 in. and larger shall be Watts Series G-4000, cast
iron body, 316, steel disc and shaft, Nordel EPT seat, designed for
bubbletight shutoff. Valves to be fitted with lever operator for two
position operation.
F. Gate and/or globe valves shall not be used as substitutes for the following
valves when used as balance valves.
G. Balance and/or shut-off valves 4 in. and larger - Tour & Anderson Series
STAF, neoprene seat, semi-steel body, with stainless steel or bronze top
and bottom bushings, 150 psig working pressure, 125 pound ANSI wo
flanges, Figure 101 F or 1 18F, G6-H12. Provide open position stop on all
valves. Provide hand operators for all valves which are 6 ft. or more above
the floor.
H. Balance and/or shut-off valves 2-1 /2 in. and 3 in. sizes - Tour & Anderson
Series STAF, lever operated, faced plug, neoprene seat, semi-steel body
with stainless steel or bronze top and bottom bushings, 150 prig working
pressure, Figure 118. Provide open position stops for all valves.
I. For 2 in. and smaller - Balancing valves shall be Tour & Anderson Figure
HVAC 235500 - 38
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
W Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
PSI maximum
2. MEDIUM: Working pressure-85 PSI maximum, Test Pressure-1 10
PSI maximum
3. HIGH: Working pressure-128 PSI maximum, Test Pressure 184
PSI maximum
4 E. Panel radiation expansion shall not exceed 1 /64" per foot of radiation at 215°F. Tr
installer shall provide adequate expansion compensation for each radiator.
F. The panel radiation shall be cleaned and phosphatized in preparation for the
powder coat finish. The radiation is then finish painted with a gloss powder coat
finish, for a total paint thickness of 2-3 mils (0.002" - 0.003"). The color shall be
selected from Runtal's standard color table.
*+ G. The radiator manufacturer shall provide a sample of the radiator with grille for
evaluation by the Architect/Engineer.
H. Ribbed pipe cover trims, finished to match the radiators shall be
provided with the radiation as required to suit construction.
I. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flat tube panel
radiation as manufactured by Runtal North America, Inc. Radson shall be considere,
an approved equal.
2.7 CIRCULATING PUMPS (in Line Type)
A. The pumps shall be of the centrifugal in-line coupled type, especially
designed and constructed for quiet operation. Capacity shall be as shown
on the Drawings. Pumps shall be cast iron, bronze fitted.
B. Pumps shall be of the vertically split case type making possible complete
servicing without breaking piping connections. The pump shall use a
mechanical rotating type carbon seal and shall face against a ceramic seat.
C. Motor shall be drip proof, 1 ,750 rpm and shall be especially selected for
quiet operation. The horsepower of the motor shall be of such a size as to
insure non-overloading of the motor throughout the pump curve without
the use of motor service factor. Pump motors shall be premium efficiency.
D. Pumps shall be Grundfos Series L. No substitutions will be allowed.
2.8 VALVES
A. All valves shall be of the same make except as noted below for special
valves and shall be Crane, Watts, Walworth, or Tour & Anderson
++ manufacture based on the following Stockham valves. All ball valves shall
be Watts, and all balancing valves shall be Tour and Anderson. No
, , HVAC 235500 - 37
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA to
to
furnish schematic systems control diagrams to be delivered to the
Owner on AutoCAD disks.
5. Control and management systems shall neither be considered go
complete nor acceptable until all conditions of the Sequence of
Operation have been attained, all temperatures are maintained
within specified limits of all operating conditions, and all systems
damper leakage of controlled within specified limits.
J. Service and Guarantee:
1 . The complete installation, including all equipment, shall be
guaranteed free from defects in workmanship and material for a
period of 12 months from date of acceptance in writing by the
Owner. Provide at no cost to the Owner, all necessary service,
adjusting, and checking during the 12 month guarantee period.
2. During warranty period, the ATC Contractor shall update and
implement all latest revisions of software offered by the Contractor
that applies to this Project.
2.6 PANEL RADIATORS
A. General: Provide steel panel radiator elements of lengths, locations, capacities and M
style as indicated in the drawings and schedules. The wall hung heating panel
radiation shall be of one-piece all-welded steel construction, consisting of
flattened water tubes welded to headers at each end. The radiator shall include an ■»
integral heavy gauge (0.09" minimum) all-welded perforated top grille (for curved
radiators the grille is omitted). RF models to have steel corrugated fins welded to
the rear side of the water tubes to increase the convective output of the unit. There
shall be no less than 32 fins per foot. Fins shall start within 1" of the headers, and
shall be spot-welded three times per tube.
B. The headers shall include all necessary inlet, outlet and vent connections
as required. Standard connection sizes are %z" NPT tapered thread for
supply and return piping, and 1 /8" for the vent connection. Internal
baffling is provided where required for proper water flow.
C. The radiant heating panels shall be available in lengths from 2'-0" to
29'-6" in two inch even increments without the need for splicing. The
panel radiation shall be capable of being mounted to typical stud wall
construction without additional blocking or strapping. Appropriate wall
mounting brackets or optional pedestals shall be provided with the
radiation as required.
D. Pressure ratings for the radiation, as indicated in the HVAC schedules,
shall be as follows:
1 . STANDARD: Working pressure-56 PSI maximum, Test Pressure-74
HVAC 235500 - 36
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
¢ d. Points list:
1 . Lead Pump Status DI
2. Lag Pump Status DI
3. High Condensate Level Alarm DI
8. PROTECTIVE COVERS:
1 . Furnish and install concealed sensors located in the
following areas:
a. Toilets, Halls, Corridors, Lobbies, Entries.
I. Adjustment and Calibration:
1 . On completion of the job, the ATC Contractor shall completely
calibrate, test, and adjust, ready for use, all electronic controls,
thermostats, valves, damper motors, and relays provided under his
contract and be present for functional tests on systems. The
Building Management System shall be completely checked, test run,
and adjusted.
2. Before the Engineer is asked to witness the functional tests, the
entire control and management system must be complete, controls
calibrated. The controlled devices will be physically inspected and
checked to assure that these terminal devices are, in fact, under
proper control and working smoothly over their entire range of
operation.
3. The adjustment procedure shall include the following steps:
a. Preliminary set up and calibration per Specifications and
Shop Drawings.
b. Physical checkout of all components for completeness and
accuracy, simultaneously with mechanical system balancing.
C. Review of system with Engineer.
-- d. Functional test for Owner's benefit, instruction, and
acceptance.
e. Not less than 30 or more than 60 days after systems have
been in full operation, review problems with Owner, recheck
all adjustments, and recalibrate as required.
4. The Control Manufacturer shall provide a complete instructional
manual covering the function and operation of all control and
management system components on the job, which shall include a
trouble-shooting and operating procedure. This manual shall be
furnished to the Owner's operating personnel and shall show the
total integrated control system. Competent technicians shall be
provided for instruction purposes. The Control Manufacturer shall
HVAC 235500 - 35
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
5. WILSON TUB/SHOWER EXHAUST FAN EF-3W CONTROL. (EXHAUST
FANS EF-5W TYPICAL)
a. Toilet exhaust fan EF-3W is a ceiling-mounted exhaust fan
controlled by a space humidistat.
b. Unit operation:
1 . As the space relative humidity rises above setpoint
(50%, adjustable) the exhaust fan shall energize.
Once the space relative humidity fats below setpoint
the exhaust fan shall be deenergized.
2. If a fan failure occurs at the supply fan, as detected
by a current switches on the exhaust fan, the failed
fan is stopped and an alarm is generated at the BAS.
C. Points List: "
1 . Space Relative Humidity Al
2. Exhaust Fan S/S DO
3. Exhaust Fan Status DI
6. TYPICAL PANEL RADIATOR CONTROL •w
a. The space DDC temperature sensor shall cycle the 2-
position hot water control valve to maintain space
temperature setpoint (70 degrees F, adjustable).
b. Space temperature shall be capable of being set-back
during the unoccupied period.
C. Typical Points List:
1 . Space Temperature Al
2. Hot Water Valve Command DO
7. STEAM CONDENSATE PUMP CP-1 G CONTROL
a. Unit pumps shall cycle via factory packaged controls (float
actuated) to return condensate from receiver back to the
building condensate return system. If the lead pump
fails, the lag pump shall immediately start, and alarm
to the FMS. The lead/lag control is by factory packaged
controls.
b. BAS shall monitor pump status via current transformers and
alarm for pump failure.
C. Sump level will be monitored by DDC system for high level
alarm.
HVAC 235500 - 34
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
shall indicate an alarm at the BAS for high or low
pressure conditions. Provide independent
transmitters for each individual filter bank.
k. Points List:
1 . Supply Fan S/S DO
2. Supply Fan Status DI
3. Supply Fan VFD Command AO
4. Supply Fan VFD Fault DI
5. Outside Air Damper Command AO
6. Outside Air Damper Position DI
7. Discharge Air Temperature Al
8. Outside Air Temperature (common) Al
9. Outdoor Air Relative Humidity (common) Al
10. Hot Water Valve Command AO
11 . Face Damper Command AO
12. By-Pass Damper Command AO
13. AHU Discharge Static Pressure Al
14. Low Temperature Thermostat Shutdown DI
15. Fire Alarm Shutdown DI
16. Filter Differential Pressure (2) DI (2)
4. WILSON SUITE TOILET EXHAUST FAN EF-2W CONTROL. (EXHAUST
FANS EF-4W TYPICAL)
a. Toilet exhaust fan EF-2W is a ceiling-mounted exhaust fan
controlled by a local on/off switch.
b. Unit operation:
1 . A local on/off switch, through the BAS, shall energize
the exhaust fan.
2. Once the fan is energized it shall run for 30 minutes
(adjustable) regardless of local switch position. Once
the 30 minutes has elapsed the exhaust fan shall de-
"! energize.
3. If a fan failure occurs at the supply fan, as detected
by a current switches on the exhaust fan, the failed
fan is stopped and an alarm is generated at the BAS.
C. Points List:
1 . Exhaust Fan Local Switch DI
2. Exhaust Fan S/S DO
3. Exhaust Fan Status DI
4. Exhaust Fan Run Time Al
HVAC 235500 - 33
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
type sensor, modulates the fail-open 2-way
modulating control valve to maintain 70 degrees F
(adjustable) discharge air temperature. The heating ..
coil and internal face and bypass dampers shall be
sequenced as follows:
a. Whenever outside air temperature, as
measured by outside air temperature sensor,
is below 40 degrees F (adjustable), hot water
control valve remains full open and face and
bypass dampers are modulated to maintain
discharge air temperature setpoint. When
outside air temperature rises above 40
degrees F (adjustable), hot water control valve
is modulated with face dampers fully open, to
maintain discharge air temperature setpoint.
2. Temperature low limit switch at entering side of
supply fan de-energizes unit supply fans, closes
outside air damper, closes the face damper, opens
the by-pass damper and opens 100% the hot water
control valve to preheat coil when air temperature *
falls below 38 degrees F (adjustable). A critical alarm
shall be indicated at the BAS.
h. Smoke control:
1 . Smoke detectors are located in the supply duct of the
air handling unit as indicated on the plans.
2. A hardwire auxilliary contact on the fire alarm control
panel, upon detection of smoke in the airstream
and/or upon a signal from fire alarm in the event of
alarm within the zone, stops air handling unit supply
fan and closes outside air intake damper. All
shutdowns shall be hardwired interlocked and shall
not rely on control system programming.
L BAS shall monitor the intake damper open and closed
positions through damper end switches. In the event the
damper closes in a non-alarm condition, stop supply fan,
close outdoor air damper and initiate an alarm at the BAS.
j. Filter bank differential pressure:
1 . The AHU is equipped with two filter banks: 30% pre-
filters and 90% bag final-filters. A pressure
differential indicating sensor across the filter banks
HVAC 235500 - 32
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
to the control point. The VFD is controlled off a
single, common control point. Unless otherwise
noted, the VFD's ramp up and down full scale over
15 seconds. VFD's do not operate at less than 6 hz
(adjustable). The VFD is not allowed to operate if its
disconnect is open. On a failure of the VFD, as
defined by an output from the VFD, an alarm is
generated at the BAS, and the fan is disabled.
d. System volume control:
1 . System volume control is accomplished by a VFD.
Rate of change of fan speed is adjustable through the
BAS.
2. Fan speed for the AHU supply fan shall track the
speed of exhaust fan EF-1 W. Minimum and
maximum VFD speed settings for the exhaust fan
• and AHU shall be determined in the field by the BAS
Contractor and balancing Contractor.
to e. High limit pressure control:
1 . The supply air discharge plenum has a static
pressure sensor/transmitter. If the static pressure
rises to 1 .00" w.c. (adjustable), a critical alarm is
indicated at the BAS, the fan speed control is
overridden, and the VFD's are modulated to maintain
an average plenum pressure of 0.50" w.c.
(adjustable).
2. Alarm indication and override control remain in force
until manually reset through the BAS.
3. The BAS continuously monitors and compares
pressure signals from each pressure
sensor/transmitter. Whenever the output from any
pressure sensor/transmitter drops below 10% or
rises above 90% of calibrated range, that pressure
sensor/transmitter signal is locked out of control
sequence and an alarm is indicated at the BAS.
f. AHU discharge air temperature is controlled through the
BAS with temperature sensors.
g. Preheat coil discharge temperature control:
1 . The air handling unit has a hot water preheat coil
with internal face & by-pass dampers. Preheat coil
discharge air temperature controller, with averaging
HVAC 235500 - 31
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
4. Exhaust Fan VFD Fault DI
5. Exhaust Air Damper Command AO
6. Exhaust Air Damper Position DI
7. Space Air Relative Humidity (3) Al (3)
8. Exhaust Suction Static Pressure Al
3. WILSON AIR-HANDLING UNIT AHU-1W CONTROL (GARDINER AHU-
1 G TYPICAL)
a. Air handling unit AHU-1W is a factory built modular air
handling unit. The system is designed as heating-only,
single duct, variable air volume system utilizing 100% outside
air. The air handling unit includes a supply fan served by a "
variable frequency drive.
b. Unit operation:
1 . AHU shall be interlocked with toilet exhaust fan EF-
1 W. When the exhaust fan is running the AHU shall
energize.
2. Fan start/stop shall also be manually selectable
through the BAS.
3. If a fan failure occurs at the supply fan, as detected
by a current switches on the supply fan, the failed
fan is stopped, outside air damper shall close, and as
alarm is generated at the BAS. This interlock is •
disabled for 30 seconds (adjustable) after the fan is
initially commanded to start. Fan is locked out until
manually reset through the BAS.
4. Air handling unit an outside air damper interlocked
with the supply fan. Before the supply fan is allowed
to start the damper shall be fully open as proven by
end switches. Whenever the fans stop all dampers
shall close.
C. Supply fan control:
1 . If the dampers open position switch has not been
energized within 20 seconds (adjustable) of the fan
start signal, the fan is stopped, outdoor air intake
damper is closed and an alarm is indicated at the
BAS.
2. Whenever the supply fan is signaled to stop, on a
failure of the fan speed control signal, on failure of
the VFD, or on a failure of a fan, the VFD's ramp
down to the minimum pre-programmed speed at the
programmed ramp rate and stops.
3. The VFD starts at minimum speed setting and ramps �*
HVAC 235500 - 30
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
± • Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
defined by an output from the VFD, an alarm is
generated at the BAS, and the fan is disabled.
d. System volume control:
1 . System volume control is accomplished by a VFD.
x Rate of change of fan speed is adjustable through the
BAS.
2. Exhaust fan shall modulate between it's minimum
and maximum speed in response to the three (3)
space humidistats, one per floor. At initial start-up
the fan shall index to the minimum speed position.
If any of the space relative humidity sensors rises
above 50% RH the exhaust fan speed shall be
increased on a time proportioned basis until the
respective space relative humidity falls below
setpoint. Once all space relative humidity settings
fall below setpoint the exhaust fan speed shall be
decreased on a time proportioned basis until it
reached its minimum speed setting.
3. Minimum and maximum VFD speed settings for the
exhaust fan shall be determined in the field by the
BAS Contractor and balancing Contractor.
4. High limit pressure control:
1 . The exhaust air suction plenum has a static
pressure sensor/transmitter. If the static
pressure falls to -1 .25" w.c. (adjustable), a
critical alarm is indicated at the BAS, the fan
speed control is overridden, and the VFD's is
modulated to maintain an average suction
pressure of 0.75" w.c. (adjustable).
2. Alarm indication and override control remain
in force until manually reset through the BAS.
3. The BAS continuously monitors and compares
pressure signals from each pressure
sensor/transmitter. Whenever the output
from any pressure sensor/transmitter drops
below 10% or rises above 90% of calibrated
range, that pressure sensor/transmitter signal
is locked out of control sequence and an
alarm is indicated at the BAS.
e. Points List:
1 . Exhaust Fan S/S DO
2. Exhaust Fan Status DI
3. Exhaust Fan VFD Command AO
HVAC 235500 - 29
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
14. Outside Air Temperature Al
15. HX-1 W 1 /3 Steam Valve AO
16. HX-1 W 2/3 Steam Valve AO ,
2. WILSON TOILET EXHAUST FAN EF-1 W CONTROL. (GARDINER .�
TOILET EXHAUST FAN EF-1 G TYPICAL)
a. Toilet exhaust fan EF-1 W is a centrifugal exhaust fan
controlled by a VFD and space humidistats.
b. Unit operation:
1 . Exhaust fan shall be indexed on by a time schedule
from the BAS.
2. Fan start/stop shall also be manually selectable
through the BAS. '
3. If a fan failure occurs at the supply fan, as detected
by a current switches on the exhaust fan, the failed
fan is stopped, exhaust air damper shall close, and
as alarm is generated at the BAS. This interlock is
disabled for 30 seconds (adjustable) after the fan is
initially commanded to start. Fan is locked out until
manually reset through the BAS.
4. Exhaust fan has an exhaust air damper interlocked
with the exhaust fan. Before the exhaust fan is
allowed to start the damper shall be fully open as
proven by end switches. Whenever the fans stop all
dampers shall close.
C. Exhaust fan control:
1 . If the dampers open position switch has not been
energized within 20 seconds (adjustable) of the fan
start signal, the fan is stopped, exhaust damper is
closed and an alarm is indicated at the BAS.
2. Whenever the exhaust fan is signaled to stop, on a
failure of the fan speed control signal, on failure of
the VFD, or on a failure of a fan, the VFD's ramp
down to the minimum pre-programmed speed at the
programmed ramp rate and stops.
3. The VFD starts at minimum speed setting and ramps
to the control point. The VFD is controlled off a
single, common control point. Unless otherwise
noted, the VFD's ramp up and down full scale over
15 seconds. VFD's do not operate at less than 6 hz
(adjustable). The VFD is not allowed to operate if its
disconnect is open. On a failure of the VFD, as
HVAC 235500 - 28
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
pressure switches on each pump) shall be monitored at the
BAS. Upon a failure of the lead pump the BAS shall start the
standby pump, stop the lead pump and alarm at the BAS.
The standby pump shall come under control of the DDC
controller differential pressure sequence. The hot water
pumps shall operate on a run/standby arrangement and
shall be duty-cycled based on equal run time.
C. The DDC controller shall reset the hot water supply
temperature inversely proportional to outside air
- temperature, as follows:
! !' 1 . Outdoor air temperature 0°F (adjustable): hot water
supply temperature: 180° F (adjustable).
2. Outdoor air temperature 60°F (adjustable): How water
+ " supply temperature 120°F (adjustable).
d. The heat exchanger has 1 /3-2/3 steam valve control. The
steam heat exchanger 1 /3 and 2/3 steam control valves
shall be modulated as follows to maintain the required
hot water supply temperature to the system:
1 . The 1 /3 control valve shall modulate open as required
to maintain hot water supply temperature. When the
1 /3 valve reaches full open position, and there is a call
for additional heating capacity, the 2/3 valve shall
modulate open and the 1 /3 valve shall close fully. The
2/3 valve shall modulate as required. If additional
heating capacity is required, the 1 /3 valve shall again
modulate open with the 2/3 valve remaining fully open.
2. As the demand for heating capacity decreases, the
valves shall modulate and be staged in reverse
- sequence.
e. Points list:
1 . Hot Water Pump HWP-1 W S/S DO
2. Hot Water Pump HWP-1 W Status DI
3. Hot Water Pump HWP-1 W VFD Command AO
4. Hot Water Pump HWP-1 W VFD Fault DI
5. Hot Water Pump HWP-2W S/S DO
6. Hot Water Pump HWP-2W Status DI
7. Hot Water Pump HWP-2W VFD Command AO
8. Hot Water Pump HWP-2W VFD Fault DI
+ � 9. System Differential Pressure Al
10. Hot Water Flow DI
11 . Hot Water Pump Selector DO
12. Hot Water Supply Temperature AI
13. Hot Water Return Temperature Al
HVAC 235500 - 27
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
representation of components. It shall also provide a current status
of all 1/0 points being controlled and applicable to each piece of
equipment including analog readouts in appropriate engineering
units at appropriate locations on the graphic representation.
2. Each category of software shall consist of interactive software
modules. Each module shall have an associated priority level and
shall execute as determined by the program controller as defined in
the real time operating system.
3. The central site shall allow receipt of alarms and messages while in
a functional mode other than energy management, i.e., incoming
alarms shall be displayed while the operator is in a word processing,
spreadsheet, or other operating mode. The system must
automatically switch from a non-energy management mode,
respond to an alarm, and return to the exact position left in the
previous functional mode.
4. The building operator shall be able to communicate and direct all
control functions through the use of a 2-button "mouse" operator
interface to monitor and control all functions and sequences within
the system.
H. Sequences of Operation:
Following are the typical sequences of operation for HVAC equipment
provided by Automated Logic's System 20/20. Within each section, each
paragraph describes a specific control sequence for a component of the
equipment; start/stop, status, etc. Each specific control sequence will
require appropriate 1/0 points, which are listed at the end of each
sequence in parenthesis.
1 . WILSON HEATING HOT WATER HEAT EXCHANGER HX-1 W AND HOT
WATER PUMPS HWP-1 W & HWP-2W CONTROL. (GARDINER
TYPICAL)
a. The heating hot water system shall be enabled whenever
the outdoor air temperature falls below 60 degrees F
(adjustable). The lead hot water pump shall energize and
come under control of its VFD.
b. The heating hot water system differential pressure shall be
monitored at the end of the longest run. The DDC controller
shall modulate the pump VFD to maintain a differential
pressure of 12 prig (adjustable) at the end of the longest
run. Differential pressure setting and sensor location shall *
be coordinated in the field with the Balancing Contractor
and BAS Contractor. Hot water supply and return water
temperature as well as pump status (via differential
HVAC 235500 - 26
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
I. All control dampers shall be opposed blade type with edge
and jam seals and internal linkage. Damper operators shall
be provided for all dampers equal to Belimo AF24-S with
AV10-18 or 2G)SA shaft extensions where required.
' 5. Local Site Communication Network
a. The modules shall communicate within their respective
network with a token passing technique. This network shall
be consistent with the IEEE RS-485 standard, including a
minimum baud rate of 9,600 BPS maintained at a minimum
of 10,000 feet. The Contractor shall provide all wiring
required for the local site network.
F. Software
1 . The Contractor shall provide all software required for efficient
operation of all the functions required by this specification.
Software shall be modular in design for flexibility in expansion or
revision of the system. The software shall, as a minimum, include:
a. Complete database entry
b. Configuration of all application programs to provide the
sequence of operation indicated
C. Graphics of each system as shown on the 1/0 Summary
Tables
d. Alarm limits and alarm messages for all critical and
non-critical alarms
e. Configuration of all reports and point summaries indicated
G. Systems Software
1 . The central site shall display graphically, in up to 256 different
colors, the following system information:
General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in
relation to local landmarks.
Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout
the buildings in a range of colors which provide a visual display of
temperature relative to their respective setpoints. The colors shall
be updated dynamically as zones' comfort condition change.
Locations of space sensors shall also be shown for each zone.
Setpoint adjustment and color band displays shall be provided.
VIP Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical
system components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial
�„ HVAC 235500 - 25
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
C.
C. Flow Switches: Flow switches shall have a repetitive accuracy
of + 1% of their operating range. Switch actuation shall be
adjustable over the operating flow range. Switches shall have
snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the specific electrical
application.
d. Watt-hour Transducers: Watt-hour transducers shall have an
accuracy of +0.25% for kW and kWh outputs from full lag to
full lead power factor. Input ranges for kW and kWh trans-
ducers shall be selectable without requiring the changing of
current or potential transformers, and shall have dry contact
pulse accumulation.
e. Voltage-to-Digital Alarm Relays: Relays shall monitor status
of boiler or chiller safeties and overloads and shall be sized
and connected so as not to impede the function of the moni-
tored contacts. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting
Form C contacts rated for the application, equal to Veris
Industries, Inc. Hawkeye 735.
f. Humidity Sensors: Sensors shall have an accuracy of +5%
over a range of 20% to 95% RH, Visala Mod. HMW-40U.
g. Current Sensing Relays: Relays shall monitor status of motor �*
loads. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C
contacts rated for the application. The setpoint of the
contact operation shall be field adjustable.
h. Control Relays: Control relay contacts shall be rated for
150% of the loading application, with self-wiping,
snap-acting Form C contacts, enclosed in dustproof
enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium contacts with a
minimum life span rating of one million operations. Relays
shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices.
i. Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be
greater than 10 billion ohms with a breakdown voltage of 15
V root mean square, or greater, at 60 Hz. The contact
operating life shall be 10 million operations or greater. The
ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be 20°F-140 0F.
Input impedance shall be greater than 500 ohms. Relays
shall be rated for the application. Operating and release time
shall be 10 milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall
be provided as an integral part of the relays.
j. Freezestat shall be capillary type equal to Johnson Control, '
Model A70HA-1 C.
k. Control valves shall be DDC modulating type. All two-way
valves shall be Spartan two position valves. All three-way
valves shall be Barber Colman with Belimo Actuators, Model
AF24-S.
HVAC 235500 - 24
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
a.
C. Enhanced Zone Sensor Input: The input shall provide one
thermistor input, one local setpoint adjustment, one timed
local override switch and an occupancy LED indicator.
' 4. Instrumentation and Control
a. Temperature Sensors: Sensors shall be of the type and have
" accuracy ratings as indicated and/or required for the
application and shall permit accuracy rating of within 1% of
the temperature range of their intended use.
1) Sensors used for mixed air application shall be the
averaging type and have an accuracy of +10F. Kele
Precon Model ST-FZ.
2) OA temperature sensors shall have a minimum range
of -52°F to 152°F and an accuracy of within +1°F in
this temperature range. Kele Precon Model ST-O.
3) Room temperature sensors shall have an accuracy, of
+ 0.25°F in the range of 45°F to 96°F, ALC Model BA-
IOK-2-RSO-RLC Type 3 with network connector,
y warm/cool adjustment, override switch and LED
Occupied/Unoccupied indicator.
4) Chilled water sensors shall have an accuracy of
+0.25°F in their range of application.
5) Hot water temperature sensors shall have an accuracy
of + 0.75°F over the range of their application.
b. Pressure Instruments
1) Differential Pressure and Pressure Sensors. Sensors
shall have a 4-20 MA output proportional signal with
provisions for field checking. Sensors shall withstand
up to 150% of rated pressure, without damaging the
device. Accuracy shall be within +2% of full scale.
Sensors shall be manufactured by MAMAC No. PR-
' ' 272-2-XX-B-1-2-2.
2) Pressure Switches. Pressure switches shall have a
repetitive accuracy of + 2% of range and withstand up
to 150% of rated pressure. Sensors shall be dia-
phragm or bourdon tube design. Switch operation
shall be adjustable over the operating pressure range.
+ ! The switch shall have an application rated Form C,
snap-acting, self-wiping contact of platinum alloy,
silver alloy, or gold plating. Switches shall be
+ + manufactured by Johnson Controls, Model P-74FA-5-
HVAC 235500 - 23
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
2. Terminal Control Modules - T-Line
a. Terminal Control Modules shall be capable of providing the
Direct Digital Control of single zone terminal HVAC units; air
handling units, fan coil units, exhaust fans, unit ventilators,
etc.
b. Each T-Line controller shall communicate with the Cmnet
through the Tnet Interface Module (TNI). The TNI shall
provide one RS485 port for a Cmnet connection and one
RS485 port for the Tnet connection. In addition, a direct
connect RS485 port shall also be provided for connection of
a laptop computer.
C. In the event of a loss of communication with the TNI, each
T-Line controller shall store a default algorithm which
maintains the space temperature until communication with
the TNI is restored.
d. Each TNI shall execute application programs, calculations,
and commands via a microcomputer resident in the TNI. The
database and all application programs for each T-Line shall
be stored in read/writable non-volatile memory within the
TNI. All non-volatile memory shall have a battery backup of
at least five years.
e. The TNI shall contain both software and hardware to perform
full DDC/PID control loops. T-Line shall be able to provide
normal binary type output.
f. Each T-Line shall be able to support various type of zone
temperature sensors, such as: temperature sensor only,
temperature sensor with built-in local override switch, with
setpoint adjustment switch.
g. Each T-Line for VAV application shall have a built-in air flow
transducer for accurate air flow measurement in order to
provide the Pressure Independent VAV operation.
h. Each T-Line and TNI shall have LED indication for visual
status of communication, power, and all outputs.
i. Each TNI shall be software programmable for communicating
at 9600 baud to 38.4 Kbps. Circuits shall be optically ,
isolated.
3. Terminal Control Devices - T-Line
a. Digital outputs: These outputs shall be 24VAC or VDC
maximum, 3 amp maximum current. Each configurable as
normally open or normally closed, and either dry contact or
bussed.
b. Universal inputs: Thermistor, dry contacts or 0-5VDC with
0-1 OOK Ohm input impedance. ""
HVAC 235500 - 22
1W
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
a. Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater
than 120 volt (except for power to the temperature control
panels).
- b. Wiring of power feeds to disconnects, starters, and electric
motors.
C. Wiring of 120V AC power feeds to all temperature control
panels where required.
d. Installation of and wiring of line power to fused disconnects
for each air compressor.
e. Power wiring to 120V single phase motors.
f. Wiring from disconnects to compressor motor starters and
from compressor motor starters to compressor motor.
E. Field Hardware: Field hardware must be of a modular design to ensure
reliability and system performance.
1 . Global Network Controller - LANgate
a. The LANgate shall be a microprocessor-based
communications device which acts as a gateway between the
System Control Module Network (CMnet) and the Global
Network (Lgnet).
b. Both the Cmnet and the Lgnet shall be "peer-to-peer"
networks which allow all control modules to communicate
with equal authority.
C. Each LANgate shall support a Cmnet on which may reside any
combination of up to 100 zone controllers, rooftop unit
controllers, and/or Control Modules.
d. The LANgate shall be responsible for routing global
information from the various Cmnets which may be installed
throughout a building.
e. The Lgnet may configure as RS485 (38.4 Kbps), ARCnet (2.5
Mbps), or Ethernet (10 Mbps), or Token Ring (16Mbps) all of
which may be implemented over fiber optic, twisted pair, or
coaxial cable.
f. Each Cmnet shall support up to 100 controllers.
g. Multiple LANgates can be added to the Lgnet if the projects
require more than 100 controllers.
h. Up to a total of 60 LANgates can be added to the Lgnet, each
supporting up to 100 controllers (total capacity exceeds
500,000 points per Lgnet).
i. The LANgate shall provide two RS232 ports which can be
connected to Central Site Workstations, portable computers,
or modems.
j. LANgate shall provide full arbitration between multiple users,
whether they are communicating through the same LANgate
or different ones.
HVAC 235500 - 21
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA on
4. Before final configuration, the Contractor shall provide 1/0 Summary
forms that include:
a. Description of all points.
b. Listing of binary and analog hardware required to interface to
the equipment for each function.
C. Listing of all application programs associated with each piece
of equipment.
d. Failure modes for control functions to be performed in case
of failure
S. Provide an accurate graphic flow diagram for each software
program proposed to be used on the project as part of the
submittal process. Revisions made as a result of the submittal
process, during the installation, start-up or acceptance portion of
the project, shall be accurately reflected in the "as-built" graphic
software flow diagrams herein required by this specification.
6. The Contractor shall be able to simulate the operation of all
software application programs to ensure they are free from design
errors and that they accurately accomplish the application sequence
of operations. The simulation must show each output value and
how it varies in relation to an artificial time clock. The time clock
may run at normal time increments, increased increments (fast
motion) or decreased increments (slow motion). �•�+
D. Wiring: All temperature control wiring will be installed and terminated by
the ATC Contractor. Control wiring shall be as follows: .,
1 . All circuits which are activated or deactivated by temperature
control system components, such as, but not limited to, PE's and
high and low limit protective devices.
2. All circuits which activate or deactivate temperature control system
components, such as solenoid air valve. «.
3. All temperature control panel wiring to terminal strips and field
wiring from terminal strips to field mounted devices.
4. All wiring to the "Auto" side of hand-off auto switches on units
being controlled by the ATC Contractor.
5. Wiring of all electro-mechanical devices required to be located on
or in temperature control panels.
6. All wiring to the temperature control panels shall be by the ATC
subcontractor from sources provided by the Electrical Contractor
specifically for that purpose.
7. All wiring shall comply with national, state, and local electrical
codes. All power wiring will be installed and terminated by the
Electrical Contractor. Power wiring shall be defined as follows:
HVAC 235500 - 20
"*
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
d. All monitoring and control wiring and air tubing.
e. All modems and accessories.
7. Provide all software identified in Part 3 of this Specification. The
database required for implementation of these specification shall be
provided by the Contractor, including: point descriptor, alarm
limits, calibration variables, graphics, reports and point summaries.
8. The system as specified shall monitor, control, and calculate all of
the points and perform all the function as listed in 1/0 Summary
Tables attached to the end of this specification.
9. Codes and Regulations. All electrical equipment and material and
its installation shall conform to the current requirements of the
following authorities:
!!�* a. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
b. National Electric Code (NEC)
C. National Fire Code
d. Uniform Building Code
e. Uniform Mechanical Code
f. Uniform Plumbing Code
g. UL916
h. Note: Where two or more codes conflict, the most restrictive
shall apply. Nothing in these plans and specifications shall
be construed to permit work not conforming to applicable
codes.
C. Submittals, Documentation and Acceptance
1 . Shop Drawings. A minimum of six (6) copies of Shop Drawings
shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment
and materials, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical
literature, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Shop Drawings
shall also contain complete wiring, routing, schematic diagrams, tag
number of devices, software descriptions, calculations, and any
other details required to demonstrate that the system will function
properly. Drawings shall show proposed layout and installation of
all equipment and the relationship to other parts of the work.
2. Shop Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer and the College
before any equipment is installed. Therefore, Shop Drawings must
be submitted in time for review so that all installations can be com-
pleted per the project's completion schedule.
3. All Drawings shall be reviewed after the final system checkout and
updated or corrected to provide "as-built" Drawings to show exact
installation. The system will not be considered complete until the
"as-built" Drawings have received their final approval. The
Contractor shall deliver three (3) sets of "as-built" Drawings, and
one (1) CADD disk of these Drawings.
HVAC 235500 - 19
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
control. Unless specified to the contrary, all equipment shall be
fully proportioning. The control system shall be complete in all
respects, including room thermostats, immersion thermostats,
switches, relays, valves, cabinets and other accessory equipment,
and a complete system of control wiring for integration into existing
remaining reused controls where specified, all connected and
properly integrated to the control system.
5. The temperature control system shall be DDC and shall utilize
electric/electronic power using Belimo Controls for the control
dampers and valves.
6. All wiring, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the
temperature control system shall be furnished and installed by the
ATC Contractor and shall conform to all standards and codes as
described under Section 16000 - Electrical Work. Wiring shall be in
metal raceways where required by prevailing codes.
7. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to
have "Lamicoid" nameplates, isolated control valves, relays, etc. to
be marked with stamped tape.
B. Scope of Work
1 . All temperature control work shall be performed by Yankee �*
Technology, Inc. of Ludlow, MA. It is the responsibility of this
Contractor to co-ordinate all HVAC work with the Temperature
Control Contractor prior to submitting a bid. ,
2. The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary hardware,
wiring, pneumatic tubing, computing equipment and software as
defined in this specification. ,
3. All material and equipment used shall be standard components,
regularly manufactured and available and not custom designed
especially for this project. All systems and components, except site
specific software, shall have previously been thoroughly tested and
proven in actual use prior to installation on this project.
4. The system architecture shall be fully modular permitting expansion
of application software, system peripherals, and field hardware.
5. The system, upon completion of the installation and prior to
acceptance of the project, shall perform all operating functions as
detailed in this Specification.
6. Provide the following system hardware:
a. Central Site(s) and Control Modules
b. All sensing devices and necessary transducers to perform the
functions listed in 1/0 Summary Tables.
C. All relays, switches, indicating devices, and transducers
required to perform the functions listed in 1/0 Summary
Tables.
HVAC 235500 - 18
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
G. Provide, where noted on schedules, internal face and bypass dampers with
full size coils.
H. High capacity mixing section shall be furnished with properly located
access doors equipped with handles. Internal slides shall be provided for
filter racks. Filters shall be removable from either end of Section.
I. Bag filter and pre-filter sections shall be provided with all units. Each unit
shall be furnished with three (3) sets of pre and final filters.
J. Airflow Measuring Outside Air Dampers: Provide factory-mounted
damper in the outdoor air opening to measure airflow. Construct with
' ' galvanized steel damper blades, housed in a galvanized steel frame and
mechanically fastened to a rotating axle rod. Leakage rate shall not
exceed 5 cfm/sq. ft. at 1 -inch wg and 9 cfm/sq. ft. at 4-inch wg. The
airflow measurement station shall measure up to 100 percent of total
outside air and/or return air. The airflow monitoring device shall adjust
for temperature variations. The airflow monitoring output shall be a
2-10 vdc signal proportional to velocity. The accuracy of the airflow
measurement station shall be +/- 5 percent.
K. All sections with access doors shall have factory wired convenience
receptacles and factory wired marine type light fixtures with guard and
switch.
2.5 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
A. General Requirements
1 . All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by
Yankee technology, Inc.
2. The controls shall be a direct expansion of the Campus' existing
Automated Logic (ALC) WebCTRL BAS operating platform. All
system points will be networked using Lan Gate Routers (LGR) tied
into the Campus Ethernet, sharing all new and existing points in
real time date. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to develop
site specific operating parameters, building name, general area
maps, floor plans, mechanical system graphics, and thermal graphs,
all to be displayed graphically at the central site (CS) via the existing
software programs.
3. All components of the direct digital controllers shall be
manufactured by Automated Logic, or equal, with peripheral
electric/electronic devices manufactured by Barber Colman.
4. All components of the system shall be furnished and installed by
Automated Logic, i.e. Yankee Technology, Inc., of Ludlow, MA. The
system shall be a properly integrated system installed by competent
mechanics regularly employed in the profession of temperature
HVAC 235500 - 17
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA *+
B. Units shall consist of modular fan and coil sections, filter section, internal
face and bypass sections where called for, adjustable motor bases for high
efficiency, totally enclosed NEMA frame motors, and OSHA approved belt
guards. Casing shall be of complete frame with removable panels,
modular, flush mounted into the unit framework with properly located
access panels. Casing shall be double wall insulated with a 1 in. minimum
thickness fiberglass insulation with a density of not less than 1-1 /2 lbs.
accordance with NFPA Bulletin No. 90A. Insulation shall be secured to
casing with waterproof adhesive and permanent fasteners. All cabinet
surfaces shall be galvanized.
C. Fans shall be centrifugal type, double inlet, double width. They shall be of
the forward curved, low speed type on all sizes. Fan housing shall be
equipped with adjustable cut-off. All fans shall be statically and
dynamically balanced and tested at rated speed after being installed in
factory assembled units. Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated
ball bearings sized to provide minimum average bearing life of 200,000
hours. Lubrication fittings shall be extended to the exterior cabinet. Fan
shafts shall be solid, cold finish steel, turned, grout ground, and polished
to insure trouble-free operation and tolerances within the recom-
mendations of bearing manufacturers. Fan motors shall be mounted to an
adjustable pivot base in optional positions external to the unit. Fan V-belt
drive shall be of the variable pitch type. Fan belt guard shall be furnished
by the unit manufacturer, easily removable, and made of solid steel with
tachometer openings. Inlet vanes shall be furnished where so called for on
the schedule.
D. Coil sections shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with removable
panels and shall be arranged for the removal of the coil from either end of
the unit. Combination hot water/chiller coils shall consist of 5/8 in. o.d.
copper tubing on 1 -1 /2 centers arranged in a staggered pattern with
respect to circulation of air flow. They shall be bonded to the tubes by
hydraulic expansion of tubes and the coils tested with 300 lbs. pneumatic
pressure under water.
E. The heating coil shall be of the continuous aluminum plate fin and copper
tubes type, assembled in a zinc coated steel frame. The coil shall be
pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage. the coil shall be tested at
250 psig air pressure underwater. Coils shall be of the steam distributing,
"non-freeze" type.
F. All units furnished with DX coils or chilled water coils shall have stainless
steel drain pans pitched for even flow of condensate with side drain
connections on both sides of unit. Provide copper tube "P" trap with
cleanout in condensate drain piping, "P" traps shall be equal to unit
pressure.
HVAC 235500 - 16
Prcj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
ings, as shall any major variations from the Drawing (minor variations are
assumed to be field conditions). Drawings for Fan Room shall be at 3/8 in.
= 1 ft. 0 in. scale.
B. The Drawings shall not be submitted to the Engineer for approval until the
ductwork has been coordinated with all other trades. The Sheet Metal
Contractor shall assume the responsibility for and bear the cost of any
alterations required after approval because of inaccurate Shop Drawings or
lack of proper coordination, and also for any changes in sheet metal
erected prior to approval of Shop Drawings.
2.3 AIR REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS
A. Registers, grilles and diffusers shall be sizes as shown on the drawings.
Wall mounted registers shall have sponge rubber gaskets at perimeter of frame. Volume dampers shall be alien key operated. All units shall be
installed with face bars parallel to floor or nearest wall.
B. Colors and finishes of registers, grilles & and diffusers shall be as selected
by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard finishes, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Diffusers schedule is based on Titus. Price, Tutle & Bailey and Nailor are
approved equals.
D. Schedule:
1. Ceiling Diffuser (CD): Titus model TDC-AA, square louver face ceiling
supply diffuser with removable core, lay-in border, flush face, aluminum
construction, 4-way throw unless otherwise noted/indicated on the
drawings. Provide with factory round damper and opposed blade
damper.
2. Return and Exhaust Registers (CRR & CER): Titus model 350FL, aluminum
louver type ceiling exhaust/return register, 35 degree louvers, N" blade
spacing, border as required.
3. Supply Registers (TSR): Titus model 272FS, aluminum wall supply
register, double deflection with adjustable vertical front blades spaced
Y4", flanged border and opposed blade damper.
2.4 AIR HANDLING UNIT (AHU)
A. Furnish and install, where shown on the Drawings, central station
draw-through units of the types, sizes, and capacities as scheduled on the
Drawings. All units shall be factory-assembled and tested and shall be as
manufactured by the Trane Company or York International. No
substitutions will be allowed.
HVAC 235500 - 1 5
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA "
O. Provide where shown or indicated on the Drawings fire and/or smoke
dampers with a UL label for not less than 1 -1 /2 hour fire protection rating
in accordance with UL-555 continuing inspection service. Blades and
frame shall be galvanized steel construction with blades of an interlocking
design, having two folded guides which serve as stops. Fusible links shall
be equal to Grinnell Fig. 1351 , 20 pounds, issue A. Dampers shall be
installed according to latest edition of NFPA-90A, mounted with 1 -1 /2" x
1-1 /2" x 1 /8" returning angles on both sides of partition, wall, or floor,
and sleeves as per the UL test under which the damper fire rating was
obtained. Angles shall completely close the wall opening and provide
anchorage to the dampers. Damper blade stack shall not reduce duct free
area.
P. Where called for on Drawings, final connections to diffusers and registers
shall be made with flexible ductwork, UL listed, Class 1. To be Thermaflex
S-LP-10 for exhaust/return, M-KA for supply, or equal. joints shall be
sealed with duct tape and Thermaflex duct straps. Connection to rigid
ductwork shall be made with spun conical taps.
Q. Install duct-type smoke detectors furnished by the Electrical Contractor.
R. Flexible Air Duct:
1 . Flexible air duct shall be Wiremold, Thermoflex, Cleveflex, or equal, +•
and shall be equal to Wiremold Type CRK Vanguard Duct.
2. Flexible duct shall be manufactured from fully annealed aluminum ,
and formed into a multiple corrugated construction, then encased
with 1 inch, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass blanket and sheathed with a
vinyl vapor barrier. The duct shall have an inside bending radius of
not more than 3/4 inch I.D. It must comply with the latest NFPA
Bulletin 90A and be listed as Class 1 air duct, UL Standard 181 .
Duct shall have published pressure ratings of not less than 10 ft.
S.A. positive pressure, .5 inch W.A. negative pressure. Duct shall
also be UL rated for velocities up to 6,500 F.P.M.E.
S. Flexible. Connections: Provide, in each duct connection to every air
handling unit and fan, 30 ounce double neoprene coated woven glass
fabric flexible connection not less than 4" long securely held to retaining
clamps.
2.2 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Layout and details shall clearly indicate compliance with the above
Specifications. Any variations in design details, fittings, or accessory items
for which approval is requested shall be specifically marked on the Draw-
HVAC 235500 - 14
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
' Smith College, Northampton, MA
Button punching shall not be used except for pre-erection attachment of
fittings.
I. Provide hinged galvanized steel access and inspection doors opposite each
manual damper, reheat coil, steam injection humidifier at each fire
damper, and at every duct mounted control device. Doors shall be equal
to Buensod-Stacey Type S-2 of rigid construction with cast type rotary
latches. Where space limitations do not allow for full swing of the access
door, two rotary type latches shall be used. Doors located in insulated
ducts shall be furnished with extended frames to serve as a stop for
insulation. Insulate doors located in insulated ductwork. All doors shall
be gasketed. Door shall be 12" by 12" minimum except where limited by
duct width and shall be larger where necessary for access to fire damper
fusible links or other devices.
�. Hangers for all rectangular ducts 4 sq. ft. in area or above shall be round
bar type fastened to 1 -1 /4" x 1 -1 /4" x 1 /8" angles under the ducts. Ducts
less than 4 sq. ft. in area shall be hung with black 1" x 1 /16" strap iron
bent 1" under bottom side of the duct and fastened to the duct with sheet
metal screws, using not less than two screws per side and as many more
so that they are not greater than 6" centers.
K. Hangers are to be placed on not greater than 8'-0" centers or closer where
required so that the ductwork can support the weight of a man at any
point.
L. Wherever sound insulation lining is called for, the sheet metal duct size
shown on the Drawings must be increased to provide the clear inside
dimensions or cross sectional area shown on the Drawings.
M. Duct joint sealing, reinforcing, flanges, etc. for rectangular sheet metal
ducts shall be based on maintaining airtight ducts at 2" WG Maximum
static pressure with maximum leakage of 5% of total fan capacity; 1 /2 of
1% for round and oval ducts. All joints in ductwork shall be sealed with
U.L. classified United Duct Sealer, or equal.
N. Duct systems shall have sufficient volume dampers, whether or not shown,
to control and adjust the total volume of each system, each zone, in each
branch and at each diffuser or grille. The HVAC Contractor shall consult
with the College's Balancing Contractor for the proper placement of
volume dampers prior to installation. Volume dampers shall be of the
butterfly type with 18 gauge galvanized iron blade. All dampers shall be
equipped with Duro-Dyne Type UNXLD locking quadrant. All dampers
shall be provided with damper bearings on each end of shaft mounted on a
2" x 3" x 1 /8" plate held to duct with sheet metal screws. Maximum width
of single blades shall be 14". Splitter dampers shall not be used.
HVAC 235500 - 13
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA an
B. All sheet metal ducts for supply air and outdoor air shall be constructed of
galvanized steel sheet of bend forming quality. All sheet metal ducts for
exhaust air shall be constructed of sheet aluminum per SMACNA
Standards.
C. Duct construction shall be in accordance with best practices and latest
ASHRAE or SMACNA requirements for metal gauges,joints, reinforcing and
supports. All exposed ductwork shall be constructed and hung to provide
a neat, smooth, finished appearance. Cadmium plated sheet metal screws
shall be used on all exposed ductwork. Ducts shall be free from thumping
or rattling when fans are turned on or off.
D. Duct sizes shall be strictly followed and no changes in shape or
dimensions shall be made by the HVAC Contractor without first obtaining
approval from the Engineer, except that duct shall be offset as required to
clear structural members and to co-ordinate with other trades and any
duct changes must meet the latest ASHRAE and SMACNA standards.
E. The center line radius of all duct elbows where shown on the Drawings
shall be at least one and one-half times the width of the duct. Where
building conditions do not allow for this radius or where square turns are
shown, manufactured double walled duct turns equal to Aero-Dyne or
Tuttle & Bailey shall be used in the supply or exhaust air ducts and
"Sonotru" acoustical attenuating turns as manufactured by South Control
Products Co. shall be used in any air ducts where acoustical insulation is
included.
F. Duct sections V-6" wide or less shall be butted together and jointed with
flat drive cleats 2-1 /8" wide. Top and bottom cleats shall be cut flush with
duct and side cleats bent over to make a tight joint. Standing bar slips as
specified for ducts over 18" may be used at the HVAC Contractor's option.
G. Ducts from 18" to 30" wide shall be jointed with 1 /2" standing bar slips
made of metal the same as or heavier than duct sheets. joints in ducts
with either dimension over 30" shall have V standing bar slips on those
sides over 30". Where sides are over 42", the standing bar slips will be
reinforced with 1 -1 /2" x 1 -1 /2" x 1 /8" angles. Additional angle stiffeners
not over 60" apart shall be provided between joints. Ducts over 60" in
width shall be jointed with 1-1 /2" x 1 /8" angle irons riveted to ductwork
on all sides with 1 /8" rivets at not more than 4-1 /2" on centers, sections
bolted with 3/16" stove bolts at not over 6" centers, sheets turned over
angles into joint at least 1 /4".
H. Sheet metal screws 3/4" #10 may be used to attach stiffener angles to
ductwork to secure seams, spaced not over 12" on centers and not less
than two per side of 12" or more, except where specified otherwise.
HVAC 235500 - 12
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
2. Structural, partition/room layout, ceiling grid, and other information
needed for co-ordination including bottom of steel elevations.
3. All fire walls and smoke partitions.
4. Equipment layouts and egress routes for equipment removal.
S. Sheet metal work layout including bottom of duct elevations.
6. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning, Plumbing, and Fire
Protection pipe routing including center line of pipe elevations.
7. Valves including valve tag numbers.
„ 8. Access panels.
9. Electrical light fixtures, cable trays, panelboards, etc.
Each trade shall show his work on the background Drawings with
appropriate elevations and grid dimensions. Drawing shall indicate
horizontal and vertical dimensions to avoid interference with structural
framing, ceilings, partitions, and other services.
D. Fabrication shall not begin until the final mylar transparencies of all co-
ordination drawings have been reviewed and approved by the Architect.
'”" Review of coordination Drawings shall not diminish the responsibility under
this Contract for final co-ordination of installation and maintenance
clearances of all systems and equipment with the architectural, structural,
mechanical, electrical, and other work.
E. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and
replacement of operating equipment devices. If equipment is disapproved,
drawings shall be revised to show acceptable equipment and be
resubmitted.
F. The approval of equipment does not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility of Shop Drawing errors in details, sizes, quantities, wiring
diagram, arrangement, and dimensions which deviate from the
Specifications, Contract Drawings, and/or job conditions as they exist.
Unless the Contractor specifically requests in writing, changes,
substitutions, or deletions of specific Contract Document requirements with
respect to any submissions, approval of the Shop Drawing by the Architect
does not constitute acceptance. Approval of shop drawings containing
errors does not relieve the Contractor from making corrections at his
expense.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 SHEET METAL WORK
A. All duct runs shall be checked for clearances before installation of any
ductwork. Above hung ceilings, duct locations and elevations must be
coordinated with work of other trades to avoid conflicts with structure,
piping, conduit and light fixtures.
HVAC 235500 - 1 1
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required
before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and
patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where
incorrectly located. The HVAC Contractor shall do all drilling required for
the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be
performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the
Owner.
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed
concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this
area be necessary, the HVAC Contractor shall cover the entire working area
with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner.
1 .19 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Division 1 .
B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings
whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions of
concealed work, fire dampers, volume dampers, control dampers and •�
control valves, and for piping installation, valve numbers shall be added to
these Drawings prior to submittal to the Engineer. In addition to the above
all revised areas shall be clearly marked with a revision bubble.
1 .20 CO-ORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. This Contractor shall prepare a complete set of mylar background Drawings
at minimum 1 /4 in. equals 1 ft. 0 in. showing architectural and structural
features and other information as needed for coordination layout. �.
Background Drawings shall be prepared under this Section.
B. Circulate mylars among trades as necessary to show all information outlined
below. Each trade shall sign and date each coordination Drawing. Co-
ordinate all conflicts between trades prior to submitting drawing to the
Architect.
C. The information to be contained on the Drawings shall include, but not be
limited to, the following:
1 . Insert and sleeve locations if required by the Architect.
HVAC 235500 - 10
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
protecting, setting in place, and connecting-up completely any equipment
supplied under each Section. Work under each Section shall also include
► exercising special care in handling and protecting equipment and fixtures,
and shall include the cost of replacing any of the equipment and fixtures
which are missing or damaged by reason of mishandling or failure to
protect on the part of the HVAC Contractor.
D. Equipment and material stored on the job site shall be protected from the
weather, vehicles, dirt, and/or damage by workmen or machinery. Insure
that all electrical or absorbent equipment or material is protected from
moisture during storage.
1 .17 CLEANING
A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and flush all piping, ducts, and
' equipment of all foreign substances inside and out before being placed in
operation. Thoroughly flush all piping of any oils, burrs, solder, and flux.
Replace strainers and filters at completion of cleaning.
B. If any part of a system should be stopped or damaged by any foreign
matter after being placed in operation, the system shall be disconnected,
cleaned, and reconnected at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. During the course of construction, all ducts and pipes shall be capped to
insure adequate protection against the entrance of foreign matter.
D. Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste material and
rubbish. Upon completion of all work under the Contract, the Contractor
shall remove from the premises all rubbish, debris, and excess materials
left over from his work. Any oil or grease stains on floor areas caused by
the Contractor shall be removed and floor areas left clean.
1 .18 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller,
required for the installation of HVAC in the building, shall be performed by
the HVAC Contractor. All work and materials shall be installed in such a
manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching to a minimum.
Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or joists) is not
allowed without written approval by the Engineer. Location for openings,
etc. shall be checked by the HVAC Contractor, and error due to failure to
co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the responsibility of the
HVAC Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall make the corrections at
his own expense.
B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General
Contractor.
HVAC 235500 - 9
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
video tape the instruction procedures and deliver three (3) copies of the
tape with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Furnish the Engineer, for approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and
Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover:
the words OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, the name and ,
location of the equipment or the building, the name of the Contractor, and
the Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab
sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and
easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be
bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The manual shall include the following information:
1 . Description of systems.
2. Description of start up, operation, and shutdown procedures for
each item of equipment.
3. Winter/summer changeover procedures.
4. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each
item of equipment.
5. Lubrication chart.
6. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation
and control of each item of equipment.
7. Valve chart.
8. List of recommended spare parts. *+
9. Copies of all service contracts.
10. Performance curves for pumps, fans, etc.
11 . List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Contractors ,
as well as the local representative for each item of equipment.
D. See the "Automatic Temperature Control" paragraphs of this Section for
additional requirements.
1 .16 PROTECTION
A. Work under each Section shall include protecting the work and material of
all other Sections from damage by work or workmen, and shall include
making good all damage thus caused.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until finally
inspected, tested, and accepted; protect work against theft, injury, or
damage; and carefully store material and equipment received on site which
is not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary
covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of obstructing or
foreign material.
C. Work under each Section includes receiving, unloading, uncrating, storing,
HVAC 235500 - 8
- Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all
his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
1 .12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for comple-
tion of his Subcontract shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor.
„ B. The HVAC Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines and
obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric power from the General
Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall provide his
own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work
shall be removed by the HVAC Contractor.
1 .13 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping and ductwork shall be installed concealed in all areas except
storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment rooms,
unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an
exterior exposure above grade.
1 .14 GUARANTEE
A. The HVAC Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his work
in all parts for a period of one (1) year after date of substantial completion,
and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his work which
are found to be defective during this period.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building caused
OR by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other materials
or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire satisfaction of
the Engineer.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive
maintenance shall be considered as being defective.
1 .15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the
proper Owner's representative in all details of operation for equipment
installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient
length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to
take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Contractor shall
HVAC 235500 - 7
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1 .9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for
the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out
apparatus as specified in Division 1 .
1 .10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall refer to all the Drawings of interior details,
plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his estimate. These
documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and Electrical Plans
and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or implied thereon is
to be considered a part of the Subcontract requirements.
B. The Plans and Specifications are complementary and anything called for, or
reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa,
shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both.
C. The HVAC Contractor shall assume all responsibility in scaling
measurements from the Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all
offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The HVAC
Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions
affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing
such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to
meet such conditions, at no additional cost.
E. The HVAC Contractor shall consult the College's Temperature Control and
Balancing Contractor to co-ordinate work of these trades and to have a full ,
comprehension of the work to be done as well as to determine the
conditions affecting the location and placement of all equipment and
materials.
1 .11 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery: The HVAC Contractor shall provide for the delivery of all his
materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry on
his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades.
Delivery and storage of materials and equipment must be co-ordinated
with the Smith College Physical Plant, and is limited to areas designated by
the College.
B. Storage and Handling: The HVAC Contractor shall, at all times, fully
protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or
loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner. *
HVAC 235500 - 6
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1 .6 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials shall
be new, full weight, and first class in every respect, without defects, and
designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they
are intended, and with the same brand of manufacturer for each class or
category of material or equipment. Electrical materials and equipment of
types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories standard
requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their requirements and be
so labeled.
1 .7 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the HVAC Contractor shall
" submit to the Engineer six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers' data
sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities, etc. of
all materials to be furnished on the project. In addition to the above, one
(1) set of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the College's HVAC
Department for review and approval.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for
compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to
the Engineer for review, making any and all changes which may be
required.
C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Engineer shall not relieve the
Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in accordance
4 with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The responsibility for
errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the HVAC Contractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for
which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which
are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Contractor will be
required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at his
own expense and as directed by the Engineer.
1 .8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required for
his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all other
fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the Contract. He
is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of the rules and
regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections of
his work.
HVAC 235500 - 5
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA '
involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated ,
on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum
requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the
actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The HVAC Contractor
shall lay out all his work at the site and be responsible for the accuracy
thereof. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all
measurements.
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of
cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of
pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Contractor
installing such items.
G. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of his
work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall
make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open
during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times.
All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable
means.
H. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and materials
installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the project by the
Owner.
I. The HVAC Contractor shall check the Plans and Specifications before
ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies •
shall be called to the attention of the Engineer before proceeding with the
work.
I Before submitting his bid, the HVAC Contractor shall visit the site with the
Drawings and Specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all
conditions affecting his work since the HVAC Contractor will be held
responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto.
1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in
this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the
General Requirements. No substitution will be allowed for the Trane air
handling unit and condensing unit, Trane or International fan coil units,
Watts ball valves, Gould pumps, Tour and Anderson balancing valves.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests
secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will
be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements.
HVAC 235500 - 4
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
the College and shall be delivered to such places designated by the
College.
1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements
of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and
Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining
thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any
codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the Contract
requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the
OP Contract provisions shall govern unless the Engineer rules otherwise.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement
Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner.
1 .4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The HVAC Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced
workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on
the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in
regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work.
B. The HVAC Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned to
the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive
instructions exactly as if the HVAC Contractor himself were present. The
Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the
express approval of the Engineer after construction work begins.
C. The HVAC Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or damage
done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other
Contractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work in
any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent or
share of responsibility incurred by the HVAC Contractor, it is agreed
between the Owner and the HVAC Contractor that such liability and extent
of damage shall be finally determined by the Engineer whose decision shall
be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the work in
question.
D. The HVAC Contractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent with all other
trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall furnish all
information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, and means of
support, to all other trades requiring such information. The HVAC
Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams, supports, inserts,
etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor may build them in
place. In case of failure on the part of the HVAC Contractor to give proper
information as above, he will be required to bear the extra expense
HVAC 235500 - 3
oft
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA "e
no
SECTION 235500 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable
parts of Division 1 , and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements which
affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically
mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the
work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady '
progress of all work under the Contract.
1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for
and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all HVAC work
specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not
limited to, the following;
1 . Panel radiators and accessories.
2. Exhaust fans.
3. Air handling units *
4. Piping systems for hot water, steam and steam condensate return
systems, including pumps, valves, and specialties.
5. Duct systems for supply, exhaust and outdoor air, including fire
dampers, balancing dampers, registers and grilles.
6. Steam-to-water heat exchangers and associated accessories.
7. Steam condensate receivers and transfer pumps.
8. Insulation for piping, ductwork and equipment.
9. Energy management (building automation) system. All temperature
control work shall be by Yankee Technology, Inc. ow
10. Installation of and connection to equipment furnished by others.
1 1 Air and water balance, tests, start-up. All water and air testing and
balancing shall be preformed by Wings Testing and Balancing, Inc
and billed directly to the College.
12. Guarantee.
13. Instructions.
14. Record Drawings.
15. Demolition, removal from site and legal disposal of all existing
heating and ventilating systems and equipment, made obsolete by
new construction. All piping and equipment shall be the property of
HVAC 235500 - 2
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
INDEX
SECT/ON 235500-HVAC
VP
PART 1 - GENERAL PART 3 - INSTALLATION
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.01 CLEANING AIR SYSTEM
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK 3.02 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DRILLING
1.03 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION
1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 3.04 PIPING SYSTEM TESTS
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.05 CLEANING AND FLUSHING
1.06 PRODUCTS 3.06 WATER AND AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TESTS
1.07 SUBMITTALS 3.07 INSULATION
1.08 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 3.08 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
1.09 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 3.09 SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEAN-UP
1.10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 3.10 IDENTIFICATION
1.11 PRODUCT HANDLING 3.11 SPARE PARTS
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 3.12 FIRE SAFING
1.13 WORK CONCEALED
1.14 GUARANTEE
1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
1.16 PROTECTION
1.17 CLEANING
1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING
1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS
1.20 CO-ORDINATION DRAWINGS
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 SHEET METAL WORK
2.02 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS
2.03 AIR DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTERS
2.04 AIR HANDLING UNIT(AHU)
2.05 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
2.06 PANEL RADIATORS
2.07 CIRCULATING PUMPS (in Line Type)
2.08 VALVES
-`' 2.09 THERMOMETERS
2.10 PRESSURE GAUGES
2.11 UNIONS
2.12 PIPE SLEEVES
2.13 HOT WATER SPECIALTIES AND VALVES
2.14 HANGERS
2.15 INSULATION
2.16 PIPE AND FITTINGS
2.17 STRAINERS
2.18 ACCESS PANELS
2.19 SHELL-AND-TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS
2.20 STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
r 2.21 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
2.22 RADIANT HEATING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
2.23 UTILITY FANS
HVAC 235500 - 1
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
minimum thickness by the required full length and width, or as
indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal
compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal,
over Thermafiber fire safing.
D. Preparation
1 . At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes.
E. Application
1 . Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no
voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment
clips where necessary.
` 2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing
insulation with sealing compound.
` END OF SECTION 225400
OR
PLUMBING 225400 - 35
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be installed in accordance
with its manufacturer's printed installation instructions, whether so shown ••
on the Drawings or not, and all labor and materials required to accomplish
this shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and be included in his
Bid. ,
3.10 DISINFECTION
A. Flush out entire system.
B. Introduce chlorine or solution of calcium hypochlorite or sodium
hypochlorite. Fill lines slowly and apply agent at rate which will produce
50 parts per million of chloride as determined by residual chlorine tests at
end of lines. Open and close valves and hydrants while system is being
chlorinated. `
C. After twenty-four (24) hours, test for residual chlorine. If more than 5
ppm are present, flush out system until all traces are removed.
D. After disinfection, flush treated water from system through its extremities.
Continue flushing until samples of water are satisfactory to local
authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat flushing if samples taken daily over
next three (3) days indicate that quality of water is not being maintained.
Do not draw samples from hydrants and undisinfected hose.
E. Submit test results to Owner.
3.11 FIRE SAFING
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to ,
complete the work including, but not limited to the following:
1 . Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers. „
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural
Drawings.
4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor
walls, stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults,
storage rooms, kitchen, machine rooms, outdoor storage rooms,
and receiving rooms.
B. Safing Insulation
1 . Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by
USG Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4"
PLUMBING 225400 - 34
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
B. Cutting of openings larger than those that can be drilled will be performed
by the General Contractor.
C. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, will be
performed by the General Contractor.
3.5 INSULATION
A. Insulation shall be applied by an independent Insulation Contractor
regularly engaged in that business.
B. Insulation shall not be omitted on piping in walls. Covering shall be
applied before masonry proceeds.
C. Insulation shall be applied over clean pipe with all joints butted firmly
together and sealed.
3.6 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. All
water piping passing through masonry walls shall be provided with
standard weight steel pipe, or Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves, inside
diameter to be slightly larger than pipe passing through same. Center
pipe in sleeve.
B. Provide chromium plated escutcheons where un-insulated pipes pass
through walls.
3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil, waste, vent and water piping shall be
tested by the Plumbing Contractor and approved before acceptance.
Underground piping shall be tested prior to backfilling. Equipment
required for tests shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner. All tests shall be witnessed and approved by
the Local Plumbing Inspector, and shall be performed as required by the
Plumbing Code.
3.8 CLEANING UP
A. After all the fixtures have been set and ready for use, and before leaving
the job, thoroughly clean all fixtures installed under this Contract,
removing all plaster, stickers, rust stains, and any foreign matter or discol-
oration of fixtures, leaving every part in perfect condition and ready for
use.
PLUMBING 225400 - 33
go
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA 40
National Bureau of Standards Handbook H28, with graphite or inert filler
and oil, with an approved graphite compound, or with polytetra-
fluorethylene tape applied to the male threads.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE
A. Bedding for the pipe shall provide full and stable support, with recesses
excavated for pipe bells. All pipe shall be laid to the specified line and
grade, with a firm bearing throughout each length and with the bell ends
uphill.
B. Pipe joints: The flexible water tight rubber gaskets shall be installed in
accordance with the directions of the manufacturer.
C. Plastic Pipe: Install plastic piping in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. At minimum, envelope all PVC pipe in 6" of screened gravel.
Clear interior of conduit of dirt and debris as work progresses. Maintain
swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. ""
D. Joint Adapters: Make joints between PVC pipe and other type of pipe with
standard manufactured PVC adapters and fittings.
E. Lay conduit beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment
indicated with unbroken continuity of invert.
3.3 WATER PIPE FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Mains, Branches and Runoffs: Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe
shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by the
Plumbing Contractor and shall be worked into place without springing or �*
forcing. Care shall be taken not to weaken structural portions of the
building. Above ground piping shall be run parallel with the lines of the
building unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may 4
be taken from top, bottom or side of main, using such crossover fittings as
may be required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes,
valves and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and 4"
other services to permit not less than 1 /2" between finished covering on
the different services.
B. Expansion and Contraction of Pipe: Allowance shall be made throughout
for expansion and contraction of pipe.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of plumbing shall be
performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be
installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching
to a minimum.
PLUMBING 225400 - 32
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
12 in. in length from the structure to the structural
connection of the clevis or trapeze.
e. All PVC and fiberglass suspended waste or vent pipe 6 in. in
diameter and smaller.
M P. Suspended Equipment:
1 . Suspended equipment weighing less than 50 lbs. And Supported
with a minimum if 4 hanger rods.
Q. Schedules:
Vibration Isolation and / or
Seismic Restraint
Equipment Schedule Specification Static
Deflection
Pumps - Base Mounted 1 , 4, 18, 23
Pumps - In-Line 23
PART 3 - EXECUTION
IP
3.1 SOIL, WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING
A. Installation:
1 . Drainage and Vent Pipes: Horizontal soil, rain leaders and waste
pipes shall have a minimum grade of 1 /4" per foot for piping 3" and
less and 1 /8" per foot for piping larger than 3". Horizontal waste
lines receiving the discharge from two or more fixtures shall be
provided with end vents unless separate venting of fixtures is
noted.
2. Fittings: Changes in pipe size on soil, waste, and drain lines shall
be made with reducing fittings. Changes in direction shall be made
by the appropriate use of 45- wyes, long or short sweep 1 /4 bends,
1 /6, 1 /8, or 1 /16 bends, or by a combination of those or equivalent
fittings. Single and double sanitary tees and 1 /4 bends may be
used in drainage lines only where the direction of flow is from
horizontal to vertical.
3. Union Connections: Slip joints will be permitted only in trap seals
or on the inlet side of the traps. Use of bushings will not be permit-
ted.
B. joints: Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and
notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Threaded
• joints shall have American National taper pipe threads conforming to
PLUMBING 225400 - 31
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
I.D. and larger.
C. All other piping 2-1 /2 in. diameter and
larger.
2. Transverse piping restraints shall be at 40' maximum spacing for
all pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit
anchorage loads.
3. Longitudinal restraints shall be at 80' maximum spacing for all ••s
pipe sizes, except where lesser spacing is required to limit
anchorage loads.
4. Where thermal expansion is a consideration, guides and anchors
may be used as transverse and longitudinal restraints provided
they have a capacity equal to or greater than the restraint loads in
addition to the loads induced by expansion or contraction. ,
5. For fuel oil and all gas piping transverse restraints must be at 20-
ft. maximum and longitudinal restraints at 40-ft. maximum
spacing.
6. Transverse restraint for one (1) pipe section may also act as a
longitudinal restraint for a pipe section of the same size
connected perpendicular to it if the restraint is installed within
allowable limits at longer distances.
7. Hold down clamps must be used to attach pipe to all trapeze
members before applying restraints in a manner similar to clevis
supports.
8. Branch lines may not be used to restrain main
lines.
9. Cast-iron pipe of all types, glass pipe and any other pipes joined
with a four band shield and clamp assembly in Zones 2B, 3 and 4
shall be braced as in sections 3.02.C.2 and 3. For Zones 0, 1 and �*
2A, 2 band clamps may be used with reduced spacing of 1 /2 of
those listed in sections 3.02.C2 and 3.
N. All mechanical equipment shall be vibration isolated and seismically
restrained as per the schedules in paragraph S of this Specification.
O. Seismic Restraint Exclusions:
1 . Piping:
a. All piping less than 2-1 /2 in. in diameter except those
listed below. •�•
b. All gas piping and medical gas piping less
than 1 in. I.D.
C. All piping in boiler and mechanical equipment rooms less
than 1 -1 /4 in. I.D.
d. All clevis or trapeze supported piping suspended from
hanger rods where the point of attachment is less than the
PLUMBING 225400 - 30
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
shall be Specification type 28 (see selection guide).
19. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure
as possible.
L. Vibration Isolation of Piping:
1 . Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three (3) pipe hangers in the
main lines near the mechanical equipment shall be as described in
} Specification 11 . Specification 11 hangers must also be used in all
transverse braced isolated locations. Brace hanger rods with SRC
clamps Specification 14. Horizontal runs in all other locations
throughout the building shall be isolated by hangers as described
in Specification 10. Floor supported piping shall rest on isolators
as described in Specification 6. Heat exchangers and expansion
tanks are considered part of the piping run. The first three- (3)
isolators from the isolated equipment will have the same static
deflection as specified for the mountings under the connected
equipment. If piping is connected to equipment located in
basements and hangs from ceilings under occupied spaces the
first three hangers shall have 0.75 in. deflection for pipe sizes up
to and including 3 in., 1 -1 /2 in. deflection for pipe sizes up to and
- including 6 in., and 2-1 /2 in. deflection thereafter. Hangers shall
be located as close to the overhead structure as practical. Where
piping connects to mechanical equipment install Specification 23
flexible piping connection or Specification 24 stainless steel hoses
is 23 is not suitable for the service.
2. Riser Isolation: Risers shall be suspended from Specification 10
hangers or supported by Specification 5 mountings, anchored with
Specification 25 anchors, and guided with Specification 26 sliding
guides. Steel springs shall be a minimum of 0.75 in. except in
those expansion locations where additional deflection is required
to limit load changes to 6 25% of the initial load. Submittals must
include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated
expansion and contraction.at each support point, initial and final
changes and seismic loads. Submittal data shall include
certification that the riser system has been examined for excessive
stresses and that none will exist in the proposed design.
M. Seismic Restraint of Piping:
1 . Seismically restrain all piping listed as a, b or c below. Use
Specification 12 cables if isolated. Specification 12 or 13 restraints
may be used on unisolated piping.
a. Fuel oil piping, gas piping, medical gas piping, and
compressed air piping that is 1 in. I.D. or larger.
b. Piping located in boiler rooms, mechanical equipment (fan)
rooms, and refrigeration equipment rooms that is 1 -1 /4 in.
PLUMBING 225400 - 29
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
unforeseen conditions should be brought to the
architects/engineers attention prior to installation. Corrective
work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the
responsible Contractor's expense.
7. Bring to the architects/engineers attention any discrepancies
between the Specifications and the field conditions or changes
required due to specific equipment selection, prior to installation.
Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation
shall be at the responsible Contractor's expense.
8. Correct, at no additional cost, all installations, which are deemed
defective in workmanship and materials at the Contractor's
expense.
9. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of
overhead support of equipment. Contractor must submit loads to
the structural engineer of record for approval. Generally bracing
may occur from:
a. Flanges of structural beams.
b. Upper truss cords in bar joist construction.
C. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill-in
concrete anchors.
10. Specification 12 cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to
avoid short circuiting the isolated suspended equipment, piping or
conduit.
11 . Specification 12 cable assemblies are installed taut on non-
isolated systems. Specification 13 seismic solid braces may be
used in place of cables on rigidly attached systems only.
12. At locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located,
the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept *�
compressive loads with Specification 14 braces.
13. At all locations where Specification 12 or 13 restraints are located,
the support rods must be braced when necessary to accept
compressive loads with Specification 14 braces.
14. Drill-in concrete anchors for ceiling and wall installation shall be
Specification type 18, and Specification type 19 female wedge type
for floor mounted equipment.
15. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural
steel bases as required. Independent steel rails are not permitted
on this project.
16. Hand built elastomeric expansion joints may be used when pipe
sizes exceed 24 in. or specified movements exceed Specification
23 capabilities.
17. Where piping passes through walls, floors or ceilings the vibration
isolation manufacturer shall provide Specification 27 wall seals.
18. Air handling equipment and centrifugal fans shall be protected
against excessive displacement, which results from high air thrust
in relation to the equipment weight. Horizontal thrust restraint
PLUMBING 225400 - 28
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion or
contraction. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow
for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of 6 1 -
5/8 in. motion, or to meet location requirements. Pipe guides shall
be Type VSG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
26. Split Wall Seals consists of two bolted pipe halves with minimum
3/4 in. thick neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal
+ ' shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between
the inner sponge face and the piping. Concrete may be packed
around the seal to make it integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if
the seal is not already in place around the pipe prior to the
construction of the building member. Seals shall project a
minimum of 1 in. past either face of the wall. Where temperatures
exceed 240 dig. F., 10 lb. density fiberglass may be used in lieu of
the sponge. Seals shall be Type SWS as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
27. The horizontal thrust restraint shall consist of a spring element in
series with a neoprene molded cup as described in Specification 5
with the same deflection as specified for the mountings or
hangers. The spring element shall be designed so it can be preset
for thrust at the factory, and adjusted in the field to allow for a
maximum of 1 /4 in. movement at start and stop. The assembly
shall be furnished with one (1) rod and angle brackets for
attachment to both the equipment and the duct work or the
- equipment and structure. Horizontal restraints shall be attached at
the centerline of thrust and symmetrical on either side of the unit.
Horizontal thrust restraints shall be Type WBI/WBD as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
OR K. Execution - General:
1 . All vibration isolators and seismic restraint systems must be
installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers written
instruction and all certified submittal data.
2. Installation of vibration isolators and seismic restraints must not
cause any change of position of equipment, piping or duct work
resulting in stresses or misalignment.
3. No rigid connections between equipment and the building
structure shall be made that degrades the noise and vibration
control system herein specified.
4. The Contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, duct or
conduit which makes rigid connections with the building unless
isolation is not specified. "Building" includes, but is not limited to,
slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls.
5. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the
building.
6. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact
with equipment or piping due to inadequate space or other
PLUMBING 225400 - 27
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA '
Pipe connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the
length of the expansion joints under pressure. Control rods need *
only be used in unanchored piping locations where the
manufacturer determines the installation exceeds the pressure
requirement without control rods, as control rods are not
desirable in seismic work. If control rods are used, they must have
1 /2 in. thick Neoprene washer bushings large enough in area to
take the thrust at 1000 psi maximum on the washer area. .�
Expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the
shut off valves.
Submittals shall include two (2) test reports by independent
consultants showing minimum reductions of 20 DB in vibration
accelerations and 10 DB in sound pressure levels at typical blade
passage frequencies on this or a similar product by the same
manufacturer. All expansion joints shall be installed on the
equipment side of the shut off valves. Expansion joints shall be
SAFEFLEX SFDE,J, SFE,J, SFDCR or SFU and Control Rods CR as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
23. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and
carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3 in. and larger shall be flanged.
Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Minimum lengths shall be as
tabulated:
Flanged Male Nipples
3x 14 10x26 1 /2x9 1 -1 /2x 13
4x 1512x28 3/4x10 2x14 �*!
5x1914x30 1 x112-1 /2x18
6x2016x32 1 /4x12
Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off
valves horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever
possible. Hoses shall be Type BSS as manufactured by Mason ..
Industries, Inc.
24. All-directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of two sizes of
steel tubing separated by a minimum 1 /2 in. thick 60 durometer *„
neoprene. Vertical restraint shall be provided by similar material
arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Allowable
loads on the isolation material should not exceed 500 psi and the
design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any direction. All-
directional anchors shall be Type ADA as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
25. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes
of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1 /2 in. thickness of 60
durometer neoprene. The height if the guides shall be preset with
PLUMBING 225400 - 26
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
minimum concrete reinforcing consisting of 1 /2 in. bars welded in
place on 6 in. centers running both ways in a layer 1 -1 /2 in. above
the bottom. Forms shall be furnished with steel templates to hold
the anchor bolt sleeves and anchors while concrete is being
poured. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting
locations to maintain a 1 in. clearance below the base. Wooden
formed bases leaving a concrete rather than a steel finish are not
!! acceptable. Base shall be Type BMK o K as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
21 . Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on spring
isolation curbs. The lower member shall consist of a sheet metal Z
section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that
support the upper floating section. The upper frame must provide
continuous support for the equipment and must be captive so as
to resiliently resist wind and seismic forces. All directional
neoprene snubber bushings shall be a minimum of 1 /4 in. thick.
Steel springs shall be laterally stable and rest on 1 /4 in. thick
neoprene acoustical pads. Hardware must be plated and the
springs provided with a rust resistant finish. The curbs
waterproofing shall consist of a continuous galvanized flexible
counter flashing nailed over the lower curbs waterproofing and
joined at the corners by EPDM bellows. All spring locations shall
have access ports with removable waterproof covers. Lower curbs
shall have provision for 2 in. of insulation. The roof curbs shall be
built to seismically contain the rooftop unit. The unit must be
solidly fastened to the top floating rail, and the lower Z section
anchored to the roof structure. Curb shall have anchorage
- preapproval "R" from OSHPD in the State of California attesting to
the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Curb
shall be Type RSC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
22. Flexible spherical piping connectors shall employ peroxide cured
EPDM in the covers, liners and Dacron tire cord frictioning. Solid
steel rings shall be used within the raised face rubber ends to
prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not acceptable. Sizes 2
in. and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with a ring
• between spheres to maintain shape and complete with split ductile
iron or steel flanges with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16 in.
to 24 in. may be single sphere. Sizes 3/4 in. to 1 -1 /2 in. may have
threaded bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and cable
retention. 14 in. and smaller connectors shall be rated at 250 psi
up to 1908 F with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 190 psi
at 2508 F. 16 in. and larger connectors are rated 180 psi at 1908 F
and 135 psi at 2508 F. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout
shall be a minimum of 3/1 . All joints must have permanent
markings verifying a 5 minute factory test at twice the rated
pressure. Concentric reducers to the above Specifications may be
substituted for equal ended expansion joints.
PLUMBING 225400 - 25
so
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
snubber design in all directions before contact is made between
the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber end caps shall be
removable t allow inspection of internal clearances. Neoprene
bushings shall be rotated to insure no short circuits exist before
systems are activated. Snubbers shall have an Anchorage
Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California
verifying the maximum certified .horizontal and vertical load
ratings. Snubber shall be Type Z-1225 as manufactured by Mason wo
Industries, Inc.
17. All directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel
members restrained by shock absorbent rubber materials in
compounded to bridge bearing Specifications. Elastomeric
materials shall be replaceable and a minimum of 3/4 in. thick.
Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 psi. Snubbers shall be
manufactured with air gap between hard and resilient material of
nor less than 1 /8 in. nor more than 1 /4 in. Snubbers shall be
installed with factory set clearances. The capacity of the seismic
snubber at 3/8 in. deflection shall be equal or greater than the
load assigned to the mounting grouping controlled by the snubber
multiplied by the applicable "G" force. Submittals shall include the
load deflection in the x, y and z planes. Snubbers shall have an
anchorage preapproval "R"Number from OSHPD in the State of
California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical
load ratings. Snubbers shall be series Z-101 1 as manufactured by
Mason Industries, Inc.
18. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter
wire, not from undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the
thread. The stud anchor shall also have a safety shoulder, which
fully supports the wedge ring under load. The stud anchors shall
have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O. Evaluation
Service, Inc. verifying its allowable loads. Drill-in stud edge
anchors shall be Type SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries,
Inc.
19. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators
or equipment can be slid into place after the anchors are installed.
Anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall u
have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load.
Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number
from I.C.B.O. Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable
loads. Drill-in female wedge anchors shall be Type SAB as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
20. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel
concrete pouring forms for floating and inertia foundations. Bases
for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide for suction
and discharge of elbows. Bases shall be a minimum of 1 /12 of the
longest dimension of the base but not less than 6 in. The base
depth need not exceed 12 in. unless specifically recommended by
the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity. Forms shall include
PLUMBING 225400 - 24
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed
elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a
release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is
complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection
shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Submittals shall
include a Drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability.
Hangers shall be Type PC30N as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
12. Seismic Cable Restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft
cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor
of two (2) and arranged to provide all-directional restraint. Cable
end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final
installation angle and utilize two (2) clamping bolts to provide
proper cable engagement. Cables must not be allowed to bend
across sharp edges. Cable assemblies shall have an Anchorage
Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California
verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Cable assemblies
shall be Type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH
between the hanger rod nut and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a
beam all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
13. Seismic solid braces shall consist of steel angles or channels to
resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of 2 and
arranged to provide all directional restraint. Seismic solid brace
end connectors shall be steel assemblies that swivel to the final
installation angle and utilize two through bolts to provide proper
attachment. Seismic solid brace assembly shall have anchorage
preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the state of California
verifying the maximum certified load ratings. Solid seismic brace
assemblies shall be Type SSB as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
14. Steel angles, sized to prevent buckling, shall be clamped to pipe
or equipment rods utilizing a minimum of three ductile iron
clamps at each restraint location when required. Welding of
support rods is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall have
an Anchorage Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of
California. Rod clamp assemblies shall be Type SRC as
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
15. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint locations.
They shall be special purpose performed channels deep enough to
be held in place by bolts passing over the cross bolt. Clevis cross
braces shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R"Number from
OSHPD in the State of California. Clevis cross brace shall be Type
CCB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
16. All-directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel
members restrained by a one-piece molded neoprene bushing of
bridge bearing neoprene. Bushing shall be replaceable and a
minimum of 1 /4 in. thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000
psi. A minimum air gap of 1 /8 in. shall be incorporated in the
PLUMBING 225400 - 23
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
shall be SLR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
7. Spring mountings as in Specification 5 built into a ductile iron or
steel housing to provide all directional seismic snubbing. The
snubber shall be adjustable vertically and allow a maximum if 1 /4
in. travel in all directions before contacting the resilient snubbing *
collars. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "R"
Number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the
maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings ..
shall be SSLFH as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
8. Air Springs shall be manufactured with upper and lower steel
sections connected by a replaceable flexible nylon reinforced ,
neoprene element. Air spring configuration shall be multiple
bellows to achieve a maximum natural frequency of 3 Hz. Air
Springs shall be designed for a burst pressure that is a minimum
of three times the published maximum operating pressure. All air
spring systems shall be connected to either the building control
air or a supplementary air supply and equipped with three (3)
leveling valves to maintain leveling within plus or minus 1 /8 in.
Submittals shall include natural frequency, load and damping tests
performed by an independent lab or acoustician. Air Springs shall
be Type MT and leveling valves Type LV as manufactured by
Mason Industries, Inc.
9. Restrained air spring mountings shall have an MT air spring as
described in Specification 8, within a rigid housing that includes
vertical limit stops to prevent air spring extension when weight is
removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A
steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and
operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1 .2 in. shall
be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing
and the air spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact
during normal operation. Housing shall be designed to resist all
seismic forces. Mountings shall be SLR-MT as manufactured by
Mason Industries, Inc.
10. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1 -
1 /4 in. thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with
general characteristics as in Specification 5 seated in a steel •
washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene
element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting
through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be
articulated as clevis hangers or the neoprene element stacked on
top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole
sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing
through a 308 arc from side to side before contacting the rod
bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a
hanger Drawing showing the 308 capability. Hangers shall be Type
30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
11 . Hangers shall be as described in 10, but they shall be
precompressed and locked at the rated deflection by means of a
PLUMBING 225400 - 22
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from
contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock
absorbing neoprene materials shall be compounded to bridge-
bearing Specifications. Mountings shall have an Anchorage
Preapproval "R" Number from OSHPD in the State of California
verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load
ratings. Mountings shall be Type BR as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
3. Sheet metal panels shall be bolted to the walls or supporting
structure by assemblies consisting of a neoprene bushing
cushioned between 2 steel sleeves. The outer sleeve prevents the
sheet metal from cutting into the neoprene. Enlarge panel holes as
required. Neoprene elements pass over the bushing to cushion the
back panel horizontally. A steel disc covers the inside neoprene
element and the inner steel sleeve is elongated to act as a stop so
tightening the anchor bolts does not interfere with panel isolation
in three (3) planes. Bushing assemblies can be applied to the ends
of steel cross members where applicable. All assemblies shall be
Type PB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
4. A one piece molded bridge bearing neoprene washer/bushing. The
bushing shall surround the anchor bolt and have a flat face to
avoid metal to metal contact. Neoprene bushings shall be Type HG
as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.
5. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without
any housing and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1 /4 in.
neoprene acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the
support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be
rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less
than 0.8 if the compressed height of the spring at rated load.
Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to
50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring
diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring
height. Mountings shall be Type SLF as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
6. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as
described in Specification 5, within a rigid housing that includes
vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is
removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A
steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and
operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1 /2 in. shall
be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing
and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit
stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Since
housings will be bolted or welded in position there must be an
internal isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all
seismic forces. Mountings shall have Anchorage Preapproval "R"
Number from OSHPD in the state of California certifying the
maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings
PLUMBING 225400 - 21
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Minimum "G" Forces Equal to or Exceeding Building Code Listed in E.
Building "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force "G" Force For
Code for all pipes, Duct for Rigidity for Life Safety
& Conduit Mounted Flexibility Equipment
Equipment Mounted Either
Equipment Rigidity or
Flexibility
Mounted
Zon Horiz. Vert. Horiz. Horiz. Horiz. Vert.
e Vert. Vert.
UBC
BOCA .25 .08 0.4 0.1 0.6 0.2
0.15 0.15
SBCCI ,
I. Product Intent: ,
1 . All vibration isolators and seismic restraints described in this
section shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Mason
Industry's products are the basis of these Specifications; products
of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems
strictly comply with the Specifications and have the approval of the
specifying engineer. Submittals and certification sheets shall be in
accordance with Section D.
2. For the purposes of this project, failure is defined as the
discontinuance of any attachment point between equipment or
structure, vertical permanent deformation greater than 1 /8 in.
and/or horizontal permanent deformation greater than 1 /4 in.
J. Product Description: Vibration Isolators and Seismic
Restraints:
1 . Two (2) layers of 3/4 in. thick neoprene pad consisting of 2 in.
square waffle modules separated horizontally by a 16 gauge
galvanized shim. Load distribution plates shall be used as
required. Pads shall be Type Super "W" as manufactured by Mason
Industries, Inc.
2. Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static
deflection of 0.2 in. and all directional seismic capability. The
mount shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two
separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements
PLUMBING 225400 - 20
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
d. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field
supervision to insure proper installation and performance.
G. Related Work:
1 . Housekeeping Pads:
a. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad
attachment to the structure details and design shall be
P prepares by the restraint vendor if not already indicated on
the Drawings.
b. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with restraint
vendor and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of
ten (10) bolt diameters all around the outermost anchor
bolt to allow development of full drill-in wedge anchor
ratings. If cast-in anchors are to be used, the housekeeping
pads shall be sized to accommodate the ACI requirements
for bolt coverage and embedment.
2. Supplementary Support Steel:
a. Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all
equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. including roof mounted
equipment, as required or specified.
3. Attachments:
a. Contractor shall supply restraint attachment plates cast into
housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam
clamps, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the
vibration vendor's calculations.
H. Seismic Force Levels
1 . The following force levels will be used on this project.
PLUMBING 225400 - 19
.M
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
seismic design experience, licensed in the state of
the job location. •*
(2) All restraining devices shall have a preapproval
number from California OSHPD or some other
recognized government agency showing maximum
restraint ratings. Preapprovals based on independent
testing are preferred to preapprovals based on
calculations. Where preapproved devices are not �.
available, submittals based on independent testing
are preferred. Calculations (including the combining
of tensile and shear loadings) to support seismic
restraint designs must be stamped by a registered
professional engineer with at least five years of
seismic design experience and licensed in the state
of the job location. Testing and calculations must
include both shear and tensile loads as well as one
test or analysis at 458 to the weakest mode.
(3) Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, static '
seismic loads and capacity of materials utilized for
connections to equipment and structure. Analysis
must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter,
embedment and/or welded length. All seismic
restraint devices shall be designed to accept, without
failure, the forces detailed in Section H acting
through the equipment center of gravity. Overturning
moments may exceed forces at ground level.
E. Code and Standards Requirements:
1 . Typical Applicable Codes and Standards - most recent or enforced
code:
a. Massachusetts State Building Code.
b. BOCA National Mechanical Code.
C. NFPA 90A.
F. Manufacturer's Responsibility:
1 . Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment
shall have the following responsibilities:
a. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes
and locations.
b. Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraints as
scheduled or specified.
C. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint
of unisolated equipment.
PLUMBING 225400 - 18
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the
centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit.
4. Longitudinal Bracing:
a. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline
of the pipe, duct or conduit.
D. Manufacturer's Data:
1. The manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic restraints
.' shall provide submittals for products as follows:
a. Descriptive Data:
(1) Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and
specific restraints detailing compliance with the
Specification.
(2) Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted
equipment, showing vibration isolators and seismic
restraints by referencing numbered descriptive
Drawings.
b. Shop Drawings:
(1) Submit fabrication details for equipment bases
including dimensions, structural member sizes and
support point locations.
(2) Provide all details of suspension and support for
ceiling hung equipment.
t. (3) Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel
work are used for seismic restraint locations, details
of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, conduit
and pipe must be included and approved before the
condition is accepted for installation. Restraint
manufacturer's submittals must include spacing,
static loads and seismic loads at all attachment and
support points.
(4) Provide specific details of seismic restraints and
anchors; include number, size and locations for each
piece of equipment.
C. Seismic Certification and Analysis:
(1) Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for
all connections of equipment to the structure.
Calculations must be stamped by a registered
professional engineer with at least five years of
PLUMBING 225400 - 17
w•
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
5. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment.
6. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation
supervision.
7. Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads.
8. All mechanical systems. Equipment buried underground is �*
excluded but entry of services through the foundation wall is
included. Equipment referred to below is typical. (Equipment not
listed is still included in this Specification).
• Air Separators
• Battery Racks
• Compressors
• Comp. Room Units
• Conduit
• Electrical Panels
• Piping
• Pumps (All types)
• Tanks (All types)
C. Definitions:
1 . Life Safety Systems
a. All systems involved with fire protection including sprinkler
piping, fire pumps, jockey pumps, fire pump control panels,
service water supply piping, water tanks, fire dampers and
smoke systems.
b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency
power supply including all generators, transfer switches,
transformers and all flowpaths to fire protection and/or
emergency lighting systems.
C. All medical and life support systems
d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequence •
including air handlers, conduit, duct, dampers, etc.
e. All life safety equipment has an asterisk on the equipment
schedule.
2. Positive Attachment:
a. A positive attachment is defined as a cast-in anchor, a drill-
in wedge anchor, a double sided beam clamp loaded
perpendicular to a beam, or a welded or bolted connection
to structure. Single sided "C" type beam clamps for support
rods of overhead piping, ductwork, or any other equipment
are not acceptable on this project as seismic anchor points.
3. Transverse Bracing:
PLUMBING 225400 - 16
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
B. Type "A" - pressure type to be Watts Model 800 QT with test cocks and ball
valves.
C. Type "B" - atmospheric type, Model 288A chrome plated, when supply is not
under constant pressure.
2.14 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Intent:
1 . All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as noted on the
equipment schedule or in the Specification shall be mounted on
vibration isolators and with flexible connections to prevent the
transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to
the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in
accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce
reasonably uniform deflections. All fire protection vibration and
seismic control shall meet NFPA requirements.
2. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same
manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer.
3. It is the intent of the seismic portion of Specification to keep all
mechanical building system components in place during a seismic
event.
4. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with
seismic codes, component manufacturer's and building
construction standards. Whenever a conflict occurs between the
manufacturers or construction standards, the most stringent shall
apply.
5. This Specification is considered to be minimum requirements for
seismic consideration and is not intended as a substitute for
legislated, more stringent, national, state or local construction
requirements (i.e. California Title 24, California OSHPD, Canadian
Building Codes, or other requirements).
6. Any variance or non-compliance with these Specification
requirements shall be corrected by the Contractor in an approved
manner.
7. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic
force levels as detailed in Section H.
B. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1 . Vibration isolation for piping, ductwork and equipment.
2. Equipment isolation bases.
3. Flexible p� 9 i in connections.
p
4. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment.
PLUMBING 225400 - 15
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA ""
G. Laundry Tub (P-4)
,o
1 . Basin- Fiat Model FL-1 single tub with base unit.
2. Faucet- Chicago Model 895-317, 8" center with E-12 aerator.
3. Trim - Fiat Model 327A strainer and tail piece.
H. Mop Receptor (P-5)
1 . Basin - Fiat No. 2424 molded stone, 24" x 24" x 10" high mop
basin.
2. Faucet - T & S Brass Model No. B-0665-BSTR, 8" centers, with
vacuum breaker spout, pail hook, rough chrome plated, built-in
stops, heavy duty assembly with bottom brace.
3. Trim - Fiat No. 87A drain, No. 889CC mop hanger, No. 832AA
hose and bracket, and No. 1453-BB strainer.
I. Floor Drain (P-6)
1 . Wade Model No. 1 100 w/ FC9 Strainer.
2. With Precision Plumbing Trap Primer.
J. Hose Bibb (P-7)
1 . Woodford Model No. 24P, with vacuum breaker and loose key.
2.11 DEMOLITION
A. Removal of all obsolete fixtures, drains, piping, etc., not to be re-used
shall be removed by this Contractor and shall become the property of the
Owner. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for delivering
and/or properly disposing of all obsolete equipment to such places as .•
designated by the Owner.
2.12 TRAP PRIMER „
A. Furnish and install all brass automatic trap primers for ALL floor drains.
Primer shall include automatic pressure activated brass valve with vacuum „
breaker, and copper duplex manifold distribution reservoir. Valve shall
conform with A.S.S.E. Standard 1018.
B. Valve shall be Precision Plumbing Products, Inc., or equal.
2.13 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Furnish and install vacuum breakers as manufactured by Watts or approved
equal.
PLUMBING 225400 - 14
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1 . Closet - American Standard "Madera" Model 2234.015, elongated
vitreous china, siphon jet action with 1 %z" top spud and 1 .6 gallon
flush.
2. Flush Valve - Toto Model No. TMT1 NNC-32, 1 .6 gpf, with vacuum
breaker and angle stop.
3. Seat - Church Model 295SSC white solid plastic, extra heavy, open
front seat, less cover, with self-sustaining hinge.
4. Mounting to be floor mounted with bee's wax seal,
D. Lavatory (P-2)
1 . Basin - laminated lavatories are to be furnished and installed by the
General Contractor. Furnish and Install the supply and waste piping
and fittings.
2. Faucet - American Standard "Monterrey" Model 5500.140, 4" centers
with lever handles.
3. Fittings - Provide grid strainer and tailpiece,
BrassCraft No. CS400A stops and risers, Sanitary Dash No. R370-17
polished chrome plated trap with cleanout plug.
E. Shower Stall & Drying Stall (P-3)
1 . Shower Stall - Provided by the owner with two (2) drains set in place
and flashed by the General Contractor. This Contractor shall be
responsible to furnish and install shower drains with perforated
strainer and perform all piping. The shower drains shall be Kohler
Model K-9132-CP. Note: This contractor shall protect shower
basins throughout the course of construction and shall be
responsible for all, or any, damage to showers.
2. Shower Valve - Symmons Safetymix Shower System Model 1 -100-X,
pressure-balancing mixing valve with lever handle and adjustable
screw stop to limit handle turn.
F. Bath Tub (P-3A)
1 . Tub basin - American Standard "Americast" Princeton Model
2392.202 or 2393.202, recessed bath , white non-slip.
2. Control Valve - Symmons Temptrol Model C-96-2-X, pressure
balancing mixing valve with lever handle, integral service stops,
built-in choke and adjustable stop screw to limit handle turn.
Diverter tub spout, cast brass adjustable spray shower head with
arm and flange.
3. Fittings - Gerber Model No. 41-812 waste and overflow.
PLUMBING 225400 - 1 3
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA ow
1 . Hot water: 30oF - 180oF. s+
2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. 4-1 /2" dial, double-spring with soft copper tubing loop and pet cock.
Operating range shall be in the center of the scale. To be U.S. Gage Co., or
approved equal. ..,
2.8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install Precision Plumbing
Products, Inc. SC-Series type shock absorbers, sizes as shown on
Drawings, or as required. No substitutions will be allowed.
2.9 ACCESS PANELS
A. Access panel doors for all concealed inaccessible valves, balancing fittings,
or cleanouts in masonry walls, plastered or gypsum wallboard walls or
ceilings, shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and installed by
tradesmen of wall or ceiling finish. Access panels in plastered ceilings
shall be Karp Type DSC-214 PL (12" x 12" min.); in walls, shall be Karp
type DSC-214M "Universal" (12" x 12"); for drywall ceilings, shall be Karp
Sesame Slim Trim Access Hatches, Type KSTDW/CAD (12" x 12" min.) with
screw driver type lock.
B. Access panels shall be Karp Associates, Inc., Inryco, Inc., Milcor Division,
Birmingham Ornamental Iron, or equal.
2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS *
A. General Requirements: Reference made herein to numbers of plumbing
fixtures to establish type and quality of materials. Angle stops, straight
stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of lock shield,
loose key pattern stops for supplies shall be furnished and installed with
fixtures. Exposed traps and supply pipes for all fixtures and equipment
shall be chrome plated and connected to the rough piping systems at the
wall. Wall escutcheons shall be chromium plated or nickel plated brass
with polished, bright surfaces.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish all supports, brackets, bolts, etc. for
proper installation of all fixtures requiring support. They shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and, if necessary,
shall be built into place as the building progresses. This Contractor shall
be held responsible for the stability and proper support of all plumbing
fixtures.
C. Water Closet (P-1)
so
PLUMBING 225400 - 1 2
.w
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
elbow. Vertical runs of pipe not over five feet (5) in length shall be
supported on hangers placed not over 1 /2" from the elbow on the
connecting horizontal run.
2.4 CLEANOUTS
A. Where cleanouts occur in finished floors throughout the building, they
shall be Zurn ZN-1405-2, nickel-bronze for concrete finish floor; Zurn
ZN-1405-7 nickel-bronze recessed for resilient floors; Zurn ZN-1405-7
for ceramic tile floors; ZN-1405-14 for carpeted floors; or equal by j. R.
Smith or Wade.
F 2.5 INSULATION
A. All water piping shall be insulated with Armaflex closed cell pipe insulation
with self-sealing lap, 1" thick for hot water, and return hot water 1 /2" thick
for cold water. Insulation shall be one piece snap-on type. All exposed
piping within 10'-0" of finished floor shall be insulated as noted above and
shall be fully jacketed with a PVC cover.
B. Fittings shall be insulated with mitered cut insulation applied over fittings
with joints taped. Cold water piping shall also have mastic applied to all
overlapping surfaces to form a vapor barrier.
C. Insulation and fitting jackets shall be installed according to the
manufacturer's recommendations. Any gaps or fishmouths shall be
remade.
{ D. Install a twelve (12") inch length of wood blocking at each hanger;
insulation shall run continuous through the hanger. jacket shall match
adjacent insulation jacket.
E. All exposed drain and water piping at handicapped lavatories shall be
insulated with Truebro "Nandi Lav-Guard", or equal, molded insulation kit.
2.6 THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers shall be jay, Moeller, Palmer, Taylor, Trerice, or Weiss,
equal to Trerice 80700 with aluminum case, industrial glass, dial type,
4-1 /2" diameter, 2oF subdivisions. Stem length shall be sufficient to
assure accurate and fast response, but in no case less than 3-1 /2" nor less
than one-third of pipe diameter in which installed. Each thermometer
shall be provided with a brass, monel, or stainless steel separable socket
of matching length, and with lagging extensions when installed in
insulated pipe. Thermometers shall be adjustable angle type, positioned
as required to be easily seen and read from normal operator's position.
B. Ranges shall be manufacturer's standard closest to the following:
PLUMBING 225400 - 1 1
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
composition, solid disc, copper silicone alloy stem, brass packing
gland, Teflon packing, and malleable handwheel, solder end, "R
Stockham Figure B-104, Hammond 1 R1 138, or equal.
3. Valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, Hammond, American
Valve, or equal.
D. Balancing Valves:
1 . Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install balance circuit
setter, with calibrated scale, with bronze body and disc and
connections for differential pressure meter. ,■,
2. Balancing valves shall be Tour & Anderson.
E. Check Valves
1 . Check valves shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the
Drawings. Checks up to 2" shall be Class 125. Solder ends, body ,
and caps shall be ASTM B62 cast bronze composition, swing type
disc, Stockham Figure B-309.
2. Check valves 2-1 /2" and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted
with body and cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class B cast iron,
flanged, swing type disc, Stockham Figure G-931 .
3. Check valves shall be as manufactured by Stockham, .Jenkins,
Lunkenheimer, or equal.
F. Vacuum relief valves shall be Watts Model 36A - 3/4".
G. Globe valves shall be as manufactured by Hammond IB-418 or I13-440.
I. Pressure Reducing Valves ^
1 . Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings, Ametek/U.S.
Gauge Co.'s Figure P500, 2" diameter, 0 lb. to 100 lbs. W
2.3 HANGERS
A. Hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell Company, Carpenter &
Paterson, Fee & Mason, or equal.
B. For cast iron pipe - Grinnell Fig. 260, one to each length of cast iron pipe;
at twelve foot 0 2') intervals for threaded piping.
C. For hot, cold, and return water piping - Grinnell Fig. 70 at six foot (6)
intervals for copper tubing 1 -1 /4" or less; ten foot (10') intervals for piping
at 1 -1 /2" and larger. Install Fig. 167 insulation shield between hanger and
insulation. Hangers to be installed outside the insulation.
D. Hangers or supports shall be placed within one foot (1) of each horizontal
PLUMBING 225400 - 1 0
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
maintenance shall be considered as being defective.
1 .18 RECORD DRAWINGS
p„ A. Submit Record Drawings as specified in Project Closeout, Section 01700.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. All soil, waste, and vent piping in accessible areas 2-1 /2" and larger, shall
be cast iron "no hub", ASA Group 022 pipe and fittings, joined with cast
iron clamps as manufactured by "Clamp-All". No substitutions will be
allowed.
B. In lieu of cast iron piping, pipe sizes 3" and smaller shall be Type "L"
copper pipe with solder fittings.
C. All waste lines 2" and smaller shall be Type "L" copper. All vent lines 2"
and smaller shall be type "M" copper.
D. All hot, cold and recirculating water piping within the building shall be
hard copper Type "L" seamless drawn tubing, assembled with sweat
fittings. All solders used shall be lead free, cadmium free, "Silberbrite-
100", or equal, complying with the latest issue of ANSI A-5.8 publications.
All exposed runs to all toilet fixtures and sinks shall be chrome plated.
2.2 BALL VALVES
A. On water lines inside the building, ball valves shall be as manufactured by
Watts Series B6001 with stainless steel balls. No substitutions will be
allowed. Valves shall be provided with stainless steel ball, reinforced
teflon seats and seals, bronze body, 400 psi wog, positive 100% shut-off.
All valves to be furnished with valve handle extension sized to match pipe
insulation thickness.
B. Drain valves at all low points shall be 1 /2" or 3/4" solder by 3/4" hose end
with attached cap and chain.
C. Gate Valves:
1 . Where indicated on the Drawings, all gate valves 4" and larger, shall
be Class 125 iron body bronze mounted with body and bonnet
conforming to 200 psi wog non-shock cast iron, flanged ends, with
Teflon packing, two-piece packing gland assembly, Hammond
Figure 1 R1138, Stockman, or equal.
2. Valves 3" and smaller where indicated on the Drawings shall be
Class 125. Body and bonnets shall be of ASTM B62 cast bronze
PLUMBING 225400 - 9
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1 .16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the
proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment
installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient
length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to
take over operation and maintenance procedures. This Subcontractor shall
video tape the instruction procedures an deliver two (2) copies of the tape
with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and
Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the
words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of the
equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the ,
Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab
sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and
easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. the manuals shall be
bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The Manual shall include the following information:
Im
1 . Description of systems.
2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown.
3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each
item of equipment.
4. Lubrication chart.
S. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation !
and control of each item of equipment.
6. Valve chart.
7. List of recommended spare parts.
8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. List of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all
Subcontractors as well as the local representative for each item of
equipment.
1 .17 GUARANTEE
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall guarantee the satisfactory operation of his
work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after the date of final
acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items of his
work which are found to be defective during this period.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay for repair of damage to the building
caused by defects in his work and for repair to plaster, wood, and other
materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the entire
satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive
PLUMBING 225400 - 8
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
1 .14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and/or drilling of all openings and holes 4" in diameter or smaller,
required for the installation of plumbing in the building, shall be
performed by the Plumbing Contractor. All work and materials shall be
installed in such a manner and at such time to keep cutting and patching
to a minimum. Cutting and/or drilling of structural supports (ie. beams or
joists) is not allowed without written approval by the Architect. Location
for openings, etc. shall be checked by the Plumbing Contractor, and error
due to failure to co-ordinate work with other divisions shall be the
responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor failing to co-ordinate, who shall
make the corrections at his own expense.
B. All holes larger than 4" in diameter shall be provided by the General
Contractor.
C. Work shall include furnishing and locating sleeves or inserts required
before the new walls are built, or be responsible for the cost of cutting and
patching required for pipes where sleeves were not installed or where
incorrectly located. The Plumbing Contractor shall do all drilling required
for the installation of hangers.
D. Patching of all holes, after installation of piping or equipment, shall be
performed by the General Contractor or appropriate tradesmen.
E. All pipe cutting or threading shall be done in a location approved by the
Owner.
F. No pipe cutting or threading shall be done in areas where completed
concrete floor slab is to remain in finishes or be painted later. Should this
area be necessary, the Plumbing Contractor shall cover the entire working
area with canvas tarpaulins in an approved manner.
1 .15 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping, hangers and supports shall be installed concealed in all areas
Vp except storage rooms, closets, and mechanical or electrical equipment
rooms.
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an
exterior exposure above grade, unless specifically so shown on the
Drawings. When pipes are indicated to be installed in exterior walls, the
Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that wall and pipe
" insulation is properly installed to protect them from freezing.
PLUMBING 225400 - 7
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
considered as called for or reasonably implied in both.
C. The Plumbing Contractor shall not scale the Drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all
offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Plumbing
Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions
affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing
such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be required to
meet such conditions, at no additional cost.
1 .11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: The Plumbing subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all
his materials and fixtures to the building site when required so as to carry
on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other
trades. All delivery and storage must be co-ordianted with the Smith
College Physical Plant Department. The Plumbing Contractor shall take '
delivery of all pre-purchased plumbing fixtures and equipment, and shall
be responsible for the proper handling, storage, and protection of these
materials from that point on. Any damage or loss of these materials after
delivery shall be the responsibility of this Contractor.
B. Storage and Handling: The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully
protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or
loss which may occur shall be made good without expense to the Owner.
The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of
all his materials until the building is accepted by the Owner.
1 .12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for
completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall provide his own portable extension lines
and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the
General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall
provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work
shall be removed by the Plumbing Contractor.
1 .13 PROTECTION
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and
materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss which may occur
shall be made good without expense to the Owner. The Plumbing
Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his
PLUMBING 225400 - 6
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
shall submit to the Architect six (6) sets of catalogue cuts, manufacturers'
data sheets, or Shop Drawings, giving all details, dimensions, capacities,
etc. of all materials to be furnished.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall check the Shop Drawings thoroughly for
compliance with the Plans and Specifications before submitting them to
the Architect for review, making any and all changes which may be
required.
x' C. The review of Shop Drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the
Plumbing Contractor from any obligation to perform the work strictly in
accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications. The respon-
sibility for errors in Shop Drawings shall remain with the Plumbing
Contractor.
D. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the job for
which Shop Drawings or samples have not been approved and/or which
are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Plumbing Contractor will
be required to remove such materials and substitute approved materials at
his own expense and as directed by the Architect.
1 .8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees required
for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and pay all
other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the
Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of
s the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required inspections
of his work.
1 .9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for
the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out
apparatus as specified in Section 01500.
1 .10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings of
interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his
estimate. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical
and Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or
implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements.
B. The Specifications complementary and anything called for, or reasonably
implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be
PLUMBING 225400 - 5
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
F. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of **
cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of
pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor
installing such items.
G. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of
his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of others and shall .■,
make good such loss or injury at his own expense. All pipes left open
during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times.
All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by suitable .,
means.
H. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for all equipment and
materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the
project by the Owner.
I. The Plumbing Contractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans and
Specifications before ordering any materials and the installation of work.
Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Architect before
proceeding with the work. go
1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
an
A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in
this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the
General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for
items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification, and
as approved by the Architect and Owner.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall agree to accept as final the results of tests
secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. Tests will
be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements.
1 .6 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used
shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect,
without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the
work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of
manufacturer for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials
and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories
standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their
requirements and be so labeled.
1 .7 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Plumbing Contractor
PLUMBING 225400 - 4
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. Where the
Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or
regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect rules
otherwise.
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall comply with the Local Code Enforcement
Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner.
1 .4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced
workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other tradesmen on
the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in
regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work.
F-
B. The Plumbing Contractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent assigned
to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and receive
instructions exactly as if the Plumbing Contractor himself were present.
R The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without
the express approval of the Architect after construction work begins.
C. The Plumbing Contractor shall be held responsible for any injuries or
damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other
Subcontractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work
in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent
or share of responsibility incurred by the Plumbing Contractor, it is agreed
between the Owner and the Plumbing Contractor that such liability and
extent of damage shall be finally determined by the Architect whose
F decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the Contract for the
work in question.
¢ D. The Plumbing Contractor shall co-ordinate to the fullest extent with all
other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He shall
furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations,
and means of support, to all other trades requiring such information. The
Plumbing Contractor shall also furnish all sleeves, frames, beams,
supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the General Contractor
may build them in place. In case of failure on the part of the Plumbing
Contractor to give proper information as above, he will be required to bear
the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, duct work, conduit, wire and cable indicated
on the Drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum
- requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the
actual arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc. The Plumbing Contractor
l ' shall lay out all his work and be responsible for the accuracy thereof.
Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measure-
ments.
PLUMBING 225400 - 3
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 225400 - PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and
applicable parts of Division 1 , as part of this Section. +
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which
affect work under this Section whether or not such work is specifically
mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the ,
work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady
progress of all work under the Contract.
1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, equipment and services necessary for
and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of all plumbing work
specified herein and/or indicated on the Drawings, including, but not
limited to, the following:
1 . Sanitary waste and venting systems inside the building, connecting
to drainage systems within the building. Furnish piping, traps,
flanges, seals, cleanouts, fixtures, drains, and supports.
2. Hot, cold and return hot water distribution systems. Furnish piping,
fittings, insulation, supports and valves.
3. Plumbing fixtures and supports. "
4. Arrange for inspections and perform cleaning and testing.
5. All final connections to all items of equipment furnished by others
requiring water, gas, drain, and waste connections.
6. The disconnecting and removal of all existing piping systems,
fixtures, and equipment interfering with, or made obsolete by, new
construction. All piping, fixtures, and equipment (i.e. copper and
brass piping, fittings and valves, flush valves, mixing valves, heat
exchangers, and controls) to be removed is the property of the
Owner and shall be delivered to such places designated by the
Owner. Removal from the site of all obsolete material after the
Owner's review shall be by this Contractor.
1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements
of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and
Plumbing Code, NFPA 54 and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes
pertaining thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict
PLUMBING 225400 - 2
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
INDEX
SECTION 225400 - PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL PART 3 - INSTALLATION
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 SOIL, WASTE, DRAIN AND VENT PIPING
1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 INSTALLATION OF SEWER PIPE
1 .3 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS 3.3 WATER PIPE, FITTINGS AND
1 .4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS CONNECTIONS
1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
1 .6 PRODUCTS 3.5 INSULATION
1 .7 SUBMITTALS 3.6 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS
1 .8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS 3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS
1 .9 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS 3.8 CLEANING UP
1 .10 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 3.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
1 .11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 3.10 DISINFECTION
1 .12 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 3.11 FIRE SAFING
1 .13 PROTECTION
1 .14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
1 .15 WORK CONCEALED
1 .16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1 .17 GUARANTEE
1 .18 RECORD DRAWINGS
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
2.2 BALL VALVES
2.3 HANGERS
2.4 CLEANOUTS
2.5 INSULATION
2.6 THERMOMETERS
2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES
2.8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
2.9 ACCESS PANELS
2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE
TRIMMINGS
2.11 DEMOLITION
2.12 TRAP PRIMER
2.13 VACUUM BREAKERS
2.14 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
PLUMBING 225400 - 1
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006 ,
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
3.5 FINAL CLOSEOUT
A. Identification: Apply signs to control, drain, test, and alarm valves
identifying there purpose and function. Provide lettering size and style
selected by Architect/Engineer from NFPA's suggested styles. +.
B. Adjustments: Place the system in operation with controls functioning.
Adjust controls and apparatus for proper operation. Test thermometers
and gauges for accuracy over the entire range. Remove and replace items
found defective.
END OF SECTION
w
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 22
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations
March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved
mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions for rigid systems.
F. Make connections between underground and above ground piping using
an approved transition piece strapped or fastened to prevent separation.
G. Install sleeve at pipe penetrations in basement and foundation walls. Refer
to Division 15 Section, "Basic Materials and Methods".
H. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13
complete with shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain
pipes.
I. Install pressure gauge on the riser or feed main at or near each test
connection. Provide gauge with a connection not less than 1 /4" and
having a soft metal seated globe valve arranged for draining pipe between
gauge and valve. Install gauges to permit removal and where they will not
be subject to freezing.
J. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI 131.20.1 , tapered pipe threads for field
cut threads. Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows.
K. Flanged Joints: Align flanged surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by
sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets
as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by
the bolt manufacturer.
PR
Mechanical Grooved joints: Cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally
compatible with the couplings.
M. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths, remove burrs and fins from pipe
ends.
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in
accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, NFPA 13 and 14,
and the authority having jurisdiction.
B. Gate Valves: install supervised open gate valves so located to control all
sources of water supply except fire department connections. Where there
is more than one control valve, provide permanently marked identification
signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve.
C. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position in proper
direction of flow including the bypass check valve and retard chamber
drain line connection.
Install valve trim in accordance with the valve manufacturer's appropriate
trim diagram. Test valve for proper operation.
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 21
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006 „
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
3. Extent of fire and smoke barriers as indicated on the Architectural
Drawings.
4. Fire safing at all penetrations through floors, shafts, corridor walls,
stairway walls, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, vaults, storage
rooms, kitchen, and machine rooms.
B. Safing Insulation
1 . Fire safing insulation shall be Thermafiber as manufactured by USG
Interiors, Inc. or Architect-Engineer approved equal, 4" minimum
thickness by the required full length and width, or as indicated on
the Drawings.
2. Provide incidental galvanized steel clip anchors.
C. Seal Compound: At "poke-through" openings, apply "Firecode" seal
compound as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or approved equal, over
Thermafiber fire safing.
D. Preparation
1 . At all fire rated assemblies, prepare all penetrations for pipes and
perimeters. •
E. Application
1 . Install approved fire safing insulation of proper size leaving no
voids. Compress and friction fit fire safing and use attachment clips
where necessary.
2. Seal completely around all openings and over the fire safing
insulation with sealing compound.
3. Install fire sating around all pipe penetrations and sleeves passing
through fire walls, ceilings, floors, etc.
3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with
NFPA 13.
B. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs
from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.
C. Install unions in pipes 2" and smaller adjacent to each valve. Unions are
not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved
mechanical couplings. *+
D. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment
having 2-1 /2 and larger connections.
E. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and
NFPA 14. Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 20
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
approved type sprinkler head wrench; mount cabinet in alarm
" check valve area.
d. Head guards shall be equal to Central Model 1 for upright
sprinklers in areas specified on drawings.
e. Drain and test connections shall be equal to AGF Model 1000
with sight glass, and test orifice.
f. Horizontal sidewall sprinkler heads shall be Star Model "E"
with who
g. Dry horizontal sidewall shall be equal to Central Model H-1 ,
1" NPT, 165oF.
h. Dry pendent sprinkler shall be equal to Central Model A-1
recessed type with white cover, extended dry pendent, 1"
NPT, 165oF.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING
A. Prior to connecting sprinkler risers for flushing, flush water feed mains,
lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire
sprinkler-piping installation has been completed and before piping is
placed in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove
foreign substances, under pressure as specified in ANSI/NFPA 13.
Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris has
not clogged sprinklers.
B. After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically, for period
of 2 hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum
static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi.
Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low
point of each system of zone being tested. Test dry-pipe hydrostatically
except, in freezing conditions, test with air at pressures not less than 50
psi, for period of 2 hours. Check system for leakage. Leave differential
dry-valve clappers open during test, to prevent damage.
C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in
accordance with ANSI/NFPA standards for "little or no leakage", and retest
as specified to demonstrate compliance. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak
compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.
3.2 FIRE SAFING
A. Work Included: Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary to
!* complete the work including, but not limited to the following:
1 . Fire safing at all penetrations through fire barriers, including all
penetrations through existing plaster ceiling for the installation of
Attic sprinklers.
2. Fire safing at all penetrations through smoke barriers.
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 19
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
Jenkins: 275U
Stockham: B-133
Walworth: 904
b. Flanged End, 2-1 /2" and Larger: FM, UL listed, 175 psi, iron
body bronze mounted, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke,
rising stem.
Crane: 467
Fairbanks: 0412
Hammond: IR1 154
Jenkins: 825-A
Stockham: G-634
Walworth: 8713-F
3. Check Valves
a. 2-1 /2" and Larger: FM, 175 psi, iron body bronze mounted,
renewable composition disc and bronze seat ring, bolted
cover, flanged ends.
Fairbanks: 0711
Jenkins: 729
Stockham: G-940
Walworth: 8883-LT
4. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and
equipment, including valves in branch lines where necessary to
isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and
so that separate support can be provided when necessary.
5. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where
possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from
horizontal plane unless unavoidable.
F. Fire Protection Specialties
1 . Provide fire protection specialties, UL listed, in accordance with the
following listing. Provide sizes and types, which mate and match
piping and equipment connections.
a. Upright sprinkler heads shall be Viking Corp., Model "M"
standard upright sprinkler head, rough brass. Temperature
rating 1 65o or as required by the insurance underwriter.
b. Semi-recessed dry pendant sprinkler heads shall be Viking
Model "M" chrome plated head with Type T-1" recessed
escutcheon, rated at 165oF unless otherwise noted; to be
installed in all occupied spaces.
C. Spare sprinklers shall be provided in one 12-head cabinet
equal to Viking, Model A-1 cabinet. Each cabinet shall have
an assortment of heads as used on the job and also an ■-
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 18
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
5. Install building attachments at required locations on structural steel
for proper piping support. Space attachments within maximum
piping span length indicated on MSS SP-69. Install additional build-
ing attachments where support is required for additional
concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers,
expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping.
6. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support
piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69.
Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be
supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install
supports with maximum spacing complying with MSS SP-69. Where
piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze
hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate
supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated
metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other
piping.
7. Support sprinkler piping independently of other piping.
8. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of
piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe
anchors and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion
loops, expansion bends and similar units.
9. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide pipe slopes and
so that maximum pipe deflections allowed to ANSI B31 Pressure
Piping Codes are not exceeded.
10. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads
equally on attachments.
E. Valves
1 . Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for
use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure
k- ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by
Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide end
connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment
connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is
Installer's option.
a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as
upstream pipe size.
b. Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other
z than quarter-turn.
2. Gate Valves
a. Threaded End, 2" and Smaller: FM, UL-listed, 175 psi, bronze
body, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem.
Crane: 459
Fairbanks: 0222
Hammond: IB681
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 17
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
D. Supports, Anchors, and Seals
1 . Provide factory-fabricated piping hangers and supports complying
with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected
by Installer to suit piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69
and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one
type by one manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of
hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size.
a. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1 , for piping
larger than 4".
b. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7, for piping 4"
and less.
C. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8.
2. Provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachments complying with
MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by
Installer to suit horizontal piping hangers and building attachments,
in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturers published product
information. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each
piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit
hanger rods.
a. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. 00,
b. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15.
C. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16.
d. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17.
3. Provide factory-fabricated building attachments complying with MSS
SP-58, of one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to
suit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69
and manufacturer's published product information. Select size of
building attachments to suit hanger rods.
a. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19.
b. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20.
C. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23.
d. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27.
e. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30.
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and
supports of one of the following:
B-Line Systems Inc.
Carpenter and Patterson, Inc.
Corner& Lada Co., Inc. **
Elcen Metal Products Co.
Fee & Mason Mfg. Co.
ITT Grinnell Corp.
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 16
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
pressure and time.
1 . Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:
a. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe;
remove burrs.
b. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in
foundation walls below grade, or in exterior walls, caulked
between sleeve and pipe.
"
C. Install pipe sleeves of types indicated where piping passes
through walls, floors, ceilings and roofs. Do not install
sleeves through structural members of work, except as
detailed on drawings, or as reviewed by Architect. Install
sleeves so that piping will have free movement in sleeve,
including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than
2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Install length of sleeve
equal to thickness of surface; except floor sleeves. Extend
floor sleeves 1 /4" above level floor finish, and 3/4" above
floor finish sloped to drain. Provide temporary support of
sleeves during placement of concrete and other work around
sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete
and other materials from entering sleeves.
d. Sleeve Seals: Install in accordance with the following:
Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe
with oakum, caulk with lead, on both sides.
2. Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter
closely fitting pipe outside diameter or outside of pipe insulation
where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to
completely cover pipe sleeve and extension, if any. Furnish pipe
escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas; prime
paint finish for unoccupied areas.
a. Pipe Escutcheons for all areas: Provide chrome plated sheet
steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged.
b. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe
escutcheons of one of the following:
Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co.
Producers Specialty & Mfg. Co.
Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co.
C. Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through
floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is
exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure
escutcheon to pipe so escutcheon covers penetration hole,
and is flush with adjoining surface.
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 15
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006 on
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
practices which will achieve permanently leak proof piping systems,
capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install
each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and
accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves
and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings.
Align piping accurately at connections, within 1 /16" misalignment
tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.
D. Locate piping runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and
horizontally (pitched to drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible.
Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines. Locate runs as
shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise
indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable
space or block access for servicing building and its equipment.
Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other
structural and permanent-enclosure elements of building. Wherever
possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view, by
locating in column enclosures, in hollow wall construction or above
suspended ceilings; do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions,
except as indicated.
E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults,
Elevator Machine Room, and other electrical or electronic equipment spa-
ces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that
must be run through electrical spaces. Any piping intended to be run
through electrical spaces shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to
installation.
F. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1 ; cut threads full and clean using
sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside
diameter. Apply pipe joint compounder pipe joint tape (Teflon) where
recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint
and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.
G. Flanged joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections
with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets.
Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets.
H. Grooved Pipe Joints: Comply with fitting manufacturer's instructions for
making grooves in pipe ends. Remove burrs and ream pipe ends.
Assemble joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
I. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous
materials, and prepare for application of specified coatings (if any).
J. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test *�+
each natural section of each piping system independently, but do not use
piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressures exceed valve
pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated •
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 14
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
k Smith College, Northampton, MA
S r'
(6) Branch Stub-Ins: Upper housing with full locating
collar for rigid positioning engaging machine-cut hole
in pipe, encasing elastomeric gasket conforming to
pipe outside diameter around hole, and lower housing
with positioning lugs, secured together during
assembly with nuts and bolts.
(7) Fittings: Grooved or shouldered end design to accept
grooved mechanical couplings.
.. : Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47.
Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.
I
(8) Flanges: Conform to Class 125 cast iron and Class
150 steel bolt hole alignment.
Malleable Iron: ASTM 47.
Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536.
(9) Grooves: Conform to the following:
Standard Steel: Square cut.
Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved.
(10) Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide grooved piping products of the
` following:
ITT Grinnell Corp.
Victaulic Co.
B. Piping above ground and within the building shall conform to all
requirements of NFPA 13 and shall be as follows:
1 . Exposed sprinkler piping, subject to vandalism (stair halls and
similar areas), shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe, welded,
suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure.
2. All concealed piping and all exposed sprinkler piping in Mechanical
Equipment Rooms 1-1 /2" and smaller, shall be at the option of the
Fire Protection Subcontractor, either Schedule 40 black steel pipe
with screwed fittings or standard weight roll grooved pipe with
grooved fittings.
3. All exposed sprinkler piping, 1 -1 /2" and smaller, shall be Schedule
40 black steel pipe with screwed fittings.
4. Schedule 40 seamless red brass pipe with brass screwed fittings
suitable for 175 psi. working water pressure.
5. Type "L" seamless drawn hard copper tubing with solder joint
pressure fittings, where noted on the drawings.
C. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 13
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
f. Furnish complete chart and flow diagram of entire system
listing the valve number, fluid controlled, and zone reference
location for all valves corresponding to the tag numbers.
The chart shall be framed under glass and hung in the Fire
Protection Equipment Room where directed. Furnish two (2)
extra copies of the chart to the Architect.
g. Furnish and install a laminated red phenolic plate with
engraved white lettering for each zone control flow switch
and isolation valve. Nameplates shall be located adjacent to
all exposed and concealed valves, approximately 12" below
finished ceiling.
2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Interior Piping
1 . Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, A 106 or A 120: except comply with
ASTM A 53 or A 106 where close coiling or bending is required. +*+
a. Pipe Weight: Schedule 40.
B, Fittings: Class 125, cast-iron threaded, ANSI 1316.4, or
flanged, ANSI 1316.1 .
C. Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings;
cut-groove type for piping 2-1 /2" and larger only.
(1) Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135.
(2) Pipe Weight: Schedule 10 for 5" and smaller; 0.134"
wall thickness for 6".
(3) Fittings: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and
fittings; roll-groove or mechanical locking type. ..
d. Grooved Piping Products (for use on pipes 2-1 /2" and larger)
(1) Coupling Housings: Malleable iron conforming to
ASTM A 47.
(2) Coupling Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A
536.
(3) Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical
type, which engages grooved or shouldered pipe ends,
encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe
ends to create seal. Cast in two or more parts, secure
together during assembly with nuts and bolts. Permit
degree of contraction and expansion as specified in
manufacturer's latest published literature.
(4) Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design,
pressure responsive so that internal pressure serves to
increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers
having properties as designated by ASTM D 2000.
(5) Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A
183, minimum tensile 1 10,000-psi.
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 12
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1 .
a. For external diameters less than 6", provide full-band pipe
markers,
extending 3600 around pipe at each location, fastened as
follows:
Snap-on application of pre-tensioned, semi-rigid plastic
pipe marker.
b. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed
nomenclature, which best describes piping system in each
instance, as selected by Architect.
C. Locate pipe markers as follows:
(1) Near each valve and control device.
(2) Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50'
r along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in
congested areas of piping and equipment.
(3) Branch piping need not be marked.
3. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass valve tags with printed
enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately
3/16" high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately
3/8" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. Provide tags on all
valves and control devices.
a. Provide 1 -1 /8" sq. brass tags with black lettering.
b. Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link
or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required
for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured
specifically for that purpose.
C. Submit valve schedule for piping system, typewritten and
reproduced on 8-1 /2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on
tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for
identification (if any). Mark valves, which are intended for
emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special
"flags", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted
copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as
specified in Division 1.
d. For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display
frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry
walls. Provide frames
of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade
sheet glass.
e. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in rooms where
indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, where directed by
Architect.
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 11
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006 ow
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
4. This Subcontractor shall co-ordinate the elevations of all piping and
equipment in hung ceilings for the installation of recessed lighting ,
fixtures, duct boxes, etc. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention
of the Architect for a decision before the piping and/or equipment
of other trades is installed. do
5. In areas where, due to construction conditions, more than one trade
is required to use common openings in chases, shafts and sleeves
for the passage of conduits, raceways, piping, ductwork and other
materials, this Subcontractor must plan and locate the positions of
equipment to be furnished under this Section so that all items in-
cluding piping and/or equipment of other trades may be
accommodated within the space available. Location and positioning
shall be done prior to installation of same and to the satisfaction of
the Architect.
6. This Subcontractor, before installing his work, shall see that it does
not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pi-
lasters, partitions or walls, as shown on the Contract Architectural
or Structural Drawings showing foundations, floor plans, roof plans,
and details.
7. Piping work that is installed under this Contract which interferes
with the architectural design or building structure, shall be changed
as directed by the Architect, and all costs incidental to such changes
shall be paid by this Subcontractor at no additional cost to the
Owner.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes,
types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated.
Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to
comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types matching
piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials, which
match pipe materials used in fire protection piping systems. Where more
than one type of material or product is indicated, selection is Installer's
option.
B. Basic Identification
1 . Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical
identification materials of one of the following:
Allen Systems, Inc.
Brady (W. H.) Co., ; Signmark Div.
Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.
Seton Name Plate Corp.
2. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on,
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 10
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
" Wilson & Gardiner Houses
k Smith College, Northampton, MA
7. List of recommended spare parts.
8. Copies of all service contracts.
9. Performance curves for pumps, etc.
10. Lists of all names, addresses, and phone numbers of all Subcon-
tractors as well as the local representative for each item of equip-
ment.
1 .16 GUARANTEE
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall guarantee the satisfactory
operation of his work in all parts for a period of one (1) year after the date
of final acceptance, and shall agree to promptly repair or replace any items
of his work which are found to be defective during this period.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall pay for repair of damage to the
building caused by defects in his work and .for repair to plaster, wood, and
other materials or equipment caused by replacement or repairs to the
entire satisfaction of the Architect.
C. Any part of the work installed under this Contract requiring excessive
maintenance shall be considered as being defective.
go
1 .17 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Refer to Division 1 for Record Drawings.
B. Record Drawings shall reflect all changes from the Contract Drawings
whether by change order or by field conditions. Principal dimensions shall
be indicated of concealed work, fire protection lines, valves, and zone flow
switches. All changes must be clearly marked with a bubble drawn around
the area of work effected by the change.
C. Co-ordination of Trades
1 . The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall give full co-operation to the
Subcontractors of other trades, and shall furnish any information
necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed
+ + satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay.
2. In areas where conflicts may occur, if so directed by the Architect,
this Subcontractor shall prepare composite sketches at a suitable
scale, not less than 1 /4" = V-0", clearly showing how his work is to
be installed in relation to the work of other trades.
3. Piping and other equipment shall not be installed in congested and
possible problem areas by this Subcontractor without first
coordinating the installation of same with other trades and the
Architect. This Subcontractor, at his own expense, shall relocate all
uncoordinated piping and other equipment installed
should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of
electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, hung ceilings, and other
„ structural finishes installed by other trades.
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 9
00
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
1 .13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. All necessary tools machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for
completion of his Contract shall be provided by the Fire Protection Sub-
contractor.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide his own portable extension .0
lines and obtain 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase electric energy from the
General Contractor to drive his machines and light his work. He shall
provide his own light bulbs, plugs, sockets, etc.
C. All broken or waste material, rags, packing, etc., resulting from his work
shall be removed by the individual Subcontractor.
1 .14 WORK CONCEALED
A. All piping shall be installed exposed except where piping is to be installed
above new acoustic ceilings. Where ceilings are installed sprinklers shall
be installed above and below the ceiling. *►
B. Piping containing water shall not be installed concealed in walls having an
exterior exposure above grade.
1 .15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. After all final tests and adjustments have been completed, fully instruct the
proper Owner's representative in all details of operation of equipment
installed. Supply qualified personnel to operate equipment for sufficient
length of time to assure that Owner's representative is properly qualified to
take over operation and maintenance procedures.
B. Furnish the Architect, for his approval, three (3) copies of an Operation and
Maintenance Manual. Inscribe the following identification on the cover:
the words, "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location of
the equipment or the building, the name of the Subcontractor, and the
Contract number. The manual shall have a Table of Contents with tab
sheets placed before each section. The instructions shall be legible and
easily read, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The manuals shall be
bound in hard binders or an approved equivalent.
C. The Manual shall include the following information:
1 . Description of systems.
2. Description of start-up, operation, and shutdown.
3. Schedule of adjustment, care, and routine maintenance for each
item of equipment.
4. Lubrication chart.
5. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation
and control of each item of equipment.
6. Valve chart.
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 8
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
ANSI/NFPA 13, and also that system is operational, complete, and
has no defects.
1 .9 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall secure all permits and pay all fees
required for his work. He shall be required to secure all other permits and
3 pay all other fees and charges incidental to the proper carrying out of the
Contract. He is to assume all responsibility regarding the observance of
the rules and regulations so far as they relate to his part of the work.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall arrange and pay for all required
inspections of his work.
1 .10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
A. The General Contractor will provide any temporary hook-ups required for
the use of water or sanitary for construction purposes and testing out ap-
paratus as specified in Division 1 .
1 .11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
f
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall refer to the Architectural Drawings
of interior details, plans, elevations, and structural layout in preparing his
Bid. These documents are intended to supplement the Mechanical and
Electrical Plans and Specifications and any applicable work indicated or
implied thereon is to be considered a part of the Contract requirements.
B. The Specifications and Plans are complementary and anything called for, or
reasonably implied, in the Plans and not in the Specifications, or vice versa,
shall be considered as called for or reasonably implied in both.
C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall not scale the drawings.
D. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all
offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required. The Fire Protection
Subcontractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish
conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly,
furnishing such fittings, traps, offsets, valves, and accessories as may be
required to meet such conditions, at no additional cost.
1 .12 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his
materials and equipment to the building site when required, so as to carry
on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other
trades.
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 7
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
and Specifications and shall field verify all existing conditions before
ordering any materials and the installation of work. Any discrepancies
shall be called to the attention of the Architect before proceeding with the
work.
1 .7 PRODUCTS
A. With the exception of items specifically noted otherwise, all materials used
shall be U.S. made, new, full weight, and first class in every respect,
without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the
work for which they are intended, and with the same brand of
manufacturers for each class of material or equipment. Electrical materials
and equipment of types for which there are Underwriters Laboratories
standard requirements, listings, or labels shall conform to their
requirements and be so labeled.
1 .8 SUBMITTALS
A. Before ordering materials shipped to the job, the Fire Protection ►
Subcontractor shall submit to the Architect eight (8) sets of catalogue cuts
or manufacturers' data sheets, giving all details, dimensions, capacities,
etc. of all materials to be furnished.
B. Submit hydraulic calculations and scaled layout drawings for fire
protection pipe and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe .�
and tube sizes, locations, elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, wall
and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial re-
lationship between piping and proximate equipment.
1 . Shop Drawings are subject to review and will require approval by
Owner's insurer's rating organization (IRI Incorporated) and the
Northampton Fire Department prior to submitting to the Architect
for approval.
2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check the shop drawings
thoroughly for compliance with the Plans and Specifications before " "
submitting them to the Architect for review, making any and all
changes, which may be required.
3. The review of shop drawings by the Architect shall not relieve the
Fire Protection Subcontractor from any obligation to perform the
work strictly in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Spec-
ifications. The responsibility for errors in shop drawings shall
remain with the individual Subcontractor.
4. In the event that materials are being delivered to or installed on the
job for which shop drawings or samples have not been approved
and/or which are not in accordance with the Specifications, the Fire
Protection Subcontractor will be required to remove such materials
and substitute approved materials at his own expense and as
directed by the Architect.
5. Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping work,
which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with �•
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 6
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
work begins.
C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be held responsible for any injuries
or damage done to the building premises or adjoining property or to other
Subcontractors' work resulting from the execution of his part of the work
in any manner whatsoever; and in case of dispute arising as to the extent
or share of responsibility incurred by the Fire Protection Subcontractor, it
is agreed between the Owner and the Fire Protection Subcontractor that
such liability and extent of damage shall be finally determined by the
Architect whose decision shall be final and binding on both parties to the
Contract for the work in question.
D. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall co-operate to the fullest extent
with all other trades in order to expedite the progress of the work. He
shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes,
locations, and means of support, to all other trades requiring such infor-
mation. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall also furnish all sleeves,
frames, beams, supports, inserts, etc., hereinafter specified so that the
General Contractor may build them in place. In case of failure on the part
of the Fire Protection Subcontractor to give proper information, as above,
he will be required to bear the extra expense involved due to such failure.
E. The arrangement of all piping, ductwork, conduit, wire and cable indicated
on the drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum require-
„ ments of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual
arrangement of runs, bends, offsets, etc.
F. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall lay out all his work and be
responsible for the accuracy thereof. Conditions at the building shall be
the determining factor for all measurements. In no case shall piping be
installed laterally in thickness of slab or deck.
G. All work shall be laid out and installed so as to require the least amount of
cutting and patching. Drilling of all holes required for the installation of
pipes, conduit, and cable runs shall be performed by the Subcontractor
installing such items. All piping shall be installed concealed in finished
spaces.
H. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for the proper
protection of his work and materials from injury or loss at the hands of
+ ► others and shall make good such loss or injury at. his own expense. All
pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged
at all times. All instruments and operating apparatus shall be protected by
suitable means.
I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for all equipment
and materials installed under this Section until the final acceptance of the
project by the Owner.
J. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall check all of the Architectural Plans
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 5
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
D. FM Labels: Provide sprinkler products bearing FM approval labels.
E. UL Labels: Provide fire sprinkler piping products, which have been ,
approved and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories.
F. Local Fire Department/Marshall Regulations: Comply with governing
regulations pertaining to fire sprinkler piping. Review proposed system
with said officials prior to commencing work.
G. Final installation of system is subject to approval by Owner's insurer's
rating organization and local Fire Department.
H. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in
this Section will be determined in accordance with the provisions of the
General Requirements, except that substitutions will only be considered for
items where the words, "or equal" appear in the product specification.
I. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall agree to accept as final the results
of tests secured by a qualified testing laboratory engaged by the Owner.
Tests will be conducted in accordance with the General Requirements.
1.5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS +
A. All materials and the installation thereof shall conform to the requirements
of the Massachusetts State Building Code, Electrical Code, Fuel Gas and ,
Plumbing Code and local laws, rules, regulations, and codes pertaining
thereto. Where provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any
codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern.
Where the Contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules
or regulations, the Contract provisions shall govern unless the Architect
rules otherwise.
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall comply with the Local Code
Enforcement Officials' instructions at no additional cost to the Owner.
Review proposed system with said officials prior to commencing work.
1 .6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall employ. only competent and
experienced workmen at a regular schedule in harmony with the other
tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his
employees in regard to proper and expeditious laying out of his work. "*g
B. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall have a Foreman or Superintendent
assigned to the Project who shall be authorized to make decisions and
receive instructions exactly as if the Fire Protection Subcontractor himself
were present. The Foreman or Superintendent shall not be removed or
replaced without the express approval of the Architect after construction
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 4
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
IF Subcontractor.
2. Cutting and patching.
1 .3 SYSTEM DESIGN
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall perform a water flow test, and with
this information, shall calculate pipe sizes and sprinkler head configura-
tion and orifice sizes in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Sprinkler head and pipe run locations, as shown on the drawings, are to be
interpreted as diagrammatic only. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall
produce a design based on actual available water pressure and submit it to
the Architect for approval before beginning fabrication and installation.
C. Design Criteria: Pipe sizing and sprinkler head layout shown on the
drawings is provided to indicate a suggested pipe routing, zoning, and
sprinkler head location, and shall not be used for estimating purposes.
Location of piping and heads shall be co-ordinated with all other trades.
Actual pipe sizing, types of heads, and layout shall be based on a
hydraulically designed system in accordance with the requirements of
NFPA 13, the Northampton Fire Department, and the Insurance Underwriter
(I.R.Q. Location of sprinkler heads, in relation to the ceiling light hazard
occupancy. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall prepare working
` drawings and hydraulic calculations per NFPA 13 and shall obtain
Northampton Fire Department and the Colleges Insurance Underwriter
approval prior to start of work. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall
perform water flow tests or obtain water flow data in writing from local
authority. Co-ordinate work of this Section with all trades to avoid inter-
ference with ductwork, HVAC and plumbing, piping, electrical work,
structure, etc. Final sprinkler head locations shall be subject to Architect's
approval.
The number of heads and pipe sizes may be increased or reduced due to
hydraulic calculations or the installation of revised heads, provided the
revised heads are UL listed and F.M. approved and meet NFPA 13,
Northampton Fire Department, and (IRI) Insurance Underwriter's criteria.
Additionally, all heads shall be in accordance with NFPA 13
recommendations.
1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection
piping systems products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than
five (5) years.
B. NFPA Code: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler System".
C. FM Compliance: Comply with Factory Mutual "Approval Guide".
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 3
Proj No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
SECTION 215300 - FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Include General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, applicable
parts of Division 1 , and conditions of the Contract as part of this Section.
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements, which
affect work under this, Section whether or not, such work is specifically
mentioned in this Section.
C. Co-ordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by the
work of this Section. Co-operate with such trades to assure steady prog-
ress of all work under the Contract.
1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, appurtenances and services necessary for, and
reasonably incidental to, the complete installation of all fire protection
work specified herein and/or indicated on the drawings, including, but not
limited to, the following: „
1 . Complete renovations to the existing dry pipe automatic sprinkler
system. System shall be installed in all renovated spaces, unless
otherwise noted, including renovation to existing building sprinkler
system located in the basement and attic.
2. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall furnish all labor and
materials required for his own hoisting, rigging, and scaffolding
during the entire course of the project.
3. Disconnect and remove all existing sprinkler heads and piping
made obsolete by or interfering with new construction.
4. Disconnect and remove all existing heads and install new chrome
plated, quick responses heads in all spaces.
5. Submit plans and calculations to the colleges Insurance Underwriter
(IRI Insurance company C/o HSB Industrial Risk Insurers, 85
Woodland Street, PO Box 5010, Hartford, CT. (Attn: Mr. David M.
Goush) for review and approval.
B. Related work, to be performed under other sections of his Specification
shall include the following:
1 . Wiring of flow switches, tamper switches, electric bell and control
panel back to the fire alarm panel shall be by the Electrical Sub-
contractor, coordinated and as directed by the Fire Protection ..
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 2
Proj No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College, Northampton, MA
INDEX
SECTION 215300 - FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL PART 3 - INSTALLATION
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3.1 CLEANING AND TESTING
rt 1 .2 SCOPE OF WORK 3.2 FIRE SAFINGS
1 .3 SYSTEMS DESIGN 3.3 INTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION
1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.4 FINAL CLOSEOUT
1 .5 CODES, ORDINANCES AND INSPECTIONS
1 .6 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1 .7 PRODUCTS
1 .8 SUBMITTALS
1 .9 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
1 .10 TEMPORARY HOOK-UPS
1 .11 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
1 .12 PRODUCT HANDLING
1 .13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1 .14 WORK CONCEALED
1 .15 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
1 .16 GUARANTEE
1 .17 RECORD DRAWINGS
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING MATERIALS AND
PRODUCTS
2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
FIRE PROTECTION 215300 - 1
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges
rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges.
Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing
plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using
fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit
manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and
at heights indicated.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibf (1 112 N),
when tested according to method in ASTM F 446.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or
defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
END OF SECTION 102800
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 7
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2.4 PRIVATE-USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide same accessories as for Public-Use Bathrooms, except as
follows:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1 . Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
C. Toilet Tissue Dispenser:
1 . Product:
2. Description: Single-roll dispenser with fixed arm and integral spindle.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted.
4. Capacity: Designed for 4-1 /2- or 5-inch- (114- or 127-mm-) diameter
tissue rolls.
5. Material and Finish: Polished chrome-plated brass.
2.5 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1 . Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
B. Mop and Broom Holder:
1. Product: B-224
2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rag hooks beneath
shelf.
3. Length: 30 inches (760 mm).
4. Hooks: Three.
5. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type.
6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- (1 .3-mm-) thick stainless
steel.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 6 � .
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1 . Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
B. Shower Curtain Rod:
1 . Product: B-6047
2. Description: 1 -1 /4-inch (32-mm) OD; fabricated from nominal 0.05-
! inch- (1 .3-mm-) thick stainless steel.
3. Mounting Flanges: Stainless-steel flanges designed for exposed
fasteners.
4. Finish: No. 4 (satin).
e C. Shower Curtain:
1 . Size: Minimum 12 inches (305 mm) wider than opening by 72 inches
(1828 mm) high.
2. Material: Nylon-reinforced vinyl, minimum 10-oz. (284-g) or 0.008-
} inch- (0.2-mm-) thick vinyl, with integral antibacterial agent.
3. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
4. Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches 0 52 mm) o.c.
through top hem.
,. 5. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless-steel, spring wire
curtain hooks with snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified
curtain rod. Provide one hook per curtain grommet.
D. Soap Dish:
1. Product: B-973
2. Description: Without washcloth bar.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted.
4. Material and Finish: Polished Chrome on cast bronze..
E. Robe Hooks:
1 . Product: Ives 583
2. Description: Stainless-steel, double pronged
3. Mounting: Surface mounted.
W 4. Material and Finish: Stainless Steel, MB26D
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 5
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses �*
Smith College
2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1 .3 mm) thick.
a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish.
3. Outside Diameter:
a. Towel Bars and Shaving Bars: 1 -1 /4 inches (32 mm)
b. Grab Bars: 1 -112 inches (38 mm).
4. Configuration and Length:
a. Towel Bars: Straight, 28 inches (650 mm) long.
1) Provide one per Shower / Bathtub
b. Shaving Bars: Straight, 12 inches (300 mm) long.
1) Provide one per Shower.
C. Grab Bars: Straight, 28 inches (650 mm) long.
1) Provide where indicated.
D. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit (SND):
1. Product: Rubbermaid
2. Mounting: Surface mounted.
3. Door or Cover: Self-closing disposal-opening cover.
4. Receptacle: Removable.
5. Material and Finish: Molded plastic, ivory.
E. Mirror Unit:
1 . Frame: Stainless-steel channel.
a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth.
2. Mounting:
a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, for concealed mounting flush with
wall.
3. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
2.3 PUBLIC-USE SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following: .,
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 4
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial
steel), 0.0359-inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Zl 80) hot-dip zinc
coating.
E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication.
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit
and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where
concealed.
G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate
service).
H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal
6.0 mm thick.
I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.
2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
2. Rubbermaid, Inc.
B. Toilet Tissue (Roil) Dispenser (TPD)
1 . Product: B-76867.
2. Description: Double-roll dispenser.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted.
4. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle.
5. Capacity: Designed for 4-1 /2- or 5-inch- (114- or 127-mm-) diameter
tissue rolls.
6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
C. Grab Bar including Towel Bars:
1 . Mounting: Flanges with exposed fasteners.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 3
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations
by room of each accessory required.
1 . Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.
2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.
C. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance
manuals.
1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1 .5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with
clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper
installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required
to prevent delaying the Work.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1 . Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum
nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: ASTM B 19 flat products; ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), rods, shapes,
forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2 ••,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
r A. This Section includes the following:
1 . Public-use washroom accessories.
2. Public-use shower room accessories.
3. Private-use bathroom accessories.
4. Custodial accessories.
B. Owner-Furnished Material:
1 . Paper Towel Dispensers.
2. Soap Dispensers.
3. Shower Doors.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1 .3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1 . Construction details and dimensions.
2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for
cutouts in other work and substrate preparation.
3. Material and finish descriptions.
' 4. Features that will be included for Project.
5. Manufacturer's warranty.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
„ Wilson & Gardiner Houses
4 Smith College
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. install
units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with
manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
1 . Maximum Clearances:
a. Pilasters and Panels: 112 inch (1 3 mm).
b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm).
2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less
than two brackets attached near top and bottom of panel.
a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or
the joints.
b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and
!! tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than two
fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels and adjust so
tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed
position.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to
manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in
swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed
position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to
fully closed position.
END OF SECTION 102113
, , TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 5
an
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
C. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant
anchoring assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling
adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural support above
finished ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure
without transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops of
pilasters to conceal anchorage. .�
D. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard
corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies complete with leveling adjustment at
tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to
conceal anchorage.
E. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide in-
swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-)
wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear
opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with
disabilities.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted
to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees.
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard latch unit designed for
emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and
keeper. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible
to people with disabilities.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-
tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-
mounted accessories.
4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-
swinging doors.
5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that ..
complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments
a�
indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 4 ,..
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
=� Smith College
a. Polymer Color and Pattern: Matching Panel.
E. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum
strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to
R prevent burning.
F. Overhead Cross Bracing for Ceiling-Hung Units: As recommended by
manufacturer and fabricated from solid polymer.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty
operating hardware and accessories.
1 . Material: Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear
anodized aluminum or Stainless steel.
B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum
head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.
C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of
stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware,
with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt
applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-
resistant, protective-coated steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant
supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor
conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at
top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and
leveling mechanism.
B. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant
anchoring assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling
adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes
' at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
�, TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 3
no
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses *►
Smith College
1 .5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and
other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements
before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made
without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with
fabricating toilet compartments without field measurements. Coordinate ..
wall, floor, ceilings, and other contiguous construction to ensure that
actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
.a
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOLID-POLYMER UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1 . Comtec Industries.
2. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.
3. Santana Products, Inc. w
B. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene
(HDPE) or polypropylene (PP) panel material, not less than 1 inch (25 mm)
thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern
throughout thickness of material.
1 . Color and Pattern: Two colors and patterns in each room as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns.
C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless ..�
steel.
D. Brackets (Fittings):
1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, stainless steel.
2. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; polymer,
extruded aluminum or stainless steel.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 2 ..
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
. Smith College
! SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes solid-polymer units as follows:
1. Toilet Enclosures: Overhead braced.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 10 'Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue
dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories.
1 .3 SUBMITTALS
4 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and
finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other work.
1 . Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.
2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated.
1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements in CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete."
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 1
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove
spattered materials by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or
damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct
Y.:
damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces.
3.5 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Finish Carpentry Substrates:
1 . Polyurethane Varnish Over Stain System: MPI INT 63E.
a. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain (semitransparent).
b. Second Coat: Interior, oil-modified, clear urethane (gloss).
C. Third Coat: Interior, oil-modified, clear urethane (satin
END OF SECTION 099300
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 5
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses •
Smith College
1 . After completing finishing operations, reinstall items that were removed;
use workers skilled in the trades involved. Remove surface-applied
protection if any.
C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written
instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1 . Remove surface dirt, oil, or grease by washing with a detergent solution;
rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade .,
stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers
by brushing.
2. Countersink steel nails, if used, and fill with putty tinted to final color to
eliminate rust leach stains.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1 . Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated.
2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar
exposed surfaces.
3. Touch sand between coats.
B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap •
marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.
C.
1 . If surface films are unacceptable, as determined by Architect, take
corrective actions including additional coats even if in excess of coats .,
specified, until imperfections are remedied.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other
discarded materials from Project site.
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 4 ,�
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
r Smith College
2.3 STAINS
A. Interior Wood Stain (Semitransparent): MPI #90.
2.4 POLYURETHANE FINISHES
A. Interior, Oil-Modified, Clear Urethane (Satin): MPI #57, Gloss Level 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance
with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
1 . Maximum Moisture Content of Wood Substrates: 15 percent when
measured with an electronic moisture meter.
r 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including
compatibility with existing finishes.
3. Begin finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected and surfaces are dry.
4. Beginning application of finish system constitutes Contractor's
acceptance of substrate and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
' Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are
not to be finished. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or
weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation
and finishing.
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 3
.o
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses so
Smith College
1 . Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in its "MPI so
Approved Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and finish
systems indicated.
1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas
with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F
(7 deg Q.
1 . Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and
residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient
air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg Q.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Stain Colors: Custom formulated to match existing natural finish woodwork.
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 2 ,
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of wood finishes
on the following substrates:
1 . Interior Substrates:
a. Dressed lumber (finish carpentry).
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and
application of standard paint systems on interior substrates.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish system and in each color and
gloss of finish indicated.
1 . Submit Samples on representative samples of actual wood substrates, 8
inches (200 mm) square.
2. Label each Sample for location and application area.
1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 1
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1 . Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1 E.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.
E
C. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (semigloss).
B. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork and doors.
1. Latex System: MPI INT 63T.
x a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Interior latex (semigloss).
C. Plaster Substrates (Ceilings):
w 1 . Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M.
40
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex
matching topcoat.
C. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex (flat).
D. Plaster Substrates (Walls):
1 . Institutioal Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex
matching topcoat.
10 C. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex (eggshell).
! " END OF SECTION 099123
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 9
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses No
Smith College
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays,
laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface
imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment
rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:
1 . Mechanical Work:
a. Uninsulated metal piping.
b. Pipe hangers and supports.
C. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, **
behind air inlets and outlets.
d. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas
insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.
2. Electrical Work:
a. Panelboards.
b. Electrical equipment with a factory-primed finish for field painting.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
imp
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other
discarded materials from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove
spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or
damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct
damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and
refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Steel Substrates: ,
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 8 ,
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt,
oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1 . Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible
primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.
E. Wood Substrates:
1 . Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying
primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with
putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
M F. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured
and dry.
` 3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1 . Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar
exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind
permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
s
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers,
and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if
multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match
color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to
distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats
until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 7
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance
with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions ..s
affecting performance of work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic
moisture meter as follows:
1. Wood: 15 percent. ,
2. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility
with existing finishes and primers.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been '
corrected and surfaces are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of
substrates and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in NPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or
weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation
and painting.
1 . After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades
involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied
protection if any.
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment
name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 6 „ ,
- Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer
for use in paint systems indicated.
2.4 METAL PRIMERS
A. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2.5 WOOD PRIMERS
A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.
1 . VOC Content: E Range of E1.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1 .
2.6 LATEX PAINTS
A. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Flat): MPI #143 (Gloss Level 1).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.
B. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Eggshell): MPI #145 (Gloss Level 3).
i. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.5.
C. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Semigloss): MPI #147 (Gloss Level 5).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3.
2.7 ALKYD PAINTS
A. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5).
1 . VOC Content: E Range of E2.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5
am
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses w*
Smith College
C. Antimony.
d. Benzene.
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.
f. Cadmium.
g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j. 1 ,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
I. Dimethyl phthalate.
m. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
o. Hexavalent chromium.
p. Isophorone.
q. Lead.
r. Mercury.
S. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. .,
U. Methylene chloride.
V. Naphthalene.
40
w. Toluene (methylbenzene).
X. 1 ,1 ,1-trichloroethane.
y. Vinyl chloride. '
C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.
1 . VOC Content: E Range of E1.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1 .
B. Interior Alkyd Primer/Sealer: MPI #45.
1 . VOC Content: E Range of E1 .
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4
IMP
' Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
,,, Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
*' 1 . Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible
with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service
and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and
field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in
writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on
substrate indicated.
B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide
products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of
colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions; these
requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a
fabrication or finishing shop:
1 . Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
3. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than
1 .0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon
compounds containing one or more benzene rings).
4. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the
following:
a. Acrolein.
b. Acrylonitrile.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses .,
Smith College
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and
gloss of topcoat indicated.
1. 12 inch by 12 inch sample on actual substrate.
2. Label each Sample for location and application area. *■
D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1 . Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. ,
1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ..
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI
Approved Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint
systems indicated.
1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ,.
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas
with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F
(7 deg C).
1 . Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and
residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or
wet surfaces.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems
on the following interior substrates:
' 1 . Steel.
2. Wood.
3. Plaster.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers
specified in this Section.
2. Division 08 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers
specified in this Section.
3. Division 09 Section "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface
preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes
on interior wood substrates.
1 .3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.
1 . Submit full color wheel of manufacturers formulated colors.
2. Submit ready mix color charts for each product,
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
E. Install accessories in locations indicated.
F. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, blisters, and other
defects.
G. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure.
H. Clean and prime all surfaces with silicone primer. Apply sealant to all seams,
joints, plumbing trim and accessories. Where panels terminate against
substrates to receive paint finish, apply paintable sealant.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent
surfaces.
B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. *�
C. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, fixture trims, and similar items.
D. Remove all excess and waste materials.
END OF SECTION 097500
PVC WALL COVERINGS 097500 - 4
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and
other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond,
including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, dirt, and dust.
C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface
free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.
®s 1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and
concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter.
2. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation
" instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where
more stringent requirements apply.
B. Cut, scribe and fit PVC wall-covering sheets to heights indicated. Provide trim
pieces at outside corners and wall caps.
C. Where panels extend full height of partition between adjoining spaces, extend
wall covering over top of wall and finish with trim piece.
D. Lap adjacent panels a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm). Construct horizontal
joints to shed water.
PVC WALL COVERINGS 097500 - 3
oft
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its
intended use.
B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a lighting level of not less than 15 .
fc (160 lux) is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering.
C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less
than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or
curing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS �1e
2.1 PVC WALL-COVERING PRODUCTS
A. PVC Wall Covering:
1 . Manufacturer: Universal Bath Products.
a. Product: High-molecular poly-vinyl chloride sheets 0.090 inches
thick.
b. Color: Bone
C. Accessories:
1) Trim shapes: Standard trim for outside and inside corners.
2) Shampoo / Soap shelf. .w
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wall
covering and substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall- *
covering manufacturer.
B. Sealant: Mildew-resistant Silicone. "
1 . Product: Dow Corning 784, 786 or GE-SCS-1702
PVC WALL COVERINGS 097500 - 2 ..
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 097500 - PVC WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
!" 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. PVC wall covering.
2. PVC Accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. include data on physical
characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance
characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of PVC wall-covering. Indicate
seams and termination points for each type of shower and bathtub surround.
C. Samples for Coordination with other Finishes: 4 inch by 4 inch samples of
sheet product.
D. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals.
OR 1 .4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall coverings until spaces are
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work
above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions
PVC WALL COVERINGS 097500 - 1
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering
installation:
1 . Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage
from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during
remainder of construction period.
D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor
covering before applying liquid floor polish.
1 . Apply one coat.
E. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096516
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 7
OR
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses we
Smith College
D. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces,
permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets,
and door frames.
E. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar
openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for
future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use
chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.
G. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar *w
items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern
between pieces of floor coverings installed on covers and adjoining floor
covering. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to substrates that abut covers
and to cover perimeters.
H. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to
substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids,
raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and .�
other surface imperfections.
I. Seamless Installation:
1 . Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use
welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor
covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with
adjoining floor covering surfaces.
J. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove floor coverings 4 inches (100 mm) up vertical
surfaces. Support floor coverings at horizontal and vertical junction by cove
strip. Butt at top against cap strip.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of
floor coverings. ..
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 6 „,
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass
testing.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and
patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and
smooth substrate.
D. Install underlayment with minimum number of joints. Avoid using sheets less
than two feet wide.
E. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where
they are to be installed.
1 . Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they
will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings
immediately before installation.
3.3 FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings.
B. Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
C. Lay out floor coverings as follows:
1 . Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.
2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic
areas, at least 6 inches (152 mm) away from parallel joints in floor
covering substrates.
3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.
4. Avoid cross seams.
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 5
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
E. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories:
1 . Cove Strip: 1 -inch (25-mm) radius provided or approved by
manufacturer.
F. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended
by manufacturer and approved by Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other
requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks,
ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with
adhesion of floor coverings.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure
adhesion of floor coverings.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1 . Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible
with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using
mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use wo
solvents.
..
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 4 M
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL SHEET FLOOR COVERING
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1 . Forbo Flooring, Inc.Smaragd;.
a. Provide three colors, as selected by Architect. See finish schedule
for locations of each color.
B. Unbacked Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913, 0.080 inch (2.0 mm)
thick.
C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
D. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer.
E. Seaming Method: Heat welded.
F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland
cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or
approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Wood Underlayment: Multi-ply plywood underlayment
1 . Thickness: 1 /4 inch.
C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor
covering and substrate conditions indicated.
D. Seamless-Installation Accessories:
1 . Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for heat
welding seams.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to
contrast with floor covering.
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 3
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this
Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor
covering installation and seaming method indicated.
1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained
or certified by floor covering manufacturer for installation techniques
required.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. *
1 . Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
dW
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from
the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more
than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store rolls upright.
1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer,
but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C), in
spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation. �.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. w
D. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have
been completed.
wo
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 2 „�,
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
± ' PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Vinyl sheet floor covering, without backing.
B. Related Sections:
1 . Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base,
reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor
coverings.
2. Division 09 Section "Linoleum Flooring" for linoleum sheet floor
coverings.
1 .3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering indicated.
1 . For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, of each
color.
C. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance
manuals.
o
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096516 - 1
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
C. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Finish: Smooth-troweled finish, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed gypsum veneer plaster from damage from weather,
condensation, construction, and other causes during remainder of the
construction period.
B. Remove and replace gypsum veneer plaster and gypsum base panels that are
wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1 . Indications that gypsum base panels are wet or moisture damaged
include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular
shape.
2. Indications that gypsum base panels are mold damaged include, but are
not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092613
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 - 10 ■,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
OR Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1 . Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved soffits and openings.
3.5 INSTALLING JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Reinforce interior angles and flat joints with
joint tape and embedding material to comply with ASTM C 843 and with
gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Base: Reinforce joints between moisture- and
mold-resistant panels with joint tape and embedding material according to
panel manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.6 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING
A. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Application: Comply with ASTM C 843 and with veneer
plaster manufacturer's written recommendations.
1 . One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: Trowel apply base coat over
substrate to uniform thickness of 1 /16 to 3/32 inch (1 .6 to 2.4 mm). Fill
all voids and imperfections.
2. Where gypsum veneer plaster abuts only metal door frames, windows,
and other units, groove finish coat to eliminate spalling.
3. Do not apply veneer plaster to gypsum base if paper facing has degraded
from exposure to sunlight. Before applying veneer plaster, use remedial
methods to restore bonding capability to degraded paper facing
according to manufacturer's written recommendations and as approved
by Architect.
B. Concealed Surfaces: Do not omit gypsum veneer plaster behind cabinets,
furniture, furnishings, and similar removable items. Omit veneer plaster in the
following areas where it will be concealed from view in the completed Work
unless otherwise indicated or required to maintain fire-resistance and STC
ratings:
1. Soffit walls above suspended ceilings.
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 - 9
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3.3 INSTALLING PANELS
A. Install gypsum base panels for veneer plaster in the following locations:
1 . Regular Type: All surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Base: At shower and tub walls.
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum base panels before wall panels, to the greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. On walls, apply gypsum base panels vertically and parallel to framing,
unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly,
and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in
alternate courses of panels.
b. At stairwells and other walls higher than 30 feet (9.0 m), install
gypsum base panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or
required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. On Z-furring, apply gypsum base panels vertically (parallel to framing)
with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
C. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum base panels to supports with
steel drill screws.
D. Curved Partitions: Comply with gypsum base manufacturer's written
installation recommendations.
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing
with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Trim: Install in the following locations:
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 - 8
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
E. Locate edge and end joints over supports except in ceiling applications where
intermediate supports or back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not
place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on
opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints, other than control joints, at
corners of framed openings.
F. Attach panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached
to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
G. Attach panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
H. Cover both sides of steel stud partition framing with panels in concealed
spaces, including above ceilings, except in internally braced soffits
1 . Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air,
or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less
than 8 sq. ft. (0.74 sq. m) in area.
2. Fit panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
1. Wood Framing: Install panels over wood framing, with "floating" internal
corner construction. Do not attach panels across the flat grain of wide-
dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. "Float" panels over
these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints,
and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant.
Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through
penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written
recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths
around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical
ceilings.
K. Fastener Spacing: Comply with ASTM C 844, manufacturer's written
recommendations, and fire-resistance-rating requirements.
1 . Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. along framing
members for wall or ceiling application.
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 - 7
oft
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses 40
Smith College
PART 3 - EXECUTION
40
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions .�.
affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture
damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Verify that mortar joints are struck flush.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Apply according to ASTM C 844 unless
manufacturer's written recommendations are more stringent.
1. Do not allow gypsum base to degrade from exposure to sunlight as '
evidenced by fading of paper facing.
2. Erection Tolerance: No more than 1 /16-inch (1 .6-mm) offsets between
planes of gypsum base panels, and 1 /8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m)
noncumulative, for level, plumb, warp, and bow.
B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum base for veneer
plaster unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on
one side.
C. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end
joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling.
Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing
member.
D. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at "
edges and ends with not more than 1 /16 inch (1 .6 mm) of open space between
panels. Do not force into place.
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 - 6 „�
ON
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product
standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 631 , polyvinyl acetate.
C. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended by
manufacturer for directly adhering gypsum base face-layer panels to backing-
"" layer panels in multilayer construction.
4
1 . Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1 . Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel
!!' members from 0.033 to 0.1 12 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
E. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size
recommended by panel manufacturer.
F. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing), produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers
manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1 . Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber
requirements of assembly.
G. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "joint Sealants."
H. Patching Mortar: Dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland
cement to 2-1 /2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 0 .1 8-mm) sieve, using
only enough water for handling and placing.
2.6 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MIXES
A. Mechanically mix gypsum veneer plaster materials to comply with ASTM C 843
and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations.
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 - 5
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
a. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273; no mold growth after four weeks'
exposure.
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Standard Trim: ASTM C 1047, provided or approved by manufacturer for use ,
in gypsum veneer plaster applications indicated.
1 . Material: Aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc, except Plastic at
Bathrooms.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. -w
C. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
2.4 JOINT REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with joint strength requirements in ASTM C 587 and with
gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations for each
application indicated. .�
B. Joint Tape:
1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: As recommended by gypsum veneer
plaster manufacturer for applications indicated.
2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by cementitious backer unit
manufacturer.
C. Embedding Material for Joint Tape:
I . Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: As recommended by gypsum veneer
plaster manufacturer for use with joint-tape material and gypsum veneer
plaster applications indicated. „
2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by cementitious backer unit
manufacturer for applications indicated.
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 - 4 „ ,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2. Ventilate building spaces in a manner that prevents drafts of air from
contacting surfaces during veneer plaster application until it is dry.
D. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1 . Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not
limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to,
fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MATERIALS
A. One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587, formulated for
application directly over substrate without use of separate base-coat material.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. G-P Gypsum; Cameo Veneer Plaster.
b. National Gypsum Company; Uni-Kal Plaster.
C. USG Corporation; Diamond Interior Finish Plaster.
2.2 PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will
minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system
indicated.
B. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 588/C 588M.
1 . Regular Type: 1 /2 inch (13 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type X: 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick, at fire rated partitions.
3. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Base: With moisture- and mold-resistant
core, glass-mat facing on both sides of panel. Provide at all shower and
bath enclosures.
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 - 3
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses .�
Smith College
1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain gypsum veneer plaster products, including gypsum
base for veneer plaster, joint reinforcing tape, and embedding material, from a
single manufacturer.
B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 1 ]9 by a
testing and inspecting agency.
C. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those
tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according
to ASTM E 413 by a testing and inspecting agency.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand
name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against
damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion,
construction traffic, and other causes.
C. Stack panels fiat on leveled supports off floor or slab to prevent sagging.
1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 843 requirements or gypsum
veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more •
stringent.
B. Room Temperatures: Maintain not less than 55 deg F (1 3 deg C) or more than
80 deg F (27 deg C) for 7 days before application of gypsum base and gypsum
veneer plaster, continuously during application, and after application until
veneer plaster is dry.
C. Avoid conditions that result in gypsum veneer plaster drying too rapidly.
1 . Maintain relative humidity levels, for prevailing ambient temperature, that
produce normal drying conditions.
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 - 2 ,�
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 092613 - GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Gypsum veneer plaster and gypsum base for veneer plaster.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood framing and furring.
2. Division 07 Section 'Thermal Insulation" for insulation installed in
gypsum veneer plaster assemblies.
3. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-load-bearing
steel framing and other components of gypsum veneer plaster
assemblies.
4. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for non-load-
"' bearing steel framing, gypsum liner panels, gypsum board, and other
components of shaft-wall assemblies.
1 .3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For the following products:
1 . Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch (300-mm) length for each
trim accessory.
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 092613 - 1
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses „■
Smith College
a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Install tracks (runners) at overhead supports. Extend framing full height to
structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings.
1 . Curved Partitions:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are
tangent to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs
equally along arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at
ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (1 50 mm) o.c.
D. Z-Furring Members:
I . Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section 'Thermal Insulation")
vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches ••
(610 mm) o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring
members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry
attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with
short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-
attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At
interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (300 mm)
from corner and cut insulation to fit.
E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary
not more than 1 /8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent
framing.
END OF SECTION 092216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 4 �,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
t 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation
standards.
1 . Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,
holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to
substrates.
a. Corrosion Resistance: Provide self-tapping coated screws for
fastening metal to metal in high humidity environments.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with installer present for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
?" 1 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
T corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and
spacing indicated.
1 Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with 'requirements in
ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation.
B. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar
metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
w
1 . Space studs as follows:
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 3
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses .�
Smith College
1 .3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that
incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing *�
agency.
no
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1 . Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for
metal, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip
galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1 . Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm).
2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm). �.
B. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1 -1 /4 inches
(31 .8 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare-
metal thickness of 6.0 179 Inca, (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation
thickness indicated. ,
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
� Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PP PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the
following applications:
1 . Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for, framed soffits, furring, etc.).
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior
load-bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof
rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses.
2. Division 07 Section 'Thermal Insulation" for insulation installed with Z-
shaped furring members.
3. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive joint Systems" for head-of-wall joint
systems installed with non-load-bearing steel framing.
4. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Plastering" for metal lath supported by non-
load-bearing steel framing.
5. Division 09 Section "Portland Cement Plastering" for metal lath supported
by non-load-bearing steel framing.
6. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for non-load-
bearing metal shaft-wall framing, gypsum panels, and other components
of shaft-wall assemblies.
P
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1
w
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct
sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction
period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1 . Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not
limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to,
fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 0921 16.23 *
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 - 6 ,,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
E. Shaft-Side Finish: As indicated by fire-resistance-rated assembly design
designation.
F. Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies attach or
abut, with Installer present. Examine for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture
damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with
requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's
written installation instructions, and the following:
1 . ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing
spacing indicated.
2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plastering" for applying and finishing
panels.
B. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall
assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of
penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices,
elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.
C. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary
not more than 1 /8 inch (3mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent
framing.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 0921 16.23 - 5
ow
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses we
Smith College
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product
standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. ..
B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and
shapes specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plastering" that
comply with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written
recommendations for application indicated.
C. Gypsum Base joint-Reinforcing Materials: As specified in Division 09 Section
"Gypsum Veneer Plastering."
D. Gypsum Veneer Plaster: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Veneer
Plastering."
E. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to
withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without
exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates
in which anchors are embedded.
2.6 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES
A. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated. .�
B. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end
members, and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. •
1 . Depth: 2-1 /2 inches (64 mm).
2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0220 inch (0.55 mm).
C. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard j-profile track with long-leg length as w.
standard with manufacturer, but at least 2 inches (51 mm) long and in depth
matching studs.
1 . Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs.
D. Room-Side Finish:
1 . Fire tape gypsum board at walls furred for shower enclosures.
2. Gypsum Veneer Plaster over base layer at finished walls.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 - 4
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3. National Gypsum Company.
4. USG Corporation.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL
A. Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-
resistance-rated assemblies indicated.
1 . Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize
end-to-end butt joints.
2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall
assembly manufacturer's written recommendations.
2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Gypsum Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 442/C 442M.
1 . Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture-resistant
paper faces.
a. Core: 1 inch (25.4 mm) thick.
b. Long Edges: Double bevel.
B. Gypsum Board: 5/8" Type-X
2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
A. Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
B. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal,
unless otherwise indicated.
1 . Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip
• galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 - 3
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses +�*
Smith College
3. Mechanical work enclosed within shaft-wall assemblies.
1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand
name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against
damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion,
construction traffic, and other causes.
C. Stack panels flat on leveled supports off floor or slab to prevent sagging.
1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or with •
gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more
stringent.
B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and
conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not
limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to,
fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. American Gypsum Company.
2. G-P Gypsum.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 0921 16.23 - 2
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 092116.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies for the following:
1 . Shaft-wall enclosures.
2. Chase enclosures.
3. Horizontal enclosures.
1 .3 SUBMITTALS
F A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated.
1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide materials and construction identical to those
of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined according to ASTM E 119
by a testing and inspecting agency.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
Review methods and procedures for installing gypsum board shaft-wall
assemblies including, but not limited to, the following:
1 . Fasteners proposed for anchoring nonstructural steel framing to building
structure.
2. Items supported by shaft-wall-assembly framing.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 092116.23 - 1
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
Heading 4 (Door B01)
1 DL 4011 Deadlock +
1 Ives 410 cast aluminum pull
1 %z pr 6"T -strap Hinges
END OF SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 14
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door
hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
3.6 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
Heading 1 (Tub Rooms)
ML2230 lockset
1 Yz pr FBB 191 butts
1 Ives 447/448 stop
(Towel bar specified in Div. 10)
Heading 2 (Toilet Rooms)
1 Hager 4x16 push plate
1 Hager Type 4 x 12" pull
1 Yz pr FBB 199 butts
1 4010 Closer
1 Ives 449 stop w/ holder
Heading 3 (Door 402)
i ML2251 lockset
1 Y2 pr FBB 179 butts
1 4010 Closer
1 Ives 447/448 stop
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 13
an
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-
mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1 . Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce .,►
attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage
fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
C. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of
sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants."
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware
and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace
units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control
devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment
and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
1 . Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having
jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70
degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches
(75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.
B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial
Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and
readjust, including adjusting operating forces, each item of door hardware as
necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door
hardware.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12 .s.
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly
construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of
wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series.
1 . Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames
according to ANSI A250.6.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI Al 15-W Series.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows
unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1 . Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for
Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware
onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way,
coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units
OR DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide
Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door
hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
1 . Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when
door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed
fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or
nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely
attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow
door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.
2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications:
a. Mortise hinges to doors.
b. Strike plates to frames.
C. Closers to doors and frames.
3. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2,
"Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors."
2.11 FINISHES
A. Standard: BHMA Al 56.18, as indicated in door hardware sets. **+
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent
pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved
Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within
the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10 ..
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
a. Hager Companies (HAG).
b. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).
C. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).
* d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).
2.9 STOPS AND HOLDERS
3;
A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A] 56.16.
1 . Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are
scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede
traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead
holders.
B. Available Manufacturers:
1 . Hager Companies (HAG).
2. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA).
3. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(IVS).
4. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).
" 2.10 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's
name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with
required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect.
1 . Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by
forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy,
composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or
greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA Al 56.18. Do not
furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from
specified standard.
C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published
templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws.
Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses �.
Smith College
2.7 CLOSERS
A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other
operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements,
comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance
Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."
1 . Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied
perpendicular to door.
b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101 . Door closers
shall not require more than 30 lbf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more
than 1 S luf (67 N) to open door to minimum required width.
C. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated. Provide
type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door,
unless otherwise indicated.
1 . Manufacturers:
a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN).
2.8 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
A. Size: 1 -1 /2 inches (38 mm) less than door width on push side and 112 inch
(13 mm) less than door width on pull side, by height specified in door
hardware sets.
B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screws.
C. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated
from the following material:
1 . Material: 0.050-inch- (1 .3-mm-) thick bronze.
2. Manufacturers:
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as
recommended by manufacturer.
3. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood
casing trim.
2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS
A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA Al 56.5, Grade 1 unless Grade 1 A is indicated.
B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or
bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:
1 . Number of Pins: Seven.
C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset;
complying with the following:
1 . Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; for use
only with core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware.
D. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.
2.6 KEYING
A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in
BHMA A] 56.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying
conference, and as follows:
1 . Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's
existing system.
2. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control
number and include the following notation:
a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner.
3. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the
following:
a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7
we
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses me
Smith College
C. Available Manufacturers:
1 . Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).
2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL
A. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility
requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers
Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility
Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."
1 . Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or „
twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 IV
(22 N).
B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101 . Latches
shall not require more than 15 Ibf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not
require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
C. Lock Trim: ON
1 . Levers:
a. Newport NSA, except NSM where indicated
2. Lockset Designs: Provide design indicated on Drawings or, if sets are
provided by another manufacturer, provide designs that match those
designated.
D. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for
labeled fire doors, and as follows:
1 . Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) latchbolt throw.
2. Deadbolts: Minimum 1 -inch (25-mm) bolt throw.
E. Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
F. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or
lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door
hardware set, and as follows:
1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA Al 56.13.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 ,�,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2.2 HINGES, GENERAL
¢ A. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1 . Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches (1524 mm).
2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches (1549 to 2286
mm).
B. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely
(both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced
units.
C. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1 . Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges.
2. Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges.
D. Hinge Options: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings:
1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when
tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door
is closed; for outswinging exterior doors and outswinging corridor doors
with locks.
2. Corners: Square.
E. Fasteners: Comply with the following:
1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and
tapped holes.
2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames.
3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors.
4. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for
metal doors wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads
to match surface of hinges.
2.3 HINGES
A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA Al 56.1 .
B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA Al 56.7.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5
..
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
B. Existing Openings: Where new hardware components are scheduled for
application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door
hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate
installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide for
proper operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in
this Section and door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule and
door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
1 . Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color
indicated, and named manufacturers' products.
2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function,
sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems °
indicated.
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other
distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door
Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware
designations, as follows:
1 . Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation
are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of
establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are
abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.
2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these
standards and requirements for description, quality, and function.
C. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection:
1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by the manufacturers specified.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4 �..
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a
single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to
NFPA 252.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
Review methods and procedures related to electrified door hardware including,
but not limited to, the following:
1 . Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of
materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make
progress and avoid delays.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door
hardware delivered to Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final
door hardware sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and
necessary fasteners with each item or package.
C. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight
package service.
1. Owner's Representative: Don Saltmarsh.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other
work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check
Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for
locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
„ DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same
OP
door numbers as in the Contract Documents.
b. Content: Include the following information:
1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material
of each door and frame.
2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door
hardware item.
3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or
opening including name and manufacturer.
4) Fastenings and other pertinent information.
5) Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to
Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in
schedule.
7) Door and frame sizes and materials.
C. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest
possible date, particularly where approval of the door hardware sets
must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in Project
construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop ,
Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other
information essential to the coordinated review of the door
hardware sets. ""
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock
manufacturer.
1 . Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware
and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available
during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and
Owner about door hardware and keying.
2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying
schedules.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 „�,
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1 . Commercial door hardware for the following:
a. Swinging doors.
2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for door silencers
provided as part of hollow-metal frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Other Action Submittals:
i . Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of
Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of
door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final
" door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to ensure
proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses •*
Smith College
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or
impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support,
and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction.
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for
weathertight construction.
D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories
for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and
weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging
protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials,
dirt, and other substances. *�
C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance.
Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or
damaged during construction period.
E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting
from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent
to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for
presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If
contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants
immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION 085200
WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 12 ,,...
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
F. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other
work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only
as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and
fitting at Project site.
40 2.9 WOOD FINISHES
A. Factory-Primed Interiors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-prime coat
complying with WDMA T.M. 11 on exposed wood surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions,
with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough
opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.
Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other
built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window
installation.
1 . Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other
construction debris.
2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and
without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with
surfaces in opening and within 3 inches (76 mm) of opening.
3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and
welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions
for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.
WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 11
AW
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Simulated Divided Lites (SDL): Provide permanent dividers in designs indicated
for each sash lite, with dividers on both exterior and interior with glazing bar
located between glazing lites in the airspace.
1. Material: Match exterior and interior frame materials. °
2. Design: Match existing.
B. Frame expanders:
1. Material: Match exterior of window.
2. Design: Match existing head,jamb and sill profiles.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate wood windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for
assembling components and anchoring windows.
B. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable
sash and ventilator, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Double-Hung Windows: Provide weather stripping only at horizontal rails
of operable sash.
C. Factory machine windows for openings and for hardware that is not surface
applied.
D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units,
complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window
units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units
due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide
mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window
units.
E. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze wood windows in the factory where
practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in
AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS.
WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 10 �„�
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
D. Four- or Six-Bar Friction Hinges: Comply with AAMA 904.
1. Locking mechanism and handles for manual operation.
2. Friction Shoes: Provide friction shoes of nylon or other nonabrasive,
nonstaining, noncorrosive, durable material.
2.6 INSECT SCREENS
A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-
fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and
latches. Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Locate
screens on inside or outside of window depending on operation and provide
for each operable exterior sash or ventilator.
1. Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens: Comply with SMA 1004,
"Specifications for Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens for Windows,"
Architectural C-24 class.
B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy
complying with SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or
corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor
concealing edge of frame.
1 . Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from
aluminum sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class
indicated.
2. Finish: Baked-on organic coating in manufacturer's standard color.
C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 (1 .1 -by-1 .4-mm) or 18-by-16 (1 .0-by-
1 .1 -mm) mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a
fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and
weather deterioration; in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656.
1 . Mesh Color: Charcoal gray.
WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 9
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1. Test Pressure: 15 percent of positive design pressure, but not less than
2.816 Ibf/sq. ft. (140 Pa) or more than 1 5 Ibf;sg. ft. (720 Pa).
G. Operating Force and Auxiliary (Durability) Tests: Comply with
AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS for operating window types indicated.
2.4 GLAZING
A. Glass and Glazing Materials:
B. Glass: Insulating-glass units, argon gas filled, with low-E coating pyrolytic on
second surface or sputtered on second or third surface.
1. Special Glazing: Provide units with 'white" translucent glass to Owner's
standards.
C. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that
produces weathertight seal.
2.5 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum,
stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-
resistant material compatible with wood and aluminum cladding; designed to
smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock wood windows, and sized to
accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum
in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide extruded, cast, ,.
or wrought aluminum.
B. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Comply with AAMA 902.
1. Sash-Balance Type: Concealed type, of size and capacity to hold sash
stationary at any open position.
C. Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Comply with AAMA 901 when tested according
to ASTM E 405, Method A.
1. Operation Function: All ventilators move simultaneously and securely
close at both jambs without using additional manually controlled locking
devices.
WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 8
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
I. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool,
polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply
with AAMA 701 /702.
1 . Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins
of semirigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material.
Comply with AAMA 701 /702.
J. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701 /702.
2.3 WINDOWS
A. Window Type: As indicated on Drawings.
B. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide wood windows of
performance indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS unless
more stringent performance requirements are indicated.
1 . Performance Class and Grade: HC 30.
C. Thermal Transmittance: Provide wood windows with a whole-window, U-
factor maximum indicated at 15-mph (24-km/h) exterior wind velocity and
winter condition temperatures when tested according to AAMA 1503.
1 . U-Factor: 0.35 Rtu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.0 W/sq. m x K) or less.
D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide wood windows with a whole-
„ window SHGC maximum of 0.30, determined according to NFRC 200
procedures.
E. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according
to AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS, Air Infiltration Test.
1 . Maximum Rate: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (5 cu. m/h x sq. m) of area at an inward
test pressure of 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
F. Water Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/WDMA referenced test
methods at a water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested
according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Water Resistance Test.
WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 7
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
a. Color: White.
4. Baked-Enamel Finish for Coil: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel
complying with AAMA 620 and paint manufacturer's written
specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.
a. Color: White.
C. Wood Trim and Glazing Stops: Material and finish to match frame members.
D. Clad Trim and Glazing Stops: Hollow extrusions and finish to match clad
frame members.
E. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other
materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with
wood window members, cladding, trim, hardware, anchors, and other
components.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not
use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that
match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate.
F. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or
zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service
conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
G. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, or nonmagnetic stainless steel, or
nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe
service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for
SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design
pressure indicated.
H. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping
designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action and
for complete concealment when wood window is closed.
1. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and
materials complying with AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS.
WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 6
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
P" Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
C. Metal Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows:
a. EAGLE Window & Door, Inc.; an American Architectural Products
Corporation Company.
b. Marvin Windows and Doors.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine or another suitable fine-grained lumber; kiln
dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of
visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger
than 1 /32 inch (0.8 mm) deep by 2 inches (51 mm) wide; water-repellent
preservative treated.
B. Aluminum Extrusions for Cladding: Manufacturer's standard extruded-
aluminum cladding, mechanically bonded to exterior exposed wood members.
Provide aluminum alloy and temper recommended by wood window
manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required
finish, but not less than 22,000-psi (1 50-MPa) ultimate tensile strength, and
not less than 16,000-psi (1 10-MPa) minimum yield strength.
1 . General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural
and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating
finishes.
lip 2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by
the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
3. Baked-Enamel Finish for Extrusions and Sheet: Manufacturer's standard
baked enamel complying with AAMA 2603 and paint manufacturer's
written specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.
WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 5
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses .,
Smith College
F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass
manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify wood window openings by field measurements
before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. „
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made
without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed
with fabricating wood windows without field measurements. Coordinate
wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to
established dimensions.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees *•
to repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1 . Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure to meet performance requirements.
b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air
infiltration, or condensation.
C. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
d. Deterioration of wood, metals, vinyl, other materials, and finishes ,
beyond normal weathering.
e. Failure of insulating glass.
2. Warranty Period:
a. Window: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Glazing: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 4 ..,
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
E. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash operating hardware weather
stripping and finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to wood window manufacturer
for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating wood
windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of
documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports,
and calculations.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain wood windows through one source from a single
manufacturer.
D. Product Options: Existing conditions establish requirements for wood
windows' aesthetic effects. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions,
arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.
Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria in the specifications and
are subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction
testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
1 . Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect,
except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit
comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
E. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS, "North
American Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for
Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors," for definitions and minimum standards
of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless
more stringent requirements are indicated.
1 . Provide WDMA-certified wood windows with an attached label.
WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 3
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses ..�
Smith College
1 .4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide wood windows capable of complying with performance
requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are
representative of those specified, and that are of test size indicated below:
1 . Size required by AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS for gateway performance
for both gateway performance and optional performance grade.
B. Structural Performance: Provide wood windows capable of withstanding the
effects of the following loads based on testing units representative of those
indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load
Structural Test:
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication
methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware,
finishes, and operating instructions for each type of wood window indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware,
attachments to other work, operational clearances, installation details, and the
following:
1 . Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners.
2. joinery details.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Extrusions designed to match existing trim profiles.
5. Interior trim modifications necessary for window replacement. ,
6. Installation details for new windows.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
1 . Include similar Samples of hardware and accessories involving color
selection.
D. Product Schedule: For wood windows. Use same designations indicated on .,
Drawings.
WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 2 .�,
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 085200 - WOOD WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes operable wood-framed windows of the following type:
1. Aluminum clad.
1 .3 DEFINITIONS
A. Performance class designations according to AAMA/WDMA 101 /i.S.2/NAFS:
1. AW: Architectural.
2. HC: Heavy Commercial.
3. C: Commercial.
4. LC: Light Commercial.
5. R: Residential.
B. Performance grade number according to AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS:
1 . Design pressure number in pounds force per square foot (pascals) used
to determine the structural test pressure and water test pressure.
C. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150
percent of the design pressure.
D. Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway
test size). Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger
than minimum test size to comply with requirements for performance class.
WOOD WINDOWS 085200 - 1
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with
requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with
requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 081433
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 8 ,,,,,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fire-rated wood door frames level, plumb, true, and aligned with
adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1 . Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand smooth.
B. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
C. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to
NFPA 80.
D. job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and
bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by
manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware.
Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
1 . Clearances: Provide 1 /8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between
pairs of doors. Provide 1 /8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of
decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold or saddle is
- indicated, provide 1 /4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of
threshold.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1 /8 inch in 2 inches (3-1 /2 degrees) at lock
and hinge edges.
3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1 /8 inch in 2 inches (3-1 /2 degrees) on lock edge;
trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.
E. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
F. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or
machining is required at Project site.
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 7
..
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
E. Shop Glazed Openings: Trim openings indicated for glazing with solid wood
moldings, with one side removable.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard's requirements for factory
finishing. Finish faces and edges of doors, including mortises and cutouts.
B. Finish wood doors at factory.
C. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, finish
system, staining effect, and sheen.
1 . Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish with performance requirements
comparable to AWI System TR-4 conversion varnish.
3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Effect: Open-grain finish.
5. Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and substrates, with Installer present, for suitable conditions
where wood stile and rail doors will be installed.
1 . Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type,
size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with
plumb jambs and level heads.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 6 .,.
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
C. Interior Fire-Rated Doors (20-Minute Rating): Fire-rated doors with 1 -3/4-
inch- (44-mm-) thick stiles and rails and veneered flat panels not less than
5/8 inch (16 mm) thick, complying with requirements indicated for interior
doors.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.
- B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following
uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated:
1 . Clearances: Provide 1 /8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between
pairs of doors. Provide 112 inch 0 3 mm) from bottom of door to top of
decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or
scheduled, provide 3/8 inch (10 mm) from bottom of door to top of
threshold.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1 /8 inch in 2 inches (3-1 /2 degrees) at lock
and hinge edges.
3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1 /8 inch in 2 inches (3-1 /2 degrees) on lock edge;
trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.
C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate
hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules,
door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A] 15-W Series standards, and hardware
templates.
1 . Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify
!"! dimensions and alignment before factory machining.
D. Glazed Openings: Glaze doors at factory with glass of type and thickness
indicated. Install glass using manufacturer's standard elastomeric glazing
sealant complying with ASTM C 920. Secure glass in place with removable
wood stops.
, „ STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 5
..
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses 00
Smith College
B. Low-Emitting Materials:
1 . Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do
not contain urea-formaldehyde resins.
C. Panel Products: Any of the following:
1. Particleboard made from wood particles, with binder containing no urea-
formaldehyde resin, complying with ANSI A208.1 , Grade M-2.
2. Medium-density fiberboard made from wood fiber, with binder
containing no urea-formaldehyde resin, complying with ANSI A208.2,
Grade MD.
3. Veneer core plywood, made with adhesive containing no urea-
formaldehyde resin.
2.3 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OF STOCK DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Manufacturers:
1 . Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division.
2. JELD-WEN, Inc.
3. Simpson Door Company.
4. Woodharbor Door Company.
B. Interior Doors:
1 . Grade for Transparent Finish: Premium or Select.
2. Wood Species for Transparent Finish: Match existing species.
3. Flat-Panel Thickness: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than that
required by WDMA I.S.6 for design group indicated. .,
4. Glass for Openings: Uncoated, white transluscent, fully tempered float
glass, 5.0 mm thick complying with "Safety Glazing" provisions for
hazardous locations and impact loading requirements of the
Massachusetts State Building Code.
5. Interior Door Types:
a. Interior French Doors: Single full height glazing panel.
b. Interior Panel Doors: Two panel design to match existing doors,
except first floor.
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 4
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is
enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the
remainder of the construction period.
1 .7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer,
Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, and have warped (bow,
cup, or twist) more than 1 /4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-
"' 2134-mm) section.
1 . Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date
of Substantial Completion:
. a. Interior Doors: Five years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection:
1 . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
products specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the manufacturers specified.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced quality standards
unless more stringent requirements are specified.
1 . Assemble interior doors, including components, with either dry-use or
wet-use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and
ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints.
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 3
ON
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1 .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain stile and rail wood doors through one source from
a single manufacturer.
B. Quality Standard for Doors of Stock Design and Construction: Comply with
WDMA I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors," unless more
stringent requirements are specified.
1 . Mark, label, or otherwise identify stile and rail wood doors as complying
with WDMA I.S.6, and include panel design number if applicable.
2. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for
Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades
specified.
C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to
NFPA 252.
D. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in
16 CFR 1201 , for Category II materials, unless those of Category I are
expressly indicated and permitted.
1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Package doors individually in opaque plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
C. Mark each door on top and bottom edge with opening number used on Shop
Drawings.
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 2 .,
up
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson &Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 081433 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
! " 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior stile and rail wood doors.
2. Interior fire-rated stile and rail wood doors.
3. Factory finishing stile and rail wood doors.
4. Contractors Option:
a. Factory fitting stile and rail wood doors to frames and factory
machining for hardware.
1 .3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of construction and
glazing.
1 . Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of
each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including
those for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings (sticking); and other pertinent data.
1 . Indicate dimensions.
2. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
3. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.
1. Provide samples on species of wood specified.
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433 - 1
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
C. Twist: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch (1 .6 mm), measured at opposite
face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane
of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch (1 .6 mm), measured at jambs
at floor.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately
before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating
condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work ■*
that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Prime-Coat Touchup: immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or
damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying,
rust-inhibitive primer. **
END OF SECTION 081113 + +
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 8
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely
fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated.
Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11 .
1 . Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely
until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete,
remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to
NFPA 80.
b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or
handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding
face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth,
flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
C. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after
frames have been properly set and secured.
d. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are
constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation
tolerances.
2. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind
+, frames.
3. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with
postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb.
Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on
exposed faces.
4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch (1 .6 mm), measured at door
rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch (1 .6 mm), measured at jambs
on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 7
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1 . Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-
free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria;
recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with
substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed
finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for
squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:
1 . Squareness: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch (1 .6 mm), measured at door rabbet
on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch (1 .6 mm), measured at jambs on a .�
horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
3. Twist: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch (1 .6 mm), measured at opposite face
corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1 /16 inch (1 .6 mm), measured at jambs on a
perpendicular line from head to floor.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and
make smooth, flush, and invisible.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for
exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
3. jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286
mm) high.
b. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6
' inches (152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not
more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c.
4. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive
door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door
silencers.
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement
from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated
mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and
tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as
specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
1 . Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to
ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-
mounted door hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and
ANSI/DHI Al 15 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work
for hardware.
2.5 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning
and pretreating.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5
.A
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses ..�
Smith College
C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591 /A 591 M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G)
coating designation; mill phosphatized.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to
12-lb/cu. ft. (96- to 192-kg/cu. m) density; with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136
for combustion characteristics.
2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and
profile.
B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.042-inch- (1 .0-mm-) thick steel sheet.
C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with
reinforcement plates from same material as frames.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle.
Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for
thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's
plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that
cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping '
or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint,
fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner
that traps excess humidity.
1 . Provide minimum 1 /4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to
permit air circulation.
1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
* A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field
measurements before fabrication.
1 .8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting
drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including
sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors.
Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Amweld Building Products, LLC.
2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation.
3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
5. Pioneer Industries, Inc.
6. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
7. Windsor Republic Doors.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B; suitable for exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011 /A 1011 M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3
.w
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and
metal thicknesses.
2. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
3. Details of each different wall opening condition.
4. Details of anchorages,joints, field splices, and connections.
C. Other Action Submittals:
1 . Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under
the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and
openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware
schedule.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed
by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame
assembly.
1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings ••
indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252.
1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection
during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-
finished units.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of
frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five
units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2 ,,,,,
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
!" SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1 . Standard hollow metal frames.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal
doors.
2. Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal
doors and frames.
1 .3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness_of base metal without coatings.
B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to
ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1 .4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,
material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses .,
Smith College
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
C. Clean off excess sealants.
D. Replace sheet metal roofing components that have been damaged or have
deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair
procedures.
END OF SECTION 076100
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 12
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
mm), except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in
completed Work.
1. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and
flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and
spatter from exposed surfaces.
2. Copper Roofing: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets, using solder for
copper.
D. Flat-Seam Roofing: Attach flat-seam metal panels to substrate with cleats,
starting at eave and working upward toward ridge. After panels are in place,
mallet seams and solder.
3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and
weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate
installation with flashings and other components.
1 . Install components required for a complete sheet metal roofing assembly
including trim, copings, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers,
metal closures, closure strips, and similar items.
B. Louvers: Install fabricated louvers in openings designed to shed water and
allow for removal of louver for maintenance. Provide removable stops on
interior of opening at perimeter of opening attached with stainless steel
gasketed hex-screws.
3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal roofing within installed
tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal
Roofing."
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform
oxidation and weathering.
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 11
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses ,
Smith College
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work
and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and
anchors as required for a tight installation.
F. Fasciae: Align bottom of sheet metal roofing and fasten with blind rivets,
bolts, or self-tapping screws. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with closure
strips where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of
all openings.
3.4 CUSTOM-FABRICATED SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate and install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and
accurate. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and
avoidable tool marks, considering temper and reflectivity of metal. Provide
uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
Fold back sheet metal to form a hem on concealed side of exposed edges
unless otherwise indicated.
1 . Install cleats to hold sheet metal panels in position. Attach each cleat
with two fasteners to prevent rotation.
2. Fasten cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. Bend tabs over
fastener head.
3. Provide expansion-type cleats and clips for roof panels that exceed 30
feet (9.1 m) in length.
B. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. For roofing
with 3:12 slopes or less, use cleats at transverse seams.
1 . Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint
members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to
completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of
installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set
joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting
proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not
install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg Q.
C. Soldered joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign
matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1 --1 /12) inches (38
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 10 •
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2. Around dormers, chimneys, skylights, and other penetrating elements for
a distance from element of 24 inches (600 mm).
B. Apply slip sheet before installing sheet metal roofing.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal roofing and other components of the Work
securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Install
fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and
other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofing system and as
recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofing.
1 . Field cutting of sheet metal roofing by torch is not permitted.
2. Provide metal closures at peaks rake edges rake walls eaves and each
side of ridge and hip caps.
3. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with closure strips at eaves, rakes, and
perimeter of all openings.
4. Install sealant tape where indicated.
5. Lap metal flashing over sheet metal roofing to allow moisture to run over
and off the material.
6. Install step and base flashings concurrent with replacing existing slate.
B. Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at only one
location for each panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal
expansion and contraction.
1. Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will
inhibit thermal movement.
C. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less
than 1 -1 /4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for
wood screws.
D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive
substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating, by applying self-adhering sheet underlayment to each
contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by
SMACNA.
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 9
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses ■*
Smith College
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported `
by framing or blocking, that tops of fasteners are flush with surface, and
that installation is within flatness tolerances required for finished roofing
installation.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage,
and completely anchored, and that provision has been made for drainage,
flashings, and penetrations through sheet metal roofing.
B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions
detrimental to performance of the Work.
C. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating sheet metal
roofing to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of
sheet metal roofing before installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been ■*
corrected.
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment,
wrinkle free, on roof sheathing under sheet metal roofing. Apply primer if
required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions
of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for
installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply over entire roof, in shingle
fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm)
staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less
than 3-1 /2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within
14 days.
1 . Roof to wall intersections for a distance from wall of 24 inches (600 mm).
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 8 «►
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
E. Sealant joints: Where movable, nonex pans ion-type joints are indicated or
required to produce weathertight seams, form metal to provide for proper
installation of elastomeric sealant in compliance with SMACNA standards.
F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect
against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating,
by applying self-adhering sheet underlayment to each contact surface, or by
other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator of sheet metal
roofing or manufacturers of the metals in contact.
G. Sheet Metal Accessories: Custom fabricate flashings and trim to comply with
recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply
to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
1 . Form exposed sheet metal accessories without excessive oil canning,
' buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with
exposed edges folded back to form hems.
2. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to
be seamed, form seams, and solder.
3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed
fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
4. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less
than thickness of metal being secured.
5. Louvers: Fabricate blades to shed water and wind driven rain. Provide
formed reinforcement mullions concealed from exterior for blades
exceeding 24 inches (600mm0 in length.
a. Frames: Fabricate frames to receive blades and allow for positive
drainage.
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 7
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2. Backing Plates: Plates at roofing splices, fabricated from material
recommended by SMACNA.
3. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material and with same finish as
sheet metal roofing, minimum thickness matching the sheet metal
roofing.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal roofing to comply with details shown
and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that
apply to the design, dimensions (panel width and seam height), geometry,
metal thickness, and other characteristics of installation indicated. Fabricate
sheet metal roofing and accessories at the shop to greatest extent possible.
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal roofing that is capable of
installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential
Metal Roofing."
C. Form exposed sheet metal work to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks; true to line and levels indicated; and with exposed
edges folded back to form hems.
1 . Lay out sheet metal roofing so transverse seams, if required, are made in
direction of flow with higher panels overlapping lower panels.
2. Offset transverse seams from each other 12 inches (300 mm) minimum.
3. Fold and cleat eaves and transverse seams in the shop. .�
4. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge
treatments, integral flashings, and other components of metal roofing to
profiles, patterns, and drainage arrangements shown on Drawings and as
required for leakproof construction.
D. Expansion Provisions: Fabricate sheet metal roofing to allow for expansion in
running work sufficient to prevent leakage, damage, and deterioration of the
Work. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion
joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep,
filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 6
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1 . General:
a. Exposed Fasteners: Match sheet metal roofing.
b. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling
screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
C. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets
suitable for metal being fastened.
2. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze, or Series 300
stainless steel.
D. Solder:
1 . For Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead.
E. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene
compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently
elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1 /2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1 /8
inch (3 mm) thick.
F. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polysulfide polymer sealant; low
modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in
sheet metal roofing and remain watertight.
G. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber
sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion
joints with limited movement.
H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with
ASTM D 1 187.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide components required for a complete sheet
metal roofing assembly including trim„ corner units, clips, flashings, sealants,
gaskets, fillers, metal closures, closure strips, and similar items. Match
material and finish of sheet metal roofing unless otherwise indicated.
1 . Cleats: For mechanically seaming into joints and formed from the
following materials:
a. Copper Roofing: l b--oz.,'s;. ft. (0.55-mm) copper sheet.
, , SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 5
«0
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1 .0
mm) thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated �*
to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing;
cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment
manufacturer.
1 . Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (1 16 ..
deg Q.
2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus
20 deg F (29 deg Q.
3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
following:
a. Carlisle Coatings &Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT.
b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra.
C. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT.
d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield.
e. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High-Temperature
Underlayment.
B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin
sized.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods,
protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as
required for a complete roofing system and as recommended by primary sheet
metal manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. ,
B. Wood Framing and panels: Lumber complying with requirements in
Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" and treated with exterior-type fire
retardant.
C. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular-threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-
locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand
design loads.
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 4 �*
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
B. Installer: Roofing contractor experienced in metal and slate roofing
applications for single responsibility for entire installation.
C. Sheet Metal Roofing Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on
Drawings.
04
D. Copper Roofing Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture
Handbook." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
E. Pre-Installation Conference:
1 . Review flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect
sheet metal roofing.
2. Review temporary protection requirements for sheet metal roofing during
and after roofing installation.
3. Review roof observation and repair procedures after sheet metal roofing
installation.
1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal roofing materials in contact with other materials that
might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal
roofing materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOFING SHEET METALS
A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 temper, 20 oz./sq.
ft. (0.70 mm thick) unless otherwise indicated.
1 . Louver Blades: 16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick).
a. Fabricator:
1) Vulcan Supply Corp.; Westford, VT.
2. Non-Patinated Exposed Finish: Mill
„� SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 3
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses �*
Smith College
1 .4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and •
finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal
roofing, including plans, elevations, expansion joint locations, and keyed
details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the
following:
1. Details for forming sheet metal roofing, including seams and dimensions.
2. Details for joining and securing sheet metal roofing, including layout of
fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. ,
3. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
4. Details of expansion joints, including showing direction of expansion and
contraction.
5. Details of roof penetrations.
6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, rakes, crickets, and +*�
counterflashings.
7. Details of special conditions.
8. Details of connections to adjoining work.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared
on Samples of size indicated below:
1 . Sheet Metal Roofing: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual width of unit, "
including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, and
other attachments.
2. Louver Blades and Metal Closures: 12 inches (300 mm) long and in
required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Custom-Fabricated Sheet Metal Roofing Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that
employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal roofing similar to
that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful
in-service performance.
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 2 •
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 076100 - SHEET METAL ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
!" 1. Flat-seam metal roofing, custom fabricated dormers.
2. Louvers installed as part of metal roofing fabrications.
1 .3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Sheet metal roofing system including, but not limited to,
metal roof panels, cleats, clips, anchors and fasteners, sheet metal flashing
integral with sheet metal roofing, fascia panels, trim, underlayment, and
accessories shall comply with requirements indicated without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction. Sheet metal roofing shall remain watertight.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal roofing that allows for thermal
movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. Base calculations
on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss.
1 . Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F
(100 deg C), material surfaces.
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 1
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1 . Lap vapor retarder onto foil faced board insulation and seal with tape.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two
wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom �•
edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16
inches (400 mm) o.c.
C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items
penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal
between penetrating objects and vapor retarder.
D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment
by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor
retarder.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful
weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary
coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be
concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.
END OF SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 6 ••
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
s Smith College
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated.
Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove
projections that interfere with placement.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with
manufacturer's written instructions. if no specific method is indicated, bond
units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide
permanent placement and support of units.
B. Set vapor-retarder-faced units concurrent with Z-furring..
1 . Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area
of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
C. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members
according to the following requirements:
1 . Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing
members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide
lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a
friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. For wood-framed construction, install mineral-fiber blankets according
to ASTM C 1320.
D. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity
spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal
maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40
kg;cu. m).
3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from
vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system
as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated
substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
,� THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 5
oft
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses *
Smith College
sq. m), with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm (2.9 ng/Pa x s x
sq. m).
1. Products: No
a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6WW.
b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65.
B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-
retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with +�•
requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified
and for other conditions affecting performance.
1 . Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders,
including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of
interfering with insulation attachment.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to
products and application indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been
left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 4 +..
k Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
4 Smith College
respectively, based on tests performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to 4
inches (101 mm).
1 . Manufacturers:
a. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
b. Dow Chemical Company. .
C. Rmax, Inc.
2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Available Manufacturers:
1 . CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc.
3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Fiber Glass.
5. Owens Corning.
B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without
membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.
C. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses,
provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated:
1 . 3-1 /2 inches (89 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 13 deg F x h x
sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (2.3 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg Q.
2. 5-112 inches (140 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 21 deg F x h x
sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (3.7 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg Q.
2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film
laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or
polyester scrim and weighing not less than 25 lb/1000 sq. ft. (12 kg,'100
t:
„� THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 3
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses •*
Smith College
1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one
source from a single manufacturer.
1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and
protecting during installation. „
B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:
1 . Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating
materials to Project site before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as
possible in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection:
1 . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the '*
products specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the manufacturers specified.
do
2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyan u rate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or IN
2, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450,
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 2
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Concealed building insulation.
2. Vapor Retarders
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 09 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plastering" for sound attenuation
blankets.
2. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation."
3. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
1 .3 DEFINITIONS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool
fibers, or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into
" batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls.
1 .4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed
by a qualified testing agency for insulation products.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1
_ Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate
functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork.
Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-
applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 064023
„� INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 11
.wt
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler,
sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished.
2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight
line than 1 /8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings
and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware
and accessory items as indicated.
1 . Install cabinets with no more than 1 /8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-
mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.
2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not
more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with stainless steel oval head screws
with finish washers. Space fasteners evenly from sides, top and bottom
and center to center. Pre-drill holes for fasteners in shop.
H. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through supports into underside of
countertop. �*
1 . Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to
comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in
color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface
scratches, and clean entire surface. �.
2. Install countertops with no more than 1 /8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in
2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.
3. Secure loose backsplashes to walls with adhesive.
4. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with mildew resistant silicone
sealant.
I. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of
woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.
J. Refer to Division 09 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural .�
woodwork.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 10 *■
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
.. Smith College
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity
OP conditions in installation areas.
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for
completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and
backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade
specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with
requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in
the shop.
C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with
concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1 /8
inch in 96 inches Q mm in 2400 mm).
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair
damaged finish at cuts.
E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to
• substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as
required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws
for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and
matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible,
using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to
greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 96 inches (2400 mm
long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running
joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 9
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses *�
Smith College
D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate
complying with the following requirements:
1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGL. +
2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.
3. Edges: Grade VGS matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.
4. Edges at reveals: PVC T-mold, Black
E. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate,
Grade VGS.
F. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-
pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL.
2.9 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A. Grade: Premium.
B. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 112 inch (13 mm).
C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in
colors of solid-surfacing material complying with the following requirements:
1 . As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
D. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-
surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives,
sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
1 . Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration
indicated.
2. Fabricate tops with shop-applied backsplashes and loose side splashes
for field application.
E. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in shop.
F. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings in shop.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 8
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1 . Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
F. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section
"Decorative Glass Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood
frames, secure glass with removable stops.
2.6 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Grade: Premium.
B. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of
transparent-finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide,
flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
I
D. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in
plant and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull
connections together.
2.7 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Grade: Premium.
B. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of
transparent-finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction.
Do not glue for width.
2.8 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS
A. Grade: Premium.
B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay.
C. Reveal Dimension: 1 /2 inch (13 mm).
�„ INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 7
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade
interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity
during fabrication and in installation areas.
C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges
to radius indicated for the following:
1 . Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4
Inch 0 9 mm) Thick or Less: 1 /16 inch (1 .5 mm).
2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick:
1 /8 inch (3 mm).
3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and
Rails: 1 /16 inch 0 .5 mm).
D. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to
maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble
components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary
for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1 . Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork ..
fabrication will be complete.
2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely ■g
assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other
fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that
various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies
against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before
disassembling for shipment.
E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware,
appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate
openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce
accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove
splinters and burrs.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 6
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with
architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)."
!" B. Butt Hinges: 3-inch (75-mm), 5-knuckle stainless steel hinges made from
0.095-inch- (2.4-mm) thick metal.
C. Catches: Sugatsune stainless steel draw latches
D. Towel Hooks: Sugatsune HT50, stainless steel finish
E. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that
complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
F. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies
with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber,
kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for
secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal anchors and inserts as required
for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for
drilled-in-place anchors.
C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
D. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives
that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1 . Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.
E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: PVA.
„ INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 5
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses *
Smith College
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality
standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless *�
otherwise indicated.
B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Match existing species
C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood.
D. Wood Products: Comply with the following:
1 . Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder
containing no urea formaldehyde.
2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, M-2-Exterior Glue.
E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not
indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-
pressure decorative laminates by one of the following:
a. Formica Corporation.
b. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div.
C. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
F. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin
complying with ISSFA-2.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company.
2. Integral Bowls: 830 sinks
3. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 4
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project
Conditions" Article.
1 .7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is
enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the
remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction,
verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1 . Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support
woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made
without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with
fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for
trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1 .8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements,
and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that
interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS
A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, fabricators offering
interior architectural woodwork that may be incorporated into the Work include
firms listed on the approved Sub-bidder List:
�„ INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 3
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1.4 SUBMITTALS
■
A. Product Data: For high-pressure decorative laminate, solid-surfacing material,
cabinet hardware and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and
elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips,
including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other
Sections.
C. Samples for Initial Selection:
1 . Plastic laminates.
2. PVC edge material.
3. Solid-surfacing materials.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom- •
fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose
products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a
certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification
Program.
C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural
Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork
indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could
damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. if woodwork
must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 2 �,,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior standing and running trim to match existing profiles.
2. Flush wood paneling.
3. Interior ornamental work.
4. Plastic-laminate casework.
5. Solid-surfacing-material countertops, stools and saddles
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims,
and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within
other construction before woodwork installation.
2. Division 06 Section "Finish Carpentry" for interior .carpentry exposed to
view that is not specified in this Section.
1 .3 DEFINITIONS
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and
hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other
OR construction before woodwork installation.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 1
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses ..
Smith College
1 . Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are
not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited
to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 062023 "
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 8 ,�„
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1. Apply a bead of multipurpose construction adhesive to back of shelf
cleats right before installing. Remove adhesive that is squeezed out
immediately after fastening shelf cleats in place.
C. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be
removed and reinstalled. Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and
supports.
D. Install rod flanges for rods as indicated. Fasten to shelf cleats, framing
members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall
anchors. Install rods in rod flanges.
3.6 STAIR AND RAILING INSTALLATION
A. Treads and Risers at Interior Stairs: Secure treads and risers by gluing and
nailing to rough carriages.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with
requirements. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work
complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch
up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
OR 3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during
remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged,
and mold damaged.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 7
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses „
Smith College
2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is
unavoidable.
3. Install to tolerance of 1 /8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level
and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1 /32-inch
(0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1 /16-inch (1 .5-mm)
maximum offset for reveal installation.
4. Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm) variation between
adjacent treads and risers and with no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm)
variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each
flight.
5. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or . �
adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that
penetrate interior finish carpentry.
3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from
maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches
(610 mm) long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related
standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce
tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use
scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform
thickness across joints where necessary for alignment.
1. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.
2. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten
to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on
exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
3.5 SHELVING AND CLOTHES ROD INSTALLATION
A. Cut shelf cleats at ends of shelves about 112 inch (13 mm) less than width of
shelves and sand exposed ends smooth.
B. Install shelf cleats by fastening to framing or backing with finish nails or trim
screws, set below face and filled. Space fasteners not more than 16 inches
(400 mm) o.c.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 6 ,.,,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1 /16-
inch (1 .5-mm) radius and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal
thickness to 1 /8-inch (3-mm) radius.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that
are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average
prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished,
inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing
arrangements.
B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent
materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and
seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 5
..
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2.3 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS
A. Closet Shelving: Made from the following material, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.
1. MDO softwood plywood with solid-wood edge.
B. Shelf Cleats: 3/4-by-3-1 /2-inch (19-by-89-mm) boards, softwood lumber
trim for opaque finish.
C. Clothes Rods: 1 -1 /2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter, clear, kiln-dried hardwood.
D. Rod Flanges: Chrome-plated steel.
2.4 STAIRS AND RAILINGS
A. Treads: 1 -1 /16-inch (27-mm), clear, kiln-dried, edge-glued, yellow pine or
Douglas fir stepping with half-round nosing.
B. Risers: 13/16-inch (21 -mm), clear, kiln-dried, edge-glued poplar stock.
C. Risers: 3/4-inch (19-mm) finish boards as specified above for interior lumber
trim for opaque finish.
D. Finished Stringers: 3/4-inch (19-mm) finish boards as specified above for
interior lumber trim for opaque finish.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring
devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to
provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. 40
B. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by
manufacturer for general carpentry use.
C. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with
ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive
manufacturer.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 4 �,�,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1 .
C. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
D. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea-
formaldehyde resin.
2.2 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish):
1. Species and Grade: White maple; A finish; NHLA.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 13 percent.
3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed.
4. Gluing for Width: Not allowed.
5. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth).
6. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color.
B. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted):
1 . Species and Grade: Alder, aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia,
soft maple, sycamore, tupelo, or yellow poplar; A finish; NHLA.
! " 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent.
3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed.
4. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth).
C. Moldings for Opaque Finish (Painted): Made to patterns included in
WMMPA WM 12.
1. Hardwood Moldings: WMMPA HWM 2, P-grade.
a. Species: Aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft
maple, tupelo, or yellow poplar.
b. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent.
2. Finger Jointing: Not allowed.
3. Base Cap: Copper Beech CB3500, 1 1 /16-by-1 1 /4-inch (17-by-30-
mm)I.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 3
Am
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses ,.
Smith College
1 .4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.
Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each
bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation within and around
stacks and under temporary coverings.
B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions
meet requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry
materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where
environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas.
1 .5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry
materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is
completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining
temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of
the construction period.
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or
mold damaged.
1 . Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are
not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited
to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies
certified by ALSC's Board of Review.
1 . Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency
indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 2 �„
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
+ ► 1 . Interior standing and running trim.
2. Shelving and clothes rods.
3. Interior stairs.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for priming and backpriming of
interior finish carpentry.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them,
include the following:
1 . NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association.
3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
B. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.
C. MDO Plywood: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 1
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses ..
Smith College
1 . Combination Subfloor-Underlayment:
a. Glue and nail to wood framing.
b. Space panels 1 /8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
2. Wall and Roof Sheathing:
a. Nail to wood framing. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing
members at edges of wall sheathing panels.
b. Space panels 1 ,18 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
END OF SECTION 061600
SHEATHING 061600 - 4 „�
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1 .
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with
APA AFG-01 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated
by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
"? ! 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces
that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint
arrangement.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly
against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the
following:
1. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in BOCA's "BOCA National Building
Code."
D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size
that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to
view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners
without splitting wood.
3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30S,
"Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and
applications indicated.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
SHEATHING 061600 - 3
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less
than thickness indicated.
C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.
2.2 ROOF SHEATHING
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing.
1 . Span Rating: Not less than 32/16.
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/18 inch (1 7 mm).
2.3 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT
A. Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1 ,
Structural I, Underlayment single-floor panels.
1. Span Rating: Not less than 16 o.c.
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch (18.3 mm).
3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove.
. 4. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face.
B. Underlayment, General: Provide underlayment in nominal thicknesses *�
indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1 /4 inch (6.4 mm) over smooth
subfloors and not less than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) over board or uneven subfloors.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with
requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
SHEATHING 061600 - 2 .,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING
± ! PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
OR Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1 . Roof sheathing.
2. Subflooring.
3. Underlayment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 .3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and
application details.
1 .4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to
provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under
coverings.
SHEATHING 061600 - 1
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses «.
Smith College
END OF SECTION 061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 10 „�
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions. Fasten
plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated.
1 . For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal- (38-by-
89-mm actual-) size wood studs spaced 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more
than 96 inches (2438 mm) high, using members of 2-inch nominal (38-
mm actual) thickness and of same width as wall or partitions.
B. Construct corners and intersections to provide support for finishes.
4M C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header
members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb
studs.
1 . For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double jamb studs and headers
not less than 4-inch nominal (89-mm actual) depth for openings 48
inches (1200 mm) and less in width, 6-inch nominal (140-mm actual)
depth for openings 48 to 72 inches (1 200 to 1800 mm) in width, 8-inch
nominal (184-mm actual) depth for openings 72 to 120 inches (1800 to
3000 mm) in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal (235-mm actual)
depth for openings 10 to 12 feet (3 to 3.6 m) in width.
3.5 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers;
double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches (1200
mm).
B. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to one-sixth depth of joist,
one-third at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1 /3 depth of joist; do not
locate closer than 2 inches, (50 mm) from top or bottom.
C. Inspect existing framing for cuts, notches or rot. Sister new framing members
to existing where structural integrity of original member has been
compromised.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 9
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in BOCA's BOCA National Building
Code.
J. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size
that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to
view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between
members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail .R
heads, unless otherwise indicated.
K. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of
members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.
1 . Use finishing nails, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads
and fill holes with wood filler.
3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to
shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work.
Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts
flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with .�
wood as required for tolerance of finish work.
B. Furring to Receive Plywood Paneling: Install 1 -by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-
63-mm actual-) size furring horizontally at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
C. Furring to Receive Veneer Plaster Board: Install 1 -by-2-inch nominal- (19-by-
38-mm actual-) size furring vertically at 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of
2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs,
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 8 ,.
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to
comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1 . In addition to framing new floor openings for chases, provide laminated-
'" veneer lumber as replacement joists in locations where existing joists are
rotted, cut or notched to compromise structural integrity
D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions.
E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing
materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed
+!�! cavities as indicated and as follows:
1 . Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not
more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or
noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.
2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each
floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches
(2438 mm) o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system
used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing
members and 2-inch, nominal- (38-mm actual-) thickness.
H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with
installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials
with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small
to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
I. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening
as indicated, complying with the following:
1 . NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 7
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency.
1 . Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593
and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M,
Grade Al or A4).
2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1 . Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.
2. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
3. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. ..
4. KC Metals Products, Inc.
5. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. ,.
6. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc.
7. USP Structural Connectors.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.
1 . Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated.
C. Rafter Tie-Downs : Bent bracket for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall
studs below. Tie fastens to both sides of rafter or truss and face of top plates
below.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to
line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope
as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar
supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 6
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
E. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or
No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and
selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and
purpose.
F. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and
cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with
attachment of other work.
G. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards
with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1 , C-
D Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch
(19-mm) nominal thickness.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with
requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME 818.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME BI 8.2.1 (ASME 818.2.3.8M).
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F S68M,
Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where
indicated, flat washers.
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated
below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the
load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times
the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 5
..
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2.3 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood
veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and
monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type
adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.
1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
a. Boise Cascade Corporation.
b. Georgia-Pacific.
C. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation.
d. Weyerhaeuser Company.
2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2600 psi (17.9 MPa) for 12-
inch nominal- (286-mm actual-) depth members.
3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 1 ,800,000 psi (12 400 MPa).
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or
attachment of other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking. ,
2. Nailers.
3. Furring.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade
lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species.
C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture
content and the following species and grades:
1 . Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine;
Premium or 2 Common (Sterling) grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
D. For concealed boards, provide Standard grade lumber with 15 percent ,
maximum moisture content of any species.
.R
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 4 „�,
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review.
Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to
inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1 . Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by
DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are
indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or
evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for
Project.
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with
allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or
exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be
determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and
demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified
independent testing agency.
2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)
thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)
thickness.
B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade and the
following species:
" 1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
2. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
3. Northern species; NLGA.
4. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses .,
Smith College
C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) or greater in least
dimension. "
D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them,
include the following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
4. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1 .4 SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum
allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and
design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with
building code in effect for Project:
1. Engineered wood products.
1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of
engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer.
1 .6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no
grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2 �„
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
VF Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Framing with engineered wood products.
3. Wood blocking and nailers.
4. Wood furring.
5. Plywood backing panels.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for documentation
of replacement costs of damaged or rotted floor joists encountered after
demolition of finishes.
2. Division 06 Section "Sheathing."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but
less than 5 inches nominal (1 14 mm actual) in least dimension.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1
.A
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3.5 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS
A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1 -1 /2-inch
(38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
1 . Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.
B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support
structural loads.
C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows:
1. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing
between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing
members.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with
same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for
touching up shop-painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION 055213
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 8 ,,,
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or
fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1 /16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations
from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not
exceed It ,14 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m).
C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting
joints.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners
where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-
place construction.
3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently
connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent
! + damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed
locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.
B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting
railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in
Part 2 "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the
field.
3.4 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as
required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members
as follows:
1 . For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting
surfaces.
B. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets
cast in concrete.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 7
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise
indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall
is 1 /T inch (6 mm) or less.
N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges,
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other
work, unless otherwise indicated.
1 . At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions,
provide fillers made from crush-resistant material, or other means to
transfer wall loads through wall finishes to structural supports and
prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
O. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel tube or pipe ,
whose ID is sized for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without
lateral load, measured at top, to not more than one-fortieth of post height.
Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist being dislodged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive
anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly
marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already
done.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL "®
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established
lines and levels and free of rack.
1 . Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have
been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 6
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
W
E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
!! and similar items.
G. Connections: Fabricate railings with either welded or nonwelded connections,
unless otherwise indicated.
H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or
use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections,
including at fittings.
1 . Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so
no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours
of adjoining surfaces.
I. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical
fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush,
smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
1 . Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural
adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method.
�. Form changes in direction as follows:
1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
K. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce
uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross
section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting,
cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 5
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses •
Smith College
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of
type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring
railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding
design loads. °
C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
1 . Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and .A
for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are
unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for
metal alloy welded.
B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal
modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage and as
follows:
1 . Horizontal rails, cornerposts and intermediates for spans greater than 60
inches (1500mm): 1 1 /4 inch nominal diameter
2. Vertical Balusters: 5/8 inch diameter bars @ 4 1 /2 inches center to
center.
3. Flat vertical base plates: 1 /4 inch thick plate for anchoring to face of
stringers and openings.
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and
handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated .,
installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease
edges to a radius of approximately 1 /32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise
indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. ,
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 4 ...
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls.
Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural
performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material
and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 STEEL AND IRON
A. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight
(Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural
loads.
1 . Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated
or required by structural loads.
2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide the following:
1 . Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 3
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2. Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act
concurrently.
1 .4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1 . AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction
contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1 . Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made
without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with
fabricating railings without field measurements. Coordinate wall and
other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions
correspond to established dimensions.
2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
1 .7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete
inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 2
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1 . Steel pipe railings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring
railings.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated,
determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the
following:
1 . Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of
gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated:
1 . Handrails:
a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act
concurrently.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and
installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and
changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for
miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual
performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each,
ready for continued use and reference.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction
period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications
to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of
Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and
Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for
construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction
purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry,
legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to
Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working
hours.
END OF SECTION 017839
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 5
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
C. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation
"PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1 . Layer assignments: Assign layers for record drawing notations with the
prefix CTR. Add suffix designations for dimensions, notes and categories
of work so modifications can be readily identified from original CAD file.
2. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record
Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover
sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
3. Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate
electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings.
Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each
CAD file.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation
where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and
contract modifications.
1 . Give particular attention to information on concealed products and .,
installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products,
materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product
options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other
information necessary to provide a record of selections made.
4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has
been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of
submitted as Record Product Data.
5. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable.
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation
where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data
submittal.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 4
1P
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
C. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
d. Actual equipment locations.
e. Duct size and routing.
f. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
g. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
h. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable
of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop
Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
4. Mark record plots with colored high-lighter marker or clouded with color
pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different
categories of the Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown
schematically or omitted from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change
Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Record CAD Drawings: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of
Substantial Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Architect. When
authorized, prepare a full set of corrected CAD Drawings of the Contract
Drawings, as follows:
1 . Format: DWG, AutoCad 2004 Version , operating in Microsoft Windows
operating system.
2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on
Record Prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where
applicable.
3. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of CAD Drawings of the Contract
Drawings for use in recording information.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or
completeness of CAD Drawings as they relate to the Contract
Drawings.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 3
I.
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
are acceptable. Architect will return plots and prints for organizing
into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal.
b. Final Submittal: Submit one set of Record CAD Drawing files, one
set(s) of Record CAD Drawing plots, and one copy printed from
record plots. Plot and print each Drawing, whether or not changes
and additional information were recorded.
1) Electronic Media: CD-R.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including
addenda and contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.
1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and
maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in
manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. �•
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the
Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1 . Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where
installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity
who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer,
subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that
would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing
technique. *
C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and
check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 2
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Y ,
± ► 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project
Record Documents, including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout
procedures.
2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and
maintenance manual requirements.
3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for Project
Record Documents of the Work in those Sections.
1 .3 SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1 . Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:
a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set(s) of plots from corrected Record
CAD Drawings and one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints. Architect
will initial and date each plot and mark whether general scope of
changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting
to PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1
dW
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are
not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation
and maintenance of equipment or systems.
F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to
illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and
to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings
with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of
completed installation.
1 . Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and
maintenance manuals.
2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in
Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents."
G. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for
submitting operation and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 017823
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 10 �..
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1 . Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty
claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate
manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information
indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's
operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.
C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data
indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish
incorporated into the Work.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation
and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system,
subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
1 . Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and
prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of
an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed
data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark
each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work.
If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using
appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable
to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 9
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1 . Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including
disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that
detail essential maintenance procedures:
wo
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and
reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication
requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate
schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard
time allotment.
1 . Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly,
monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for
recording maintenance.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and
repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers'
maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and
related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements
with name and telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of
circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 8
F
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
" 4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations
and the following:
1 . Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of
materials and related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of
circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1 . Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty
claims.
2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a
system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance
documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules,
spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and
warranty and bond information, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match
manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and
cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance
documentation including the following information for each component part or
piece of equipment:
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 7
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses «�
Smith College
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions. '
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. ..►
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and
diagram controls as installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where
required for identification.
2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material,
and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance
procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as
described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by
product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each
product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and
maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number
and title in Project Manual. **
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 6
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to
enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic
equipment.
4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1 /2-by-1 1 -inch (215-by-280-mm)
white bond paper.
5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind
with text.
a. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place
' drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual.
At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages
indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing
locations.
2.3 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data
required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1 . System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design
responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1 . Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 5
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance
manuals.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product
name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to
Specification Section number in Project Manual.
1 . If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one
volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents
for all volumes in each volume of the set.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents ,
alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble
instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a
single binder.
1 . Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in ,
thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1 /2-by-
11 -inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to
hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold
folded oversize sheets.
a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a
system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem
and related components. Cross-reference other binders if
necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or
maintenance of equipment or system.
b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title
"OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name,
and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for
multiple-volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each
section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of
products and major components of equipment included in the section on
each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title
of Project Manual. *'
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 4 ,�
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
4. Table of contents.
h"
B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include
references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information
about each system.
C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically
by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in
separate list.
D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation,
and maintenance manual.
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and
maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation
exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of
Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."
2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a
separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for
each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the
following materials, in the order listed:
1 . Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the
following information:
1 . Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
6. Name and address of Architect.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 3
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses .�
Smith College
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by
regular interaction.
B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before
requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete
operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return one copy of draft
and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.
B. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days
before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15
days after final inspection.
1 . Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments.
Submit final copy of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of
Architect's comments.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on
installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative,
assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare
manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1 . List of documents.
2. List of systems.
3. List of equipment.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 2 „�
Prcj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
+ ! PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing
operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:
1 . Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products,
materials, and finishes, systems and equipment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordinating
operation and maintenance manuals covering the Work of multiple
contracts.
2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of
submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.
3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
4. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record
Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals.
5. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance
manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1
..
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and
other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass,
taking care not to scratch surfaces.
j. Remove labels that are not permanent.
k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes
and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of
repair or restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical
and electrical nameplates.
I. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar
equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar .,
droppings, and other foreign substances.
m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains,
including stains resulting from water exposure.
o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean
exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
p. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters
during construction.
q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with
full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably
dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in
fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements ,
for new fixtures.
r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do
not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge
volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove
waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.
END OF SECTION 017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 6
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal
operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local
environmental and antipollution regulations.
„ B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final
cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average
commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
1 . Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection
for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a
portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by
construction activities, including landscape development areas, of
rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.
b, Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills,
stains, and other foreign deposits.
C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-
textured surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus
material from Project site.
e. Clean exposed interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free
condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances.
Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore
reflective surfaces to their original condition.
f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces,
including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults,
manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and
excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
L Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors
and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable,
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 - 5
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 200.6.
Wilson & Gardiner Houses .�
Smith College
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
1 .6 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for
designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other
than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. +
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of
contents of the Project Manual.
1 . Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-
leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized
to receive 8-1 /2-by-1 1 -inch (215-by-280-mm) paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate
warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a
typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the
product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
'WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by
manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning
agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might
damage finished surfaces.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4
—NOW
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1 .4 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining
date of Final Completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section
"Payment Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list
of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by
Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has
been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
!' 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with
insurance requirements.
4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
products, equipment, and systems.
!! B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On
receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify
Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate
for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must
be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1 . Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous
inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of
each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items
and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by
Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1 . Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior staging
areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including
categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building
systems.
3. include the following information at the top of each page:
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the
value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service
agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the
Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits,
operating certificates, and similar releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and
maintenance manuals, and similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location
designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model
number where applicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner.
Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with
mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.
11 . Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use,
operation, and maintenance.
12. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
13. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to
eliminate visual defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion.
On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify
Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of
Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items,
either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must
be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1 . Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous
inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for
Final Completion.
wo
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
++ SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract
closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:
1 . Inspection procedures.
2. Warranties.
3. Final cleaning.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for
Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion.
2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.
3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record
Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.
4. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and
maintenance manual requirements.
5. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special
cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of
Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are
incomplete in request.
t
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses ..
Smith College
vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and
other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass,
taking care not to scratch surfaces.
j. Remove labels that are not permanent. *�+
k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes
and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be ,
satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of
repair or restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical
and electrical nameplates.
I. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar
equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar
droppings, and other foreign substances.
m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains,
including stains resulting from water exposure.
o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean
exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
p. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters ,
during construction.
q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with
full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably
dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in
fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements •.�
for new fixtures.
r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do
not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge �.
volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove
waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.
END OF SECTION 017700
.M
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 6 „�„
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal
operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local
environmental and antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final
cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average
commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
1 . Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection
for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a
portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by
construction activities, including landscape development areas, of
rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills,
stains, and other foreign deposits.
C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-
textured surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus
material from Project site.
e. Clean exposed interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free
condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances.
Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore
reflective surfaces to their original condition.
f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces,
including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults,
manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and
excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors
and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable,
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses we
Smith College
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
1 .6 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for
designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other
than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. ..
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of
contents of the Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-
leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized
to receive 8-1 /2-by-1 1 -inch (215-by-280-mm) paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate
warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a
typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the
product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by
manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning
agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might
damage finished surfaces.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4 ,,,,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1.4 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining
date of Final Completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section
"Payment Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list
of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by
Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has
been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with
insurance requirements.
4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
products, equipment, and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On
receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify
Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate
for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must
be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1 . Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous
inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
1 .5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of
each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items
and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by
Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1 . Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior staging
areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including
categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building
systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses .�
Smith College
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the
value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service
agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the
Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits,
operating certificates, and similar releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and
maintenance manuals, and similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location
designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model
number where applicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner.
Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with
mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.
11. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use,
operation, and maintenance.
12. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
13. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to •
eliminate visual defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion.
On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify
Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of
Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items,
either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must
be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous
inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for
Final Completion.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract
closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:
I . Inspection procedures.
2. Warranties.
3. Final cleaning.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for
Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion.
2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.
3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record
Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.
4. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and
maintenance manual requirements.
5. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special
cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.
1 .3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of
Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are
incomplete in request.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses ..
Smith College
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove
pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down
pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for
recycling wood. �►
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with
requirements for recycling wood.
B. Wood Materials:
1 . Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Salvage pieces greater than 16 inches long
for re-use as blocking. Bag or crate cut-offs too short for use.
2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated
wood.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise
reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them
in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be
disposed of accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on
adjacent surfaces and areas. "
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose
of them.
END OF SECTION 017419
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 8 ,�„
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE
A. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and
sort with other metals.
1 . Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.
B. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length.
Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood
materials.
C. Metals: Separate metals by type.
1. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.
D. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets
and store in a dry location.
tip 1 . Separate suspension system, trim, and other metals from panels and the
and sort with other metals.
E. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size.
F. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate
supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.
G. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage.
H. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers,
meters, panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type.
I. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.
3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A. Packaging:
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle
and store in a dry location.
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 7
,.p
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses ,.
Smith College
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site.
5. Protect items from damage. .�
3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B. Recycling Receivers and Processors: List below is provided for information
only; available recycling receivers and processors include, but are not limited
to, the following:
C. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other
incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.
D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and
debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum
extent practical.
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable
waste until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable
and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.
a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove
contaminated materials if found.
2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without 'intermixing with other
materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water.
Cover to prevent windblown dust.
3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip
line of remaining trees. .�
4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling
receiver or processor.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 6 „�,
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
other items as required to implement waste management plan during the
entire duration of the Contract.
1 . Comply with Division 01 Section 'Temporary Facilities and Controls" for
operation, termination, and removal requirements.
B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste
management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.
1 . Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work
on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage,
recycling, and disposal.
C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations
to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and
other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating
materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
2. Comply with Division 01 Section 'Temporary Facilities and Controls" for
controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE
A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work:
1 . Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until installation.
4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and
miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use
indicated.
B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site.
s C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use:
1 . Clean salvaged items.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 5
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
4. Review waste management requirements for each trade.
1 .6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work
plan, and on site procedures.
B. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be
salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill. **
1 . Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and
reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials
before incorporation into the Work.
2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold, transport
materials off-site.
3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to
individuals and organizations arrange for receipt.
4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type
of recycled materials each will accept.
5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed
of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and ..�
incinerator facility.
6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be
used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers,
container labeling, and designated location on Project site where
materials separation will be located. +
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) •
PART 3 - EXECUTION •►
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Architect and
Owner. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 4
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2. Construction Waste:
. a. Site-clearing waste.
b. Masonry and CMU.
C. Lumber.
d. Wood sheet materials.
e. Wood trim.
f. Metals.
g. Carpet and pad.
h. Gypsum board.
i. Piping.
j. Electrical conduit.
k. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated above,
salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated
packaging materials:
1) Paper.
2) Cardboard.
3) Boxes.
4) Wood crates.
5) Plastic pails.
1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply
with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and
Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management
including, but not limited to, the following:
1 . Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of
Waste Management Coordinator.
2. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify
availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays.
3. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to
recycling and disposal facilities.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 3
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and
subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent
processing in preparation for reuse.
E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or
reuse in another facility.
F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and
subsequent incorporation into the Work.
1 .4 PERFORMANCE GOALS
A. General: Develop waste management plan that results in end-of-Project rates
for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total waste generated by the
Work.
1. Demolition Waste:
a. Brick.
b. Wood studs. '
C. Wood paneling.
d. Wood trim.
e. Doors and frames.
f. Door hardware.
g. Windows.
h. Glazing.
L Carpet.
j. Cabinets.
k. Piping.
I. Supports and hangers.
m. Copper wiring.
n. Lighting fixtures.
o. Ballasts.
p. Electrical devices.
q. Switchgear and panelboards.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 2
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the
following:
1 . Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 01 Section 'Temporary Facilities and Controls" for
environmental-protection measures during construction.
e
2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry
waste.
3. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from
site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements.
1 .3 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid
waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair
±* operations. Construction waste includes packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from
demolition or selective demolition operations.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and
similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable .w
seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with
installation requirements specified in other Sections. �*
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after
completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend
finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that
will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or
other finishing materials.
b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. ..,
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one
finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the
new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and
appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with
new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and
intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat
over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide
additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to
provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores
enclosure to a weathertight condition.
D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. •
Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
END OF SECTION 017329
CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 6 ,�
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
1P Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing
services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass
such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied
areas.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed
with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without
delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components
or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as
required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping,
grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least
likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible,
review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original
Installer's written recommendations.
1 . In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and
grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as
possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of
adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into
concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive
saw or a diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable
,, Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or
partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion
of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter
after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are
complete.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 5
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses ..
Smith College
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the
fullest extent possible.
1 . If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials
that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of
in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting
and patching are to be performed.
1 . Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of
substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to
prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for
portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching �•
operations.
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption
of free passage to adjoining areas.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 4 „�
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3. Fire-suppression systems.
4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.
5. Control systems.
6. Communication systems.
7. Electrical wiring systems.
C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or
related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying
capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that
results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following:
1 . Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
2. Membranes and flashings.
3. Equipment supports.
4. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that
results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch
construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that
would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove
and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
1 . Notify Architect 24 hours prior to preparation of test patch mock-ups
and 48 hours prior to commencing with patching operations.
OR
Rp 1 .6 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces
cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with
materials so as not to void existing warranties.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 3
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses .�
Smith College
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original
conditions after installation of other Work. .w
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at
least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed,
requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:
1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed,
and indicate why they cannot be avoided.
2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include
changes to structural elements and operating components as well as
changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform
the Work.
4. Test Samples: For each patch required to meet visual requirements
perform test patch as mock up of intended results.
5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems
that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List
services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily
out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted.
6. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal
before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later
require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner
that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related
components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as
intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life
or safety. Operating elements include the following:
1 . Primary operational systems and equipment.
2. Air or smoke barriers. ..
CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 2 �,.
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
+ 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B. Hazardous Materials: The Owner has surveyed existing construction and
determined the existence of hazardous materials on site in the areas
associated with the Work. These include, but are not limited to:
1 . joint Compound
2. Linoleum Flooring
! 3. Mudded fittings
4. Ceiling Tile Adhesive
C. Removal of Hazardous Materials: The Owner will engage under separate
contract a firm specialized in the abatement of hazardous materials for
removal of hazardous materials. The Contractor is responsible for training
workers in procedures if suspected hazardous materials are uncovered during
cutting and patching operations.
D. Related Sections include the following:
1. Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations
applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
1 .3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or
performance of other Work.
CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329 - 1
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3.8 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged
substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section
"Cutting and Patching."
1 . Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged
surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting
operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified
condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces
cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace
operating components that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective
surfaces.
END OF SECTION 017300
EXECUTION 017300 - 7
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses ,
Smith College
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress
and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where
required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial
Completion. .
1. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as
necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and
lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part
of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful,
dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the
construction period.
3.6 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation.
Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust
equipment for proper operation.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust
controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is
required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation,
comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality
Requirements."
3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative wo
humidity.
EXECUTION 017300 - 6
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas.
Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer
has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
• 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste
materials and debris.
2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days
if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg Q.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from
other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally,
according to regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
,. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness
necessary for proper execution of the Work.
1 . Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or
vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according
to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using
only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning
materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous
to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the
space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as
necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be
permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be
permitted.
EXECUTION 017300 - 5
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for
installing products in applications indicated. .w
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best
possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until
Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to
damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal
conditions of occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful *■
noise levels.
F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work
specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of
other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and
installing products to comply with indicated requirements.
G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor
each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other
portions of the Work.
1 . Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount
components at heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and
contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are
to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project
site in time for installation.
H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work
are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed
connections together to form hairline joints.
I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that
are not considered hazardous.
EXECUTION 017300 - 4 „�,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work
properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where
portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying
the Work.
B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items
shown diagrammatically on Drawings.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information
shown on Drawings, in relation existing conditions. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
1 . Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings
! ! to obtain required dimensions.
2. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
3. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work
progresses.
4. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed
allowable tolerances.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct
alignment and elevation, as indicated.
1 . Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available
for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 7 feet 6 inches (2.2 m) in
spaces without a suspended ceiling.
EXECUTION 017300 - 3
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities,
and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before
beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of
mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.
B. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with
Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance. Record observations.
1 . Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the
following:
a. Description of the Work.
b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
d. Recommended corrections.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including
compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify
actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.
4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products
and systems are to be installed.
5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces
and conditions.
EXECUTION 017300 - 2 .,,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION
e .
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of
the Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1 . Construction layout.
2. General installation of products.
3. Progress cleaning.
4. Starting and adjusting.
5. Protection of installed construction.
6. Correction of the Work.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for
procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction
activities.
2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
3. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements
for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of
other components of the Work.
4. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property
survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted
deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.
EXECUTION 017300 - 1
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses OR
Smith College
2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable
product when the following conditions are satisfied. if the following conditions ■„
are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record
noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions
to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract
Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is
compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with
those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes
such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific
features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and w,
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if
requested. +
5. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 10 �,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
IP Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
5 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60
days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be
considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.
B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when
the following conditions are satisfied. if the following conditions are not
satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record
noncompliance with these requirements:
1 . Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost,
time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting
additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional
responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and
evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the
Contract Documents.
3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and
will produce indicated results.
4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction
Schedule.
6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities
having jurisdiction.
7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the
Work.
9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested
substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is
uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is
acceptable to all contractors involved.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 9
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration
of an unnamed product.
7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and
dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or
system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions
in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed
product or system.
8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and
include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a
comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings
and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other
characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with
provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an
unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.
9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an
established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and
matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether
a proposed product matches.
a. If no product available within specified category matches and
complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions .A
in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.
10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "
"as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar
phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements.
a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard
range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will
select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that does not include premium items.
b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of
colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select
color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line
that includes both standard and premium items.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 8 „
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1 . Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and
other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and
effect.
w 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or
nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types
that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on
other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not
in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will
make selection.
5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to
be matched is Architect's.
6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the
Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products.
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1 . Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer,
provide the named product that complies with requirements.
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer
or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that
complies with requirements.
3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products
and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with
requirements.
4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers'
names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that
complies with requirements.
5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both
products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an
unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with
provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an
unnamed product.
6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of
manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or
an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 7
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents.
Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve
Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1 . Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by
individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed
by manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the
Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by
manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate
terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval
before final execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific
information and properly executed. .w
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the
Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form
properly executed.
3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content
requirements and particular requirements for submitting special
warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout
Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the
Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that *�*
are new at time of installation.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 6 dft
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent
damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1 . Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to
prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding
time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or
sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in
manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system,
complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking,
protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract
Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly
protected.
C. Storage:
1 . Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or
counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover
in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to
prevent condensation.
4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.
5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary
for period of installation and concealment.
6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature,
humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of
" materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate
location with Owner.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 5
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of
a proposed substitution within time allocated.
B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for
consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be
replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers
,�.
and titles.
1 . Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional WA
information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt
of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of
approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15
days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information
or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal
Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of
a comparable product request within time allocated.
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with
requirements.
1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between
two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible
with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were
also options.
1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction
methods compatible with products and construction methods of other
contractors.
2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but
incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be
used.
s.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 4
OF
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Douses
Smith College
performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be
necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
d. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed
rn substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities
may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability,
visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
e. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and
fabrication and installation procedures.
f. Samples, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project
names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and
owners.
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and
interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building
code in effect for Project, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using
proposed substitution with products specified for the Work,
including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product
or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract
Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
„ letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.
k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with
requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for
applications indicated.
I. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may
subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed
substitution to produce indicated results.
2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional
information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a
request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or
rejection of proposed substitution within 7 days of receipt of request, or
7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever
is later.
a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into
another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-
content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise.
Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved
through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution,
to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-
service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of
construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by
Contractor. +
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's
product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including
make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant
qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical
properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating
comparable products of other named manufacturers.
1 .4 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include
Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1 . Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions
and the following, as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be
provided.
b. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the
Contract Sum.
C. Coordination information, including a list of changes or
modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2 „�,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
e 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection
of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling;
manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product
substitutions; and comparable products.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 01 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.
!' 2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for
Contract closeout.
3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties
on products and installations specified to be warranted.
1 .3 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased
for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product"
includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar
intent.
1 . Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name,
including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in
manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of
the Contract Documents.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its
service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a
permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if
necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed
because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean
exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily
repaired.
1 . At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used
during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements
specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
- END OF SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 9
A,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
(0.14-mm) polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up
the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with
fire-retardant plywood.
2. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and
security locks.
3. Protect air-handling equipment.
4. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.
D. Temporary Fire Protection: Maintain existing fire-suppression systems during
construction. When shut-down of system is necessary notify Owner in
advance. Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses.
Comply with NFPA 241.
1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units,
and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection
program for personnel at Project site. Establish procedures to be
followed. instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings
and information.
3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To
minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential
and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity
control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where
required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary
security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial .�
Completion.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 8 „�,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures
to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such
protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to
restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work.
Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required
repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.
F. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted as
indicated, as long as stairs are protected, cleaned and maintained in a
condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to
condition existing before initial use.
1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures
to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. if, despite such
protection, stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no
evidence remains of correction work.
OR
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and
conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental
regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil
contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
1 . Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."
B. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of
construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other
op construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight
enclosure for building exterior.
1 . Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not
complete, insulate temporary enclosures.
C. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit
dust and dirt migration and to separate Work areas from dust, fumes and
noise.
1 . Construct dustproof partitions with 2 layers of 6-mil (0.14-mm)
polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with 2 layers of 6-mil
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 7
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses .,
Smith College
3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio
for use when away from field office. "
I. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic
communication service, including electronic mail, in common-use facilities.
1 . Provide [DSL] [T-1 line] in primary field office.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1 . Provide incombustible construction for sheds located within construction
area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241 . ,
2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove
before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial
Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under WN
conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for
construction personnel.
C. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01
Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." .�
D. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and
personnel.
1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are
considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.
E. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, as
long as elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to
Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing
before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar
items of limited life.
1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. .A
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 6 .,
PON
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures
and facilities.
E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by
construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for
protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select
equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or
elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce
ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
F. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be
permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to
Owner.
1 . Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed
by Owner.
' G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides
adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections,
and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection
requirements without operating entire system.
H. Telephone Service: The Owner will provide access to temporary telephone
service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel.
1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and
computer in each field office.
2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a. Police and fire departments.
b. Ambulance service.
C. Contractor's home office.
d. Architect's office.
e. Engineers' offices.
f. Owner's office.
g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked
for intended use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum
interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as
required by progress of the Work.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove
until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of
completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1 . Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when
service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for
temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
C. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be
permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition
acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to
condition existing before initial use.
1 . Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or
leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage.
Drain accumulated water promptly from pans.
D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking +
water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4 .�
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
B. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1 /2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm)
wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges.
Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M.
C. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag
T wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.
D. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections.
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of
construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip
offices as follows:
1 . Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan
tables, plan racks, and bookcases.
2. Drinking water and private toilet.
3. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc
(21 5 Ix) at desk height.
B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped
to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.
1 . Store combustible materials apart from building.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as
required by locations and classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system,
provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with
individual space thermostatic control.
1 . Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or
salamander-type heating units is prohibited.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and
authorities having jurisdiction. `
B. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use
without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections
and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
C. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available
for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide
connections and extensions of services as required for construction
operations.
1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations
for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and
inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and
permits.
1 .6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service
shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each
permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's
acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough
Carpentry."
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2 ,,.,
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
F, to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities,
and security and protection facilities.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 01 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and
other work restrictions.
PR 2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting
copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports.
3. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.
4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and
humidity requirements for products in those Sections.
1 .3 DEFINITIONS
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary
roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior wails are insulated
and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or
substantial temporary closures.
1.4 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the
Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required
quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid
necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and
pew inspecting.
1 . Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar
activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
' 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
MR 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or
inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur.
Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during
normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 7
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's
responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each
quality-control service.
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the
Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities
having jurisdiction, when they so direct.
C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections '
were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including
retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to
comply with the Contract Documents.
D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in
performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests
and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies
observed in the Work during performance of its services. ,
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in
which in-situ tests are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report
whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from
requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection,
and similar quality-control service through Contractor. ..
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document
requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. "
E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests,
inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable
auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of
operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6 .�
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency
with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated,
as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications
specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having
jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1 . NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to
29 CFR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National
Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.
z 1 .7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as
Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform
these services.
1 . Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of
testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is
necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents
will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by
Change Order.
B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's
responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services
specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform
quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having
jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
1 . Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a
qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.
OR
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless
agreed to in writing by Owner.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work
that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5
.m
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses .,
Smith College
10. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work
complies with the Contract Document requirements.
11 . Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
12. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. +
D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of
permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional
settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence,
records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards �*
and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum
qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional
requirements.
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting,
or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of
successful in-service performance.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or
systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to
produce required units.
D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service �*
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required
units.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally
qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is *a
experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.
Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the
system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project
in material, design, and extent.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 4 ,,,,
P
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to
Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or
specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation
may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may
exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these
requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect
for a decision before proceeding.
1 .5 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article
to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of
qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing
agency by a recognized authority.
B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the
following:
1. Specification Section number and title.
2. Description of test and inspection.
3. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
4. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the
following:
1 . Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection
requirements.
1 .3 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed
before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and
deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with
requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions
during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products
incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with
requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities
performed by Architect.
C. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on- ..
site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.
D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or
both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
E. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by
Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a
particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application,
and similar operations.
F. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having
successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and
scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and
having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum
quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2 ,,,�„
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality
assurance and quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with
requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor
of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual
construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those
activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of
standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's
other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate
compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control
services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction
are not limited by provisions of this Section.
a
C. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for
developing a schedule of required tests and inspections.
2. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of
construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and
may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 14 ..
Y Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the
Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to
Architect.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp.
Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title
and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement
certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for
compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's
approval stamp and will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to
indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will
stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately
to indicate action taken, as follows:
1. Approved: No exceptions taken.
2. Approved as Noted: Make corrections noted.
3. Not Approved: Submission is insufficient, does not meet project
requirements or unacceptable.
4. Revise and Resubmit: Resubmission required
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not
return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect
will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and
will be returned without review.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 13
.m
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses 00
Smith College
M. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on
testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field
tests performed either during installation of product or after product is
installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract
Documents.
N. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures
for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply
with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance
Data."
O. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not
limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and
regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other
performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load
diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
P. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that .r►
documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for
installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and
name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following,
as applicable:
..
1. Preparation of substrates.
2. Required substrate tolerances.
3. Sequence of installation or erection.
4. Required installation tolerances.
5. Required adjustments.
6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
Q. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating
current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity
covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if
any, and term of the coverage.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 12 �,,
_ Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
W
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in
Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."
D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities
and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,
and other information specified.
E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and
personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit
record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification
+ " Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents
and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's
letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the
Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where
required.
4P
H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
1. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on
testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of
material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product
produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract
Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests
performed by a qualified testing agency.
L. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in
Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 11
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01
Section "Payment Procedures."
I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Payment Procedures."
J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms
proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish
products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following
information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract
or supplying products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by
subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by
subcontract.
4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless
otherwise indicated. Architect will return one copy.
a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record
Document.
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS *�*
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other
Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless Wx
otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that
includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification.
Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other
individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in
Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."
B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01
Section "Project Management and Coordination."
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 10
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size
indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured
and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or
product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture
variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components;
small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used
materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets;
and components used for independent testing and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples. Architect will
' retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned.
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship,
fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other
similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is
inherent in material or product represented by a Sample,
submit at least three sets of paired units that show
approximate limits of variations.
E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections,
prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work
and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:
1 . Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.
! ' 2. Number and name of room or space.
3. Location within room or space.
4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list,
unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies.
+* a. Retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.
F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in
Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction
Manager's action.
G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01
Section "Construction Progress Documentation."
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9
4M
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
manuals. Architect will retain one copy; remainder will be
returned. Retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing. '
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a
check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of
these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and
installed. "
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as ,
accessories together in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes
the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
C. Sample source.
d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available
for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction
activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of
construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in
individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an
undamaged condition at time of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as
Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.
4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts
consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors,
textures, and patterns available. ,
a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices
where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required
to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will
return submittal with options selected. ,
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8 , „
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
5. Number of Copies: Submit 4 copies of Product Data, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return two copies. Retain one returned copy as a
Project Record Document.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to
scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract
"" Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal of Architect's CAD
Drawings are otherwise permitted.
1 . Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.
C. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power,
signal, and control wiring.
f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
g. Templates and patterns.
h. Schedules.
I. Design calculations.
j. Compliance with specified standards.
k. Notation of coordination requirements.
I. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and
field-installed wiring.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size
drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1 /2 by 1 1 inches
(21 5 by 280 mm) but no larger than 24 by 36 inches (600 by 900 mm).
3. Number of Copies: Submit 4 opaque copies of each submittal, unless
copies are required for concurrent review or operation and maintenance
manuals. Submit 5 copies where copies are required for concurrent
review or operation and maintenance manuals. Submit 6 copies where
copies are required for concurrent review and operation and maintenance
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses ,
Smith College
4. Contractor shall not use the files for determining quantities or
dimensions related to any portion of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual
Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of
construction and type of product or equipment.
I . If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard
printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as
Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options
are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Standard color charts. Rim
e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
g. Printed performance curves.
h. Operational range diagrams.
i. Mill reports.
j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals.
k. Compliance with specified referenced standards.
I. Testing by recognized testing agency.
m. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
n. Notation of coordination requirements. "
4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6 ,�
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
I. Remarks.
m. Signature of transmitter.
2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's. letterhead,
record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those
* requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from
requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and
limitations. Include same label information as related submittal.
1. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial
submittal.
1 . Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly
indicate extent of revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Approved " or "Approved as
Noted" unless indicated to also "Revise and Resubmit."
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers,
subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having
jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities.
Show distribution on transmittal forms.
K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "
Approved " or "Approved as Noted " taken by Architect.
1 .5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES
A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be
provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject
to the following conditions:
1 . Format: Drawing will furnished in AutoCad 2004.
2. Contractor shall create layers identified with the prefix "CTR" for all
modifications to files.
3. If drawing entities are modified from original file, revisions shall be
clouded and noted.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5
,m
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number
followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number
(e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic
suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01 .A).
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
I. Other necessary identification.
F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations
from the Contract Documents on submittals.
G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal,
and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract
Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
1 . Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to
specified number of copies to Architect.
2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked
with action taken and will be returned.
H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for
transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form.
Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other
than Contractor.
1 . Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following Rio
information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Destination (To:).
d. Source (From:).
e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
f. Category and type of submittal.
g. Submittal purpose and description.
h. Specification Section number and title. �*
L Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
j. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4 „�,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to
permit processing, including resubmittals.
i. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow
additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required.
Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must
" be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in
same manner as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 7 days for review of each resubmittal.
4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate
that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to
Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal.
Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to
Contractor.
OF
a. xxxxxxxx
E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for
identification.
1 . Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or
title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 3 by 4 inches (75 by 100 mm) on label or
beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings
and action taken by Architect.
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording
action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision
identifier.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses ••
Smith College
9. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for submittals
in those Sections. �.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires ..
Architect's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's wo
responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be
provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with
performance of construction activities.
1 . Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery,
other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of
the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review
submittals concurrently for coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal
requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals
are received.
C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time
requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.
D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for
resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's
receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2 *�*
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for
submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for
Payment and the Schedule of Values.
2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for
submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for
submitting Coordination Drawings.
3. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for
submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction
Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.
4. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and
inspection reports and for mockup requirements.
5. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.
6. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record
Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.
7. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting
operation and maintenance manuals.
8. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting
videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's
personnel.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
END OF SECTION 013200
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 11
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3. Changes in early and late finish dates.
4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.
S. Changes in the critical path.
6. Changes in total float or slack time.
7. Changes in the Contract Time.
2.5 REPORTS
A. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between
field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed
report. Submit with a request for interpretation. Include a detailed description *'*
of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update
schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. �+
1 . Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change,
including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts
and finishes, and activity durations.
2. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each
activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner,
separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties .�
identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.
1 . Post copies in temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same
parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution .w
when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no
longer involved in performance of construction activities. **
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 10 .�.
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
e. Fabrication.
f. Utility interruptions.
g. Installation.
± h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's
activities.
i. Testing and commissioning.
2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for
interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be
consistent with Contract milestone dates.
3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn,
time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and
reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the
!! " limitations of the Contract Time.
4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of
network; locate paths with most float near the edges.
a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly
off the critical path.
E. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight
"early start-total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated
reports showing the following:
1 . Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
2. Description of activity.
3. Principal events of activity.
4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
5. Early and late start dates.
6. Early and late finish dates.
7. Activity duration in workdays.
8. Total float or slack time.
9. Average size of workforce.
F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare
tabulated reports showing the following:
1 . Identification of activities that have changed.
2. Changes in early and late start dates.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 9
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)
A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.
B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date
established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction
activities for the duration of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the
remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated
activities.
C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a
computerized, time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. **
1 . Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it
can be accepted for use no later than 15 days after date established for
commencement of the Work.
a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this
Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work
within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's
approval of the schedule.
2. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for
reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and
payment request dates.
3. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days
and holidays incorporated into the schedule.
D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete
the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network
to identify probable critical paths.
1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements,
and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include
estimated time frames for the following activities:
a. Preparation and processing of submittals.
b. Mobilization and demobilization.
C. Purchase of materials. .»
d. Delivery.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 8 ,�.
Proj. No. S-1 OS Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2005
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
J E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in
" schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial
Completion, and Final Completion.
F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line,
indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the
Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests.
1 . Refer to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and
payment procedures.
2. Contractor shall assign cost to construction activities on the CPM
schedule. Costs shall not be assigned to submittal activities unless
specified otherwise but may, with Architect's approval, be assigned to
fabrication and delivery activities. Costs shall be under required principal
subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and
maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents,
and demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent
of the Contract Sum.
3. Each activity cost shall reflect an accurate value subject to approval by
Architect.
4. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum.
G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and
„ concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets
to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project
schedule.
2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type
construction schedule within seven days of date established for the Notice to
Proceed.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify
first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant
construction activities for first 30 days of construction. Include skeleton
diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction
based on indicated activities.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 7
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses ,.
Smith College
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date
established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's
administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial
Completion.
D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the
Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence
of the Work is affected.
1 . Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each
product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section
"Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible
delivery date.
2. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product.
Include delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary."
Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.
3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the
schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction.
b. Uninterruptible services.
C. Use of premises restrictions.
d. Environmental control.
4. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major
portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Subcontract awards.
b. Submittals.
C. Purchases.
d. Mockups.
e. Fabrication.
f. Sample testing.
g. Deliveries.
h. Installation.
L Tests and inspections.
j. Adjusting.
k. Curing.
I. Startup and placement into final use and operation.
04
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 6 M
tit
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
$ those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those
required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.
a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary
Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately.
w� 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction
Planning &Scheduling."
B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the
Work to date of Substantial Completion.
1 . Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a
schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically
authorized by Change Order.
C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity
for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:
!' 1 . Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days,
unless specifically allowed by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the
following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than
30 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities
include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing,
fabrication, and delivery.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in
Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate
submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with
Submittals Schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than seven days for startup
and testing.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 5
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
5. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing
and inspecting agencies.
6. Review time required for completion and startup procedures.
7. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in
schedule.
8. Review submittal requirements and procedures.
9. Review procedures for updating schedule.
1 .6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with
performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of
separate contractors.
.R
B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list
of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and
other required schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work
from parties involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities •�
and schedule them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order
by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review,
resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when
establishing dates.
1 . Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of
Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary network diagram.
Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 4 ,.�
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.
B. Submittals Schedule: Submit two copies of schedule. Arrange the following
information in a tabular format:
i . Scheduled date for first submittal.
2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Submittal category (action or informational).
4. Name of subcontractor.
5. Description of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies.
1 . Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not
constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities.
D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial
schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.
' E. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing
conditions.
1 .5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
Review methods and procedures related to the Preliminary Construction
Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to,
the following:
1 . Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update
schedule.
" 2. Discuss constraints, including work stages, area separations, interim
milestones and partial Owner occupancy.
3. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.
4. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and
finish on the planned early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the
network. .�.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the
network.
B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a
construction project where activities are arranged based on activity
relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be
performed and the critical path of Project.
C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through
the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration
and contains no float.
D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without ..
adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.
2. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity
without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.
F. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into ..
smaller activities for greater detail.
G. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar
significant construction element.
H. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.
I. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing
activities and activity relationships.
J. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for
the completion of an activity as scheduled.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 2 ,.®
s4 Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
+ 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for
documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work,
including the following:
1 . Preliminary Construction Schedule.
2. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
3. Submittals Schedule.
4. Field condition reports.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of
Values.
2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for
submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes.
3. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and
reports.
4. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of
tests and inspections.
1 .3 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning,
scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities
included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1
0M
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 013100
..
ON
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 10 ,,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required,
and return it. Allow two working days for Architect's response for each RFI.
RFIs received after 1 :00 p.m. will be considered as received the following
working day.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
C. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the
Contract Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in
which case Architect's time for response will start again.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Sum
may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the
Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of
wo
the RFI response.
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute
the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect
within two days if Contractor disagrees with response.
" G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the
RFI number. Review log weekly.
1 . Name and address of Architect and Contractor.
2. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
3. RFI description.
4. Date the RFI was submitted.
5. Date Architect's response was received.
6. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change
Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 9
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in
attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from
each meeting.
1 .8 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)
A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the
Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project
meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than
Contractor will be returned with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in
Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing
interpretation and the following:
1 . Project name.
2. Date.
3. Name of Architect and Contractor.
4. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
5. Schedule sensitivity
6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as
appropriate.
7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the
Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the '
RFI.
10. Contractor's signature. .,
C. Hard-Copy RFIs: .
1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential
page number.
D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the
same content as indicated above.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 8 �,
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
4) Site utilization.
5) Temporary facilities and controls.
6) Hazards and risks.
7) Progress cleaning.
8) Status of correction of deficient items.
9) Field observations.
10) RFIs.
1 1) Status of proposal requests.
12) Pending changes.
13) Status of Change Orders.
14) Pending claims and disputes.
3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and
„- to parties who should have been present.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after
each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been
made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the
report of each meeting.
" E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings concurrent
with regular project meetungs. Project coordination meetings are in addition
to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and
preinstallation conferences.
1 . Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each
contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with
current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of
future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants
at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous
e•• coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could
affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of
Project.
a. Review present and future needs of each contractor present.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 7
on
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and
disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and
to parties who should have been present.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully
concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve
impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference
at earliest feasible date.
D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.
Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
1 . Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each
contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with •
current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of
future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants
at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress
meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress.
Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last
meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of
schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's
Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind
schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties
involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required
to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed
within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including ..
the following:
1) Status of submittals.
2) Off-site fabrication.
3) Access.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 6 ,,,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
S. First aid.
t. Security.
U. Progress cleaning.
V. Working hours.
3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conferences at weekly
progress meetings followed by visits to the site before each construction
activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1 . Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators
involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or
integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or
will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled
meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and
preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including
requirements for the following:
a. Related RFIs.
b. Related Change Orders.
'!
C. Deliveries.
d. Submittals.
e. Review of mockups.
f. Possible conflicts.
g. Compatibility problems.
h. Time schedules.
L Weather limitations.
j. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
k. Warranty requirements.
I. Compatibility of materials.
m. Acceptability of substrates.
n. Temporary facilities and controls.
o. Space and access limitations.
p. Testing and inspecting requirements.
q. Required performance results.
r. Protection of adjacent work.
S. Protection of construction and personnel.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5
go
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses ,,,,,,
Smith College
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all
invited attendees. `"
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved.
Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner *�
and Architect, within seven days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before
starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner, Construction Manager,
and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.
Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct
the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their
consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; ,
suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All
participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and
authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress,
including the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
C. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
e. Procedures for RFIs.
f. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
h. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
i. Submittal procedures.
j. Preparation of Record Documents.
k. Use of the premises and existing building.
I. Work restrictions.
m. Owner's occupancy requirements.
n. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
o. Construction waste management and recycling.
p. Parking availability.
q. Office, work, and storage areas.
r. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 4 ,�„
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
C. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are
carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and
materials.
1 . Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not
¶ actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for
disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's
property.
1 .5 SUBMITTALS
A. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations,
submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and
other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their
duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including
home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and
telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of
individuals assigned to Project.
1 . Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and
by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
1 .6 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative
and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.
1 . Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with
other contractors.
1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site,
unless otherwise indicated.
1 . Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals
whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify
Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses .�.
Smith College
1 .4 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different
Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of
each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in
different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation,
connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best
results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation
of other components, before or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to .�
ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and
repair. ,
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later
installation.
4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different .s
components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for
required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including
mechanical and electrical.
B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required
administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of
other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the
Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1 . Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. •�+
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Startup and adjustment of systems.
8. Project closeout activities.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2 ..
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
!' SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction
operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1 . Administrative and supervisory personnel.
2. Project meetings.
3. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).
B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas
of responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing
and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general
installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of
benchmarks and control points.
3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of
the Contract.
1 .3 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the
Contract Documents.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
OR
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012900
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 6
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that
must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment
include the following:
1 . List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of Values.
3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).
5. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
6. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
7. Copies of building permits.
8. Initial progress report.
9. Report of preconstruction conference.
10. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
j. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the
Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment
showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as
Via• substantially complete.
1 . Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially
complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the
Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion
issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the
Work.
K. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases
and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted,
including, but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where
required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract
Sum.
4. AIA Document 6706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and
Claims."
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 5
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of
Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve .w
additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated
in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction
Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the
Agreement.
.A
C. Pencil Copies: Submit draft Applications for Payment to the Architect seven
days prior to the date established for progress payments.
D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703
Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
E. Payment Application Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for
Payment. Sample copies are included at end of this Section.
F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute
by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor.
Architect will return incomplete applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's ..
Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives
issued before last day of construction period covered by application.
G. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application
for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include
waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.
H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With Final Application for Payment, submit waivers
of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's '
lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the
payment.
1. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work
must submit waivers.
2. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner
acceptable to Owner.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 4 ,s.
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line
items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate.
5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract
Sum.
6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the
Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment
purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-
site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded
warehousing.
7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of
materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total
installed value of that part of the Work.
8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for
each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a
product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use
information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.
9. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be
complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead
and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct
cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line
items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead
" expense, at Contractor's option.
10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before
the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction
Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.
1 .5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications
and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 3
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
b. Submittals Schedule.
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but
no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial
Applications for Payment.
3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring
separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values
correlated with each phase of payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to
establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item
for each Specification Section.
I . Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule
of Values: •
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Owner
C. Name of Architect. ,
d. Architect's project number.
e. Contractor's name and address.
f. Date of submittal.
2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets.
3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to
indicate the following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of the Work.
C. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
d. Dollar value.
1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth
percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate
continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2 ,�
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
} 1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to
prepare and process Applications for Payment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative
procedures for handling changes to the Contract.
2. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for
administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of
Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.
1 .3 DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of
the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for
reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.
1 .4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with
preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1 . Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required
administrative forms and schedules, including the following:
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
f C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests.
1 .5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change
Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701 .
1 .6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change
Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs
. Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a
Change Order.
1 . Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change
in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine
change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of
work required by the Construction Change Directive.
1 . After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting
data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012600
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 3
OR
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal
Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract
Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and
unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made.
If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. "
b. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts
of trade discounts.
C. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the
change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that
indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to,
changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity
relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time. ,
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require
modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting **
a request for a change to Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the
change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed
change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum
and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit
costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If
requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the
effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity
duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available
total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" **
if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for
product or system specified.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2
k Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART l - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling
and processing Contract modifications.
t. B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures
for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award.
1 .3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
• A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in
the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time,
on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."
1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description
of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract
Sum or the Contract Time. if necessary, the description will include
supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1 . Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not
consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute
the proposed change.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party
involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have
been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a
complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the
Contract.
D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. .,
Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for
materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. General: The Bid Form will reflect the costs associated with Wilson House and
Gardiner House separately. The alternates shall be listed for each house as
follows:
3.2 Wilson House:
A. Alternate No.WI : w.
1 . Deduct the amount for all work in Rooms 102, 102T, 102TA and 103.
B. Alternate No W2:
1 . Deduct the amount for all work related to Make- Air System.
3.3 Gardiner House
A. Alternate No. G 1 :
1. Deduct the amount for all work related to Make-up Air System.
END OF SECTION 012300
ALTERNATES 012300 - 2 ,..,
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
!*� SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
` to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for
alternates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for
certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or
deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a
corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or
in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods
described in the Contract Documents.
1 . The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction
from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other
adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
1 .4 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to
completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.
1 . Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory
objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete
installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.
ALTERNATES 012300 - 1
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31, 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on
the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence
or phrase.
1 .9 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
A. Project Delivery: The Contract Time and Completion Date established by the
Owner shall not be adjusted or modified under any circumstances. The
Contractor and sub-contractors shall employ every means available including
over-time hours to meet the schedule at no additional cost to the Owner,
except as authorized by Change Order.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
SUMMARY 011000 - 5
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to
requirements indicated:
1 . Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's permission.
1 .8 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and
Sections using the 50-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" ,
numbering system.
1 . Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles
to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the
Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is
incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult
the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine
numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.
2. Division 01 : Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of
all Sections in the Specifications. ..
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style
of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases
when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other
Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be
interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be
inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as
plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable
as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the
Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be
performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive
mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe •
responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others
when so noted.
SUMMARY 011000 - 4 ,,,,
Proj. No. 5-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
$ 1 .6 USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction
operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb
portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1 . Limits: Confine constructions operations to designated staging areas and
portions of the building as indicated.
2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving
premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and
emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or
storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for
storage of materials and equipment on-site.
+ " C. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition
throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction
operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period.
1 .7 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed inside the existing
building during normal business working hours of 7 a.m. to 10 p.m., Monday
through Friday, except otherwise indicated.
1 . Weekend Hours: As necessary to meet project schedule
2. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Coordinate with Owner's requirements.
3. Hours for noisy activites: After 9 a.m.; except by permission of Owner.
B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions
SUMMARY 011000 - 3
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
D. The Work consists of the following:
1 . The Work includes demolition and removal of existing bathroom fixtures,
finishes and components; carpentry, interior architectural woodworking,
new doors, replacement of windows, veneer plaster, floor coverings,
acoustical ceilings, painting, toilet partitions, toilet accessories, new
plumbing, heating, ventilation and electrical systems.
1 .4 TYPE OF CONTRACT
A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1 .5 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes providing support
systems to receive Owner's equipment and making plumbing, mechanical, and
electrical connections.
1 . Owner will arrange and for delivery of Owner-furnished items according om
to Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor
shall be present for and assist in Owner's inspection.
3. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will
arrange for replacement.
4. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-
furnished items at Project site.
5. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from
damage during storage and handling, including damage from exposure
to the elements.
6. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's
operations, Contractor shall repair or replace them.
7. Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate Owner-furnished items
into the Work.
B. Owner-Furnished Products:
1. Shower trays.
2. Shower doors.
3. Room Signage
SUMMARY 011000 - 2 �.
Proj. No. S-106 Bathroom Renovations March 31 , 2006
Wilson & Gardiner Houses
Smith College
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1 . Work covered by the Contract Documents.
2. Type of the Contract.
3. Owner-furnished products.
4. Use of premises.
5. Owner's occupancy requirements.
6. Work restrictions.
7. Specification formats and conventions.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1 . Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and
' procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Bathroom Renovations to Wilson & Gardiner Houses
1. Project Location: Kensington Street, Northampton, MA 01060
pop
B. Owner: Trustees of Smith College
1 . Owner's Representative: Charles Conant
C. Architect: Archimetrics Design Studio
SUMMARY 011000 - 1
M
•o
Certification of Document's Authenticity
AIA® Document D401 TM — 2003
I,Peter Lapointe,Architect,hereby certify,to the best of my knowledge,information and belief,that I created the
attached Final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at
10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order No. 1000211160_1 from AIA Contract Documents software and that in
preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA®Document A201 TM—1997-
General Conditions of the Co act for Construction,as published by the AIA in its software,other than those
additions and deletions sh ffi in the associate dditions and Deletions Report.
(Signed)
(Title) .s
(Dated)
war
no
e�
w
we
AIA Document D401 TM—2003.Copyright®1992 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document
Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it
may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by
AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/0212006 under Order No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
Additions and Deletions Report for
AIA Document A201TM— 1997
This Additions and Deletions Report,as defined on page 1 of the associated document,reproduces below all text the author has
added to the standard form AIA document in order to complete it,as well as any text the author may have added to or deleted from
the original AIA text.Added text is shown underlined. Deleted text is indicated with a horizontal line through the original AIA text.
Note: This Additions and Deletions Report is provided for information purposes only and is not incorporated into or constitute any
part of the associated AIA document.This Additions and Deletions Report and its associated document were generated
simultaneously by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006.
PAGE
Wilson&Gardner
Wilson and Gardiner Houses
Smith College
! " Northampton,MA 01060
Trustees of Smith College
126 West Street
Northampton,MA 01060
Archimetrics Design Studio
1' Mailing Address: 180 Strong Street
(Studio located at 13 Railroad Street)
Amherst,MA 01002
JIM PAGE 40
Pill
Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A201Tu—1997.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,
1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and
International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006
under Order No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale. (2468110893)
User Notes:
no
§14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE We
§14.4.1 The Owner may,at any time,terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause.
§14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the
Contractor shall: "*
.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;
.2 take actions necessary,or that the Owner may direct,for the protection and preservation of the Work;
and
.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the
notice,terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts
and purchase orders.
w
§14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment
for Work executed,and costs incurred by reason of such termination,along with reasonable overhead and profit on
the Work not executed.
wir
.Ar
■w
AIA Document A201 Tm—1997.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 40
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order w
No.1 0002111601 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of
days scheduled for completion,or 120 days in any 365-day period,whichever is less.
§14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists,the Contractor may,upon seven days'
written notice to the Owner and Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work
executed and for proven loss with respect to materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery,
including reasonable overhead,profit and damages.
§14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a
Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract
with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract
Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work,the Contractor may,upon seven additional
days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided
in Section 14.1.3.
§14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE
§14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor:
.1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper
materials;
.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective
agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;
.3 persistently disregards laws,ordinances,or rules,regulations or orders of a public authority having
jurisdiction;or
.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.
pill §14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist,the Owner,upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause
exists to justify such action,may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the
Contractor and the Contractor's surety,if any,seven days' written notice,terminate employment of the Contractor
and may,subject to any prior rights of the surety:
.1 take possession of the site and of all materials,
p equipment,tools,and construction equipment and
- machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;
.2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4;and
.3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.Upon request of the
Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by
the Owner in finishing the Work.
§14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1,the Contractor shall
not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.
§14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work,including.compensation for
the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,and other damages incurred by the Owner and not
expressly waived,such excess shall be paid to the Contractor.If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance,
the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner,as the case
may be,shall be certified by the Architect,upon application,and this obligation for payment shall survive
termination of the Contract.
§14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
§14.3.1 The Owner may,without cause,order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay or interrupt the Work in
whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.
§14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by
suspension,delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1.Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include
profit.No adjustment shall be made to the extent:
.1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended,delayed or interrupted by another cause
for which the Contractor is responsible;or
.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA* Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 39
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
.A
§13.5.3 If such procedures for testing,inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the w.
portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents,all costs made necessary
by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses
shall be at the Contractor's expense.
§13.5.4 Required certificates of testing,inspection or approval shall,unless otherwise required by the Contract
Documents,be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.
§13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests,inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents,the
Architect will do so promptly and,where practicable,at the normal place of testing.
§13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid
unreasonable delay in the Work.
§13.6 INTEREST
§13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at
such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or,in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to
time at the place where the Project is located.
§13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD
§13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor:
.1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of
Substantial Completion,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged
cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of
Substantial Completion;
.2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act
occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final
Certificate for Payment,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged
cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of
issuance of the final Certificate for Payment;and
.3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of
issuance of the final Certificate for Payment,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to
run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later
than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under
Section 3.5,the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor
under Section 12.2,or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or
obligation by the Contractor or Owner,whichever occurs last.
ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
§14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR .�
§14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days
through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any
other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,for
any of the following reasons:
.1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which requires all Work to
be stopped;
.2 an act of government,such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all Work to be "*
stopped;
.3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of
the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1,or because the Owner has not
made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents;or
.4 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly,upon the Contractor's request,reasonable
evidence as required by Section 2.2.1.
§14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if,through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor,
Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work
under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,repeated suspensions,delays or interruptions of the entire Work
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 38
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order wR
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(2468110893)
Pill
Documents may be sought to be enforced,nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish
the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.
§12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK
12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents,the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction,in which case the Contract Sum
will be reduced as appropriate and equitable.Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has
been made.
ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
§13.1 GOVERNING LAW
± §13.1,1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located.
§13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
§13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves,their partners,successors,assigns and legal
representatives to the other party hereto and to partners,successors,assigns and legal representatives of such other
party in respect to covenants,agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.Except as provided
in Section 13.2.2,neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the
other.If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent,that party shall nevertheless remain
legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract.
§13.2.2 The Owner may,without consent of the Contractor,assign the Contract to an institutional lender providing
construction financing for the Project.In such event,the lender shall assume the Owner's rights and obligations
under the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such
assignment.
§13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE
§13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member
of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended,or if delivered at or sent by
registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice.
§13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
§13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder
shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties,obligations,rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available
by law.
§13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner,Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty
afforded them under the Contract,nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a
breach thereunder,except as may be specifically agreed in writing.
§13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
§13.5.1 Tests,inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws,
ordinances,rules,regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time.
Unless otherwise provided,the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests,inspections and approvals with an
independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner,or with the appropriate public authority,and shall
bear all related costs of tests,inspections and approvals.The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of
pw when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures.The
Owner shall bear costs of tests,inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are
received or negotiations concluded.
§13.5.2 If the Architect,Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require
additional testing,inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1,the Architect will,upon written
authorization from the Owner,instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing,inspection
or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner,and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of
when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures.Such
costs,except as provided in Section 13.5.3,shall be at the Owner's expense.
t+�w
AIA Document A201 TO—1997.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 37
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
ON
§11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment am
of obligations arising under the Contract,the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a
copy to be made.
ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK ■*
§12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK
§12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically
expressed in the Contract Documents,it must,if required in writing by the Architect,be uncovered for the so
Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time.
§12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to examine
prior to its being covered,the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor.If a*
such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,costs of uncovering and replacement shall,by appropriate
Change Order,be at the Owner's expense.If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents,
correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate no
contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs.
§12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK
§12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION an
§12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the
requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or
not fabricated,installed or completed.Costs of correcting such rejected Work,including additional testing and so
inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
§12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ..
§12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5,if,within one year after the date of
Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties
established under Section 9.9.1,or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents,
any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contractor
shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously
given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after
discovery of the condition.During the one-year period for correction of Work,if the Owner fails to notify the
Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction,the Owner waives the rights to require
correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty.If the Contractor fails to correct
nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or
e�
Architect,the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4.
§12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first
performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual
performance of the Work.
§12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the
Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2.
§12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. ,
§12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction,whether completed or
partially completed,of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work
which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. `
§12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to
other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents.Establishment of the one-year *�
period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor
to correct the Work,and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract
w.
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 36
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(2468110893)
§11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other
special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy,the Owner shall,if possible,include such
insurance,and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order.
§11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties,real or personal or both,at or adjacent
to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project,or if after final payment
property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring
the Project during the construction period,the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section
11.4.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance.All separate
policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.
§11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur,the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that
includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.4.Each policy shall contain all generally applicable
conditions,definitions,exclusions and endorsements related to this Project.Each policy shall contain a provision
that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire,and that its limits will not be reduced,until at least 30 days'
prior written notice has been given to the Contractor.
§11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against(1)each other and any of their
1!A subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees,each of the other,and(2)the Architect,Architect's
consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6,if any,and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,
agents and employees,for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance
obtained pursuant to this Section 11.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work,except such rights as they
have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary.The Owner or Contractor,as appropriate,shall
require of the Architect,Architect's consultants,separate contractors described in Article 6,if any,and the
subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees of any of them,by appropriate agreements,written where
legally required for validity,similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein.The policies shall
provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a
person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification,contractual or
otherwise,did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly,and whether or not the person or entity had an
insurable interest in the property damaged.
§11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made
+�* payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds,as their interests may appear,subject to requirements of any
applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.4.10.The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of
insurance proceeds received by the Contractor,and by appropriate agreements,written where legally required for
validity,shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner.
§11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest,the Owner as fiduciary shall,upon occurrence of an insured loss,
give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties.The cost of required bonds shall be charged against
proceeds received as fiduciary.The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received,which the
Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach,or in accordance with
an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Section 4.6.If after such loss no other
special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience,replacement of damaged
property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article
7.
§11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in
interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power;if such
objection is made,the dispute shall be resolved as provided in Sections 4.5 and 4.6.The Owner as fiduciary shall,in
the case of arbitration,make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators.If distribution
of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required,the arbitrators will direct such distribution.
§11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
§11.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of
the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically
required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract.
so
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 35
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1 000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
ss�
§11.3.2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance,the Owner,
Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages,except such rights as they may have to the
proceeds of such insurance.The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.
wR
§11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner,Architect or other persons or entities as
additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under Section 11.1.
ire
§11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE
§11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided,the Owner shall purchase and maintain,in a company or companies lawfully
authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located,property insurance written on a builder's
risk"all-risk"or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum,plus value of subsequent Contract
modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others,comprising total value for the entire Project at the
site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles.Such property insurance shall be maintained,unless
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are
beneficiaries of such insurance,until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or
entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.4 to be covered,
whichever is later.This insurance shall include interests of the Owner,the Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub-
subcontractors in the Project. w
§11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an"all-risk"or equivalent policy form and shall include,without limitation,
insurance against the perils of fire(with extended coverage)and physical loss or damage including, without
duplication of coverage,theft,vandalism,malicious mischief,collapse,earthquake,flood,windstorm,falsework,
testing and startup,temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any
applicable legal requirements,and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services
and expenses required as a result of such insured loss.
§11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of
the coverages in the amount described above,the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to
commencement of the Work.The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the
Contractor,Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof
shall be charged to the Owner.If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or
maintain insurance as described above,without so notifying the Contractor in writing,then the Owner shall bear all
reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.
§11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles,the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such
deductibles.
§11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site,and also portions of the Work
in transit.
§11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company
or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or
otherwise.The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or
companies and shall,without mutual written consent,take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that
would cause cancellation,lapse or reduction of insurance.
§11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance.The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance
required by the Contract Documents or by law,which shall specifically cover such insured objects during
installation and until final acceptance by the Owner;this insurance shall include interests of the Owner,Contractor, .A
Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds.
§11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance.The Owner,at the Owner's option,may purchase and maintain such insurance as
will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards,however caused.The
Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property,including
consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused.
AIA Document A201Tm—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 34
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order w�
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
§10.5 If,without negligence on the part of the Contractor,the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation of
a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents,the
Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred.
'! §10.6 EMERGENCIES
§10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property,the Contractor shall act,at the Contractor's
discretion,to prevent threatened damage,injury or loss.Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by
the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Section 4.3 and Article 7.
ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS
§11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
§11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do
business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims
set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which
the Contractor may be legally liable,whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
.1 claims under workers'compensation,disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which
are applicable to the Work to be performed;
.2 claims for damages because of bodily injury,occupational sickness or disease,or death of the
Contractor's employees;
.3 claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than
the Contractor's employees;
.4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;
.5 claims for damages,other than to the Work itself,because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property,including loss of use resulting therefrom;
.6 claims for damages because of bodily injury,death of a person or property damage arising out of
ownership,maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;
.7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations;and
.8 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under
Section 3.18.
§11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the
Contract Documents or required by law,whichever coverage is greater.Coverages,whether written on an
occurrence or claims-made basis,shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work
until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment.
§11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of
the Work.These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that
coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days'prior written
notice has been given to the Owner.If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after
final payment and are reasonably available,an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall
be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2.Information concerning reduction
PX of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate,or both,shall be furnished by
the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief.
§11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
§11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance.
§11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE
§11.3.1 Optionally,the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project Management Protective
Liability nsurance from the Contractor's usual sources as '
Y� primary coverage for the Owner's,Contractor's and
Architect's vicarious Iiability for construction operations under the Contract. Unless otherwise required by the
Contract Documents,the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of
W purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage, and the Contractor shall not be responsible for
purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner.The minimum limits of liability purchased with
such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits required for Contractor's Liability Insurance under
Sections 11.1.1.2 through 11.1.1.5.
AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 33
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(2468110893)
§10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain,as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract,
reasonable safeguards for safety and protection,including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards,
promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities.
§10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are
necessary for execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under
supervision of properly qualified personnel.
§10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss(other than damage or loss insured under property
insurance required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in
whole or in part by the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly employed
by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under
Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3,except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them,or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable,
and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor.The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in
addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18.
§10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty
shall be the prevention of accidents.This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise
designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect.
§10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its
safety.
§10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
§10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons
resulting from a material or substance,including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB),
encountered on the site by the Contractor,the Contractor shall,upon recognizing the condition,immediately stop
Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing.
§10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material
or substance reported by the Contractor and,in the event such material or substance is found to be present,to verify
that it has been rendered harmless.Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall furnish in
writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests
verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe
containment of such material or substance.The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in
writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner.If
either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner,the Owner shall
propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection.When the material or
substance has been rendered harmless,Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner
and Contractor.The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the
amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut-down,delay and start-up,which adjustments shall be
accomplished as provided in Article 7.
§10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor,
Subcontractors,Architect,Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against
claims,damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting from
performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or
death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless,provided that such claim,damage,loss or
expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property
wir
(other than the Work itself)and provided that such damage,loss or expense is not due to the sole negligence of a
party seeking indemnity.
§10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Section 10.3 for materials and substances brought to the site by the
Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents.
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 32
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
the final Certificate is due and payable.The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further
representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment
have been fulfilled.
!!w1 §9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits
to the Architect(1)an affidavit that payrolls,bills for materials and equipment,and other indebtedness connected
with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered(less amounts
withheld by Owner)have been paid or otherwise satisfied,(2)a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the
Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed
to expire until at least 30 days'prior written notice has been given to the Owner,(3)a written statement that the
Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by
the Contract Documents,(4)consent of surety,if any,to final payment and(5),if required by the Owner,other data
establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations,such as receipts,releases and waivers of liens,claims,security
interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract,to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the
Owner.If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner,the Contractor may furnish a
bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien.If such lien remains unsatisfied after
payments are made,the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in
discharging such lien,including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees.
§9.10.3 If,after Substantial Completion of the Work,final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault
of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion,and the Architect so confirms,the
Owner shall,upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect,and without terminating the
Contract,make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted.If the
remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract
Documents,and if bonds have been furnished,the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that
portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to
certification of such payment.Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment,
except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
§9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from:
.1 liens,Claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;
.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;or
pill .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents.
§9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor,a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a
Pill waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at
the time of final Application for Payment.
ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
§10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
§10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and
programs in connection with the performance of the Contract.
§10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
§10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of,and shall provide reasonable protection to
prevent damage,injury or loss to:
.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;
.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein,whether in storage on or off the
site,under care,custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-
subcontractors;and
.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto,such as trees,shrubs,lawns,walks,pavements,
roadways,structures and utilities not designated for removal,relocation or replacement in the course
of construction.
§10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws,ordinances,rules,regulations and lawful
orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage,injury or loss.
t�lr
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright 9 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAs Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. 31
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
ON
§9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 4W
§9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof
is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the
Work for its intended use.
.s
§9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work,or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept
separately,is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of
items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the
responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list,the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or
designated portion thereof is substantially complete.If the Architect's inspection discloses any item,whether or not
included on the Contractor's list,which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so
that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use,the Contractor
shall,before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion,complete or correct such item upon notification
by the Architect.In such case,the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to
determine Substantial Completion.
§9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete,the Architect will prepare a ■w
Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion,shall establish
responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and
insurance,and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the *10
Certificate.Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion
of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion.
§9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written
acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.Upon such acceptance and consent of surety,if
any,the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment
shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE
§9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when
such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor,provided such occupancy or use is consented
to by the insurer as required under Section 11.4.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the
Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete,provided
the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments,
retainage,if any,security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and have agreed in
writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract
Documents.When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and
submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2.Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use *!�
shall not be unreasonably withheld.The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement
between the Owner and Contractor or,if no agreement is reached,by decision of the Architect.
§9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use,the Owner,Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect w
the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the
Work.
ew
§9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon,partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not
constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
§9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of
a final Application for Payment,the Architect will promptly make such inspection and,when the Architect finds the
Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed,the Architect will promptly issue w.
a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and belief,and on
the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections,the Work has been completed in accordance with terms
and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA* Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 30
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless
security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;
.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor,materials or
equipment;
.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;
.5 damage to the Owner or another contractor;
.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time,and that the
unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;
or
.7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed,certification will be made for amounts
previously withheld.
Pill §9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
§9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment,the Owner shall make payment in the manner and
within the time provided in the Contract Documents,and shall so notify the Architect.
§9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor,upon receipt of payment from the Owner,out of the
amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work,the amount to which said
Subcontractor is entitled,reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of
PON such Subcontractor's portion of the Work.The Contractor shall,by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor,
require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner.
§9.6.3 The Architect will,on request,furnish to a Subcontractor,if practicable,information regarding percentages of
Pill completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on
account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.
§9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a
Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law.
§9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2,9.6.3 and
9.6.4.
§9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment,a progress payment,or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the
Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum,
payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by
l the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials,or both,under
contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner.Nothing contained herein shall require
money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor,shall create any
fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity
to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision.
§9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT
lip §9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment,through no fault of the Contractor,within seven days
after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven
days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by
arbitration,then the Contractor may,upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect,stop the
Work until payment of the amount owing has been received.The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and
the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down,delay and
start-up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.
lip
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 29
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
payment as the Owner or Architect may require,such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material
suppliers,and reflecting retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents.
§9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.8,such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in
the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives,or by interim determinations of
the Architect,but not yet included in Change Orders.
§9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor
does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier,unless such Work has been performed by others
whom the Contractor intends to pay.
§9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,payments shall be made on account of materials and
equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work.If approved in advance
by the Owner,payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location
agreed upon in writing.Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon
compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such
materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest,and shall include the costs of applicable
insurance,storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site.
w
§9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner
no later than the time of payment.The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for
Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the
Owner shall,to the best of the Contractor's knowledge,information and belief,be free and clear of liens,claims,
security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor,Subcontractors,material suppliers,or other persons or
entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor,materials and equipment relating to the Work.
§9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
§9.4.1 The Architect will,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,either issue
to the Owner a Certificate for Payment,with a copy to the Contractor,for such amount as the Architect determines
is properly due,or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding
certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1.
§9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner,
based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment,that the Work
has progressed to the point indicated and that,to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and belief,the
quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents.The foregoing representations are subject to an
evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion,to results of
subsequent tests and inspections,to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion
and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect.The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further
constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified.However,the issuance
of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has(1)made exhaustive or continuous on-
site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work,(2)reviewed construction means,methods,techniques,
sequences or procedures,(3)reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers ..
and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment,or(4)made examination to
ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.
§9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION
§9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part,to the extent reasonably necessary
to protect the Owner,if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot
be made.If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application,the Architect will notify the
Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1.If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised
amount,the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to
make such representations to the Owner.The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or,because of
subsequently discovered evidence,may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued,to
such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor
is responsible,including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2,because of.
.1 defective Work not remedied;
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA` Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 28
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(2468110893)
ARTICLE 8 TIME
§8.1 DEFINITIONS
§8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided,Contract Time is the period of time,including authorized adjustments,allotted in
the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.
§8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.
Pit §8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8.
§8.1.4 The term"day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically
defined.
§8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
§8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.By executing the Agreement
the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work.
§8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly,except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing,prematurely
commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be
furnished by the Contractor and Owner.The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the
effective date of such insurance.Unless the date of commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a
notice to proceed given by the Owner,the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or
other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages,mechanic's liens and
other security interests.
§8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion
within the Contract Time.
§8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
§8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of
the Owner or Architect,or of an employee of either,or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner,or by
changes ordered in the Work,or by labor disputes,fire,unusual delay in deliveries,unavoidable casualties or other
causes beyond the Contractor's control,or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration,or
by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay,then the Contract Time shall be extended by
Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.
§8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Section 4.3.
§8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of
w the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
§9.1 CONTRACT SUM
§9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and,including authorized adjustments,is the total amount
payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.
§9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
§9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values
allocated to various portions of the Work,prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its
accuracy as the Architect may require.This schedule,unless objected to by the Architect,shall be used as a basis for
reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment.
§9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
§9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment,the Contractor shall submit to the
Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values.
Such application shall be notarized,if required,and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to
AIA Document A201 rm—1997.Copyright 041911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 27
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
§7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum,the adjustment shall be
based on one of the following methods:
.1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to
permit evaluation;
.2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;
.3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or
percentage fee;or
.4 as provided in Section 7.3.6.
§7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive,the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in
the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method,if any,
provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or
Contract Time.
§7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor „
therewith,including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such
agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.
§7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum,
the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and
savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change,including,in case of an increase in the Contract
Sum,a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit.In such case,and also under Section 7.3.3.3,the Contractor .�
shall keep and present,in such form as the Architect may prescribe,an itemized accounting together with
appropriate supporting data.Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of this
Section 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following:
.1 costs of labor,including social security,old age and unemployment insurance,fringe benefits
required by agreement or custom,and workers'compensation insurance;
.2 costs of materials,supplies and equipment,including cost of transportation,whether incorporated or
consumed;
.3 rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from the Contractor
or others;
.4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,permit fees,and sales,use or similar taxes related to
the Work;and
.5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.
§7.3.7 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a
net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect.When both additions and
credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change,the allowance for overhead and profit shall
be figured on the basis of net increase,if any,with respect to.that change.
§7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner,amounts not in
dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change
Order indicating the parties'agreement with part or all of such costs.For any portion of such cost that remains in
dispute,the Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those
costs.That determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order,subject to the
right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with Article 4.
§7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect concerning the
adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time,or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments,such
agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate
Change Order.
§7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
§7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the
Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents.
Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor.The Contractor
shall carry out such written orders promptly.
AIA Document A201n"—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 26
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIAO Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties.and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order eru
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(2468110893)
§6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by
the Owner or a separate contractor,the Contractor shall,prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work,promptly
report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable
'! ! for such proper execution and results.Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that
the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the
Contractor's Work,except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable.
§6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a
separate contractor because of delays,improperly timed activities or defective construction of the Contractor.The
Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays,improperly
timed activities,damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor.
§6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially
completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5.
§6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are
described for the Contractor in Section 3.14.
§6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP
§6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor,separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under
their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish,
the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible.
ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK
§7.1 GENERAL
§7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract,and without invalidating the
Contract,by Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work,subject to the
limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
§7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner,Contractor and Architect; a Construction
Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the
Contractor;an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone.
§7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents,and the
Pill Contractor shall proceed promptly,unless otherwise provided in the Change Order,Construction Change Directive
or order for a minor change in the Work.
§7.2 CHANGE ORDERS
§7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,Contractor and
Architect,stating their agreement upon all of the following:
.1 change in the Work;
.2 the amount of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum;and
.3 the extent of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Time.
§7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Section 7.3.3.
§7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES
§7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and
Architect,directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum or Contract
Time,or both.The Owner may by Construction Change Directive,without invalidating the Contract,order changes
in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions,deletions or other revisions,the
Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.
§7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change
Order.
AIA Document A201711-1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 25
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIAa Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_I which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
§5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS
§5.3.1 By appropriate agreement,written where legally required for validity,the Contractor shall require each e�
Subcontractor,to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor,to be bound to the Contractor by
terms of the Contract Documents,and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities,
including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work,which the Contractor,by these Documents,
assumes toward the Owner and Architect.Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the
Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor
so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights,and shall allow to the Subcontractor,unless specifically
provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement,the benefit of all rights,remedies and redress against the
Contractor that the Contractor,by the Contract Documents,has against the Owner.Where appropriate,the
Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors.The
Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor,prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement,
copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound,and,upon written request of the
Subcontractor,identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may
be at variance with the Contract Documents.Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of
such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.
§5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS
§5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided
that:
.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to
Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the
Subcontractor and Contractor in writing;and
.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety,if any,obligated under bond relating to the
Contract.
§5.4.2 Upon such assignment,if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days,the Subcontractor's
compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension.
ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS r
§6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS
§6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's
own forces,and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or
operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those
portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation.If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is
involved because of such action by the Owner,the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Section 4.3.
§6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations
on the site,the term"Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes
each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.
§6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate
contractor with the Work of the Contractor,who shall cooperate with them.The Contractor shall participate with
other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so.The
Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual
agreement.The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor,separate
contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised.
§6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,when the Owner performs construction or operations
related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations
and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract,including, without ..
excluding others,those stated in Article 3,this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12.
§6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY
§6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and
storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities,and shall connect and coordinate the
Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.
AIA Document A201 Tm—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA` Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 24
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1 00021 1 1 60_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(2468110893)
PIP §4.6.4 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract shall include,
by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner,the Architect,the Architect's employees or consultants,except
by written consent containing specific reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect, Owner,Contractor
and any other person or entity sought to be joined.No arbitration shall include,by consolidation or joinder or in any
other manner,parties other than the Owner,Contractor,a separate contractor as described in Article 6 and other
persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is required if complete relief is
to be accorded in arbitration.No person or entity other than the Owner,Contractor or a separate contractor as
described in Article 6 shall be included as an original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose
interest or responsibility is insubstantial.Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not
constitute consent to arbitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or entity not named or described
therein.The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity
duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court
having jurisdiction thereof.
§4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the
demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded.
§4.6.6 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final,and judgment
may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS
§5.1 DEFINITIONS
§5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the
Work at the site.The term"Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in
number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor.The term"Subcontractor"
does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor.
§5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to
perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Sub-subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract
Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-
subcontractor.
§5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK
§5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements,the Contractor,as soon as
practicable after award of the Contract,shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of
persons or entities(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)
proposed for each principal portion of the Work.The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing
stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect,after due investigation,has reasonable objection to any such
proposed person or entity.Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no
reasonable objection.
§5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made
reasonable and timely objection.The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the
Contractor has made reasonable objection.
§5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor,the
Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection.If the proposed but
rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall
be increased or decreased by the difference,if any,occasioned by such change,and an appropriate Change Order
shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work.However,no increase in the Contract
Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively
in submitting names as required.
§5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor,person or entity previously selected if the Owner or
Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute.
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 23
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1 0002111601 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
,m
§4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision,which shall state the reasons therefor and
which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both.The approval or rejection
of a Claim by the Architect shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration.
§4.4.6 When a written decision of the Architect states that(1)the decision is final but subject to mediation and
arbitration and(2)a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after
the date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision,then failure to demand arbitration ■,R
within said 30 days'period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and
Contractor.If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated,such decision may
be entered as evidence,but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties
concerned.
§4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter,the Architect or the Owner may,but
is not obligated to,notify the surety,if any,of the nature and amount of the Claim.If the Claim relates to a
possibility of a Contractor's default,the Architect or the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety and
request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy.
§4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien,the party asserting such Claim may proceed in
accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the Claim by
the Architect,by mediation or by arbitration.
w
§4.5 MEDIATION
§4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those
waived as provided for in Sections 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall,after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days
after submission of the Claim to the Architect,be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the
institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party.
§4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which,unless the parties mutually agree
otherwise,shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration
Association currently in effect.Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract
and with the American Arbitration Association.The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand
for arbitration but,in such event,mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings,
which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing,unless stayed for a longer
period by agreement of the parties or court order.
§4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally.The mediation shall be held in the place
where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon.Agreements reached in mediation shall
be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
§4.6 ARBITRATION
§4.6.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those
waived as provided for in Sections 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5,shall,after decision by the Architect or 30 days after
submission of the Claim to the Architect,be subject to arbitration.Prior to arbitration,the parties shall endeavor to
resolve disputes by mediation in accordance with the provisions of Section 4.5.
§4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration which,unless the parties mutually agree **
otherwise,shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration
Association currently in effect.The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the
Contract and with the American Arbitration Association,and a copy shall be filed with the Architect.
§4.6.3 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Sections 4.4.6 and 4.6.1 as
applicable,and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen,and in no event shall it be made
after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the *■
applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Section 13.7.
AIA Document A201 Tu—1997.Copyright Q 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAO Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. 22
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order now
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
§4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time
§4.3.7.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time,written notice as provided
herein shall be given.The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on
progress of the Work.In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary.
I
§4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time,such Claim shall be documented
by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time,could not have been reasonably
anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.
§4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or
property because of an act or omission of the other party,or of others for whose acts such party is legally
responsible,written notice of such injury or damage,whether or not insured,shall be given to the other party within
a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery.The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other
party to investigate the matter.
§4.3.8 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon,and if quantities originally
contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that
application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or
Contractor,the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.
§4.3.10 CIaims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for
consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract.This mutual waiver includes:
.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses,for losses of use,income,profit,financing,
business and reputation,and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of
such persons;and
ro .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of
personnel stationed there,for losses of financing,business and reputation,and for loss of profit
except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.
This mutual waiver is applicable,without limitation,to all consequential damages due to either party's termination
in accordance with Article 14.Nothing contained in this Section 4.3.10 shall be deemed to preclude an award of
liquidated direct damages,when applicable,in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
§4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims,including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding
those arising under Sections 10.3 through 10.5,shall be referred initially to the Architect for decision.An initial
decision by the Architect shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation,arbitration or litigation of all
Claims between the Contractor and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due,unless 30 days have passed
after the Claim has been referred to the Architect with no decision having been rendered by the Architect.The
Architect will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner.
§4.4.2 The Architect will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one or more of the
following actions: (1)request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from
the other party,(2)reject the Claim in whole or in part,(3)approve the Claim,(4)suggest a compromise,or(5)
advise the parties that the Architect is unable to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to
evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Architect concludes that,in the Architect's sole discretion,it would be
inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim.
§4.4.3 In evaluating Claims,the Architect may,but shall not be obligated to,consult with or seek information from
IP either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Architect in rendering a
decision.The Architect may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense.
§4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data,
such party shall respond,within ten days after receipt of such request,and shall either provide a response on the
requested supporting data,advise the Architect when the response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the
Architect that no supporting data will be furnished.Upon receipt of the response or supporting data,if any,the
Architect will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part.
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIAe Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 21
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIAe Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
OF prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
§4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of,the
Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor.The Architect's response to such requests
will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.If no
agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in
compliance with this Section 4.2,then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish
such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them.
§4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable
from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings.When making such interpretations
and initial decisions,the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor,will
not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith.
§4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent
expressed in the Contract Documents.
§4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES s
§4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking,as a matter of right,adjustment or
interpretation of Contract terms,payment of money,extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the
Contract.The term"Claim"also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor
arising out of or relating to the Contract.Claims must be initiated by written notice.The responsibility to
substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim.
�e
§4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims.Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event
giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim,
whichever is later.Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the other party.
.�a
§4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance.Pending final resolution of a Claim except as otherwise agreed in writing
or as provided in Section 9.7.1 and Article 14,the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the
Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. e�
§4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions.If conditions are encountered at the site which are(1)
subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract
Documents or(2)unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily
found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the
Contract Documents,then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions
are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions.The Architect will promptly s�
investigate such conditions and,if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost
of,or time required for,performance of any part of the Work,will recommend an equitable adjustment in the
Contract Sum or Contract Tune,or both.If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially
different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, **
the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing,stating the reasons.Claims by either party in
opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision.If
the conditions encountered are materially different,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted,
but if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,the w
adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial determination,subject to further proceedings pursuant to
Section 4.4.
§4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum,
written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work.Prior notice is not required
for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.6.
w
§4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to(1)a written
interpretation from the Architect,(2)an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault,
(3)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect,(4)failure of payment by the Owner,(5) ..
termination of the Contract by the Owner,(6)Owner's suspension or(7)other reasonable grounds,Claim shall be
filed in accordance with this Section 4.3.
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will 20
be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_I which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(2468110893)
deficiencies in the Work,and(3)to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that
the Work, when fully completed,will be in accordance with the Contract Documents.However,the Architect will
not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work.
The Architect will neither have control over or charge of,nor be responsible for,the construction means,methods,
techniques,sequences or procedures,or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work,since
these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents,except as provided in
Section 3.3.1.
§4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be
responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors,or their agents or employees,or any other
persons or entities performing portions of the Work.
§4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract
"M Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized,the Owner and Contractor shall
endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the
Contract.Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect.Communications
by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor.Communications by and with
separate contractors shall be through the Owner.
§4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment,the Architect will review
and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.
§4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents.Whenever
the Architect considers it necessary or advisable,the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of
the Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3,whether or not such Work is fabricated,installed or
completed.However,neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or
not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor,
Subcontractors,material and equipment suppliers,their agents or employees,or other persons or entities performing
portions of the Work.
§4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such
as Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples,but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with
information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Architect's action will be taken
with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner,Contractor or
separate contractors,while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate
review.Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of
other details such as dimensions and quantities,or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of
equipment or systems,all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract
Documents.The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations
under Sections 3.3,3.5 and 3.12.The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or,unless
otherwise specifically stated by the Architect,of any construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or
Pill procedures.The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item
is a component.
§4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives,and may authorize minor
changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4.
§4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date
of final completion,will receive and forward to the Owner,for the Owner's review and records,written warranties
and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor,and will issue a final Certificate
for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in
carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site.The duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of
such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents.
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 19
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
§3.16 ACCESS TO WORK ..
§3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress
wherever located.
§3.17 ROYALTIES,PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS
§3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees.The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for
infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account
thereof,but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design,process or product of a
particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations
are contained in Drawings,Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect.However,if the
Contractor has reason to believe that the required design,process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a
patent,the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the
Architect.
§3.18 INDEMNIFICATION
,r
§3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims,damages,losses or expenses are not covered
by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Section 11.3,
the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,Architect,Architect's consultants,and agents and
employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses and expenses,including but not limited to
attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work,provided that such claim,damage,loss or
expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property
(other than the Work itself),but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor,a
Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,
regardless of whether or not such claim,damage,loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder.
Such obligation shall not be construed to negate,abridge,or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which
would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18.
§3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor,
a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,the
indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages,
compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts,
disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
.rr
ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
§4.1 ARCHITECT
§4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing ..
architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular
in number.The term"Architect"means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative.
§4.1.2 Duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents
shall not be restricted,modified or extended without written consent of the Owner,Contractor and Architect.
Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.
§4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated,the Owner shall employ a new Architect against whom the w
Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former
Architect.
§4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
§4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents,and will be
an Owner's representative(1)during construction,(2)until final payment is due and(3)with the Owner's
concurrence,from time to time during the one-year period for correction of Work described in Section 12.2.The
Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents,
unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract.
§4.2.2 The Architect,as a representative of the Owner,will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the
Contractor's operations(1)to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress
and quality of the portion of the Work completed,(2)to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and
�w
AIA Document A201 Tin—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 18
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order no
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/1512006,and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(2468110893)
tl
§3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of
responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop
Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect
in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and(1)the Architect has given written approval to the specific
deviation as a minor change in the Work,or(2)a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued
authorizing the deviation.The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop
Pill Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof.
§3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct speck attention,in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings,Product Data,
Samples or similar submittals,to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals.In the
absence of such written notice the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.
§3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of
architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of
the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's
responsibilities for construction means,methods,techniques,sequences and procedures.The Contractor shall not be
required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law.If professional design services or
certifications by a design professional related to systems,materials or equipment are specifically required of the
Contractor by the Contract Documents,the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria
that such services must satisfy.The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a
PIP properly licensed design professional,whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings,calculations,
specifications,certifications,Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings
and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional,if prepared by others,shall bear
such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect.The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled
to rely upon the adequacy,accuracy and completeness of the services,certifications or approvals performed by such
design professionals,provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design
criteria that such services must satisfy.Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10,the Architect will review,approve or take
other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information
given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall not be responsible for the
adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents.
§3.13 USE OF SITE
§3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law,ordinances,permits and the
Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment.
§3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
§3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting,fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make
its parts fit together properly.
§3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed
construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting,patching or otherwise altering such construction,or by
excavation.The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor
except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor;such consent shall not be unreasonably
withheld.The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's
consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.
IM
§3.15 CLEANING UP
§3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or
rubbish caused by operations under the Contract.At completion of the Work,the Contractor shall remove from and
about the Project waste materials,rubbish,the Contractor's tools,construction equipment,machinery and surplus
materials.
+ §3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so and the cost
thereof shall be charged to the Contractor.
wry
AIA Document A201'm—1997.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This A10 Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 17
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AtAO Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
OPP No.1 000211160 1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
communications shall be confirmed in writing.Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written
request in each case.
§3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
§3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract,shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and
Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work.The schedule shall not exceed time limits
current under the Contract Documents,shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the
Work and Project,shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents,and shall
provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work.
§3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current,for the Architect's approval,a schedule of submittals which
is coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review
submittals.
§3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to
the Owner and Architect.
§3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
§3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings,Specifications,
Addenda,Change Orders and other Modifications,in good order and marked currently to record field changes and
selections made during construction,and one record copy of approved Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples and
similar required submittals.These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for e�
submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work.
§3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
§3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings,diagrams,schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the
Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor,manufacturer,supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of
the Work.
§3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations,standard schedules,performance charts,instructions,brochures,diagrams and �.
other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.
§3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials,equipment or workmanship and establish
standards by which the Work will be judged.
§3.12.4 Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents.The purpose of
their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required by the Contract
Documents the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept
expressed in the Contract Documents.Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7.
Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in
the Contract Documents.Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the
Architect without action.
§3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents,approve and submit to the
Architect Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with
reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of
separate contractors.Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and
approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action.
§3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples and similar submittals,the Contractor
represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials,field measurements and field construction w
criteria related thereto,or will do so,and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such
submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.
§3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal
and review of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been
approved by the Architect.
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 16
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(2468110893)
§3.5 WARRANTY
N §3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the
Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents,that the
Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted,and that the Work will conform to
the requirements of the Contract Documents.Work not conforming to these requirements,including substitutions
»r r not properly approved and authorized,may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for
damage or defect caused by abuse,modifications not executed by the Contractor,improper or insufficient
maintenance,improper operation,or normal wear and tear and normal usage.If required by the Architect,the
Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.
§3.6 TAXES
§3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales,consumer,use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor
which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded,whether or not yet effective or merely
scheduled to go into effect.
§3.7 PERMITS,FEES AND NOTICES
§3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building
permit and other permits and governmental fees,licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and
completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally
required when bids are received or negotiations concluded.
§3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws,ordinances,rules,regulations and lawful
orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.
§3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with
applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,building codes,and rules and regulations.However,if the Contractor observes
that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith,the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect
and Owner in writing,and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification.
§3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws,statutes,ordinances,building codes,and
rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner,the Contractor shall assume appropriate
responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.
§3.8 ALLOWANCES
§3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents.Items
covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct,
but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable
objection.
1111111 §3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents:
.1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and
all required taxes,less applicable trade discounts;
.2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site,labor,installation costs,overhead,profit and
other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but
not in the allowances;
.3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances,the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly
1P by Change Order.The amount of the Change Order shall reflect(1)the difference between actual
costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and(2)changes in Contractor's costs under Section
3.8.2.2.
§3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient time to avoid delay
in the Work.
§3.9 SUPERINTENDENT
§3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance
at the Project site during performance of the Work.The superintendent shall represent the Contractor,and
communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.Important
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
§` Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. is
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA8 Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
Work,as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3,shall take field measurements of
any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it.
These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of
discovering errors,omissions,or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents;however,any errors,inconsistencies or
omissions discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in
such form as the Architect may require.
§3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the
Architect,but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and
not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.The
Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws,statutes,
ordinances,building codes,and rules and regulations,but any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the
Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect.
§3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions
issued by the Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.1
and 3.2.2,the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Sections 4.3.6 and 4.3.7.If the Contractor fails to
perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.1 and 3.2.2,the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as
would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations.The Contractor shall not be liable to the
Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors,inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or
for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor
recognized such error,inconsistency,omission or difference and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. .w
§3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
§3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,using the Contractor's best skill and attention.The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means,methods,techniques,sequences
and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract,unless the Contract Documents
give other specific instructions concerning these matters.If the Contract Documents give specific instructions
concerning construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,the Contractor shall evaluate the
jobsite safety thereof and,except as stated below,shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such
means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures.If the Contractor determines that such means,methods,
techniques,sequences or procedures may not be safe,the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner
and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the �*
Architect.If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means,methods,techniques,sequences or
procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor,the Owner shall be solely responsible for any
resulting loss or damage.
§3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees,
Subcontractors and their agents and employees,and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or
on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.
§3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that
such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.
§3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS
§3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor,
materials,equipment,tools,construction equipment and machinery,water,heat,utilities,transportation,and other ,.►
facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work,whether temporary or permanent
and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.
§3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner,after evaluation by the Architect
and in accordance with a Change Order.
§3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other +
persons carrying out the Contract.The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not
skilled in tasks assigned to them.
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA8 Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this MAO Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 14
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(2468110893)
continuation of the Work.After such evidence has been furnished,the Owner shall not materially vary such
financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor.
§2.2.2 Except for permits and fees,including those required under Section 3.7.1,which are the responsibility of the
ow Contractor under the Contract Documents,the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals,easements,
assessments and charges required for construction,use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent
changes in existing facilities.
§2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics,legal limitations and utility locations for
the site of the Project,and a legal description of the site.The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of
information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the
lop Work.
§2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Owner
with reasonable promptness.Any other information or services relevant to the Contractor's performance of the
Work under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner after receipt from the Contractor of a written
request for such information or services.
§2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor will be furnished,free of charge,such
copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work.
OR §2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK
§2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents as required by Section 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents,the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,until the
cause for such order has been eliminated;however,the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a
duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity,
except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3.
§2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
§2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and
fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction
of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness,the Owner may after such seven-day period give the
Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a three-day period.If the Contractor within
TM such three-day period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies,
the Owner may,without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have,correct such deficiencies.In such case an
appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the
reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies,including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's
additional services made necessary by such default,neglect or failure.Such action by the Owner and amounts
11111111 charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect.If payments then or thereafter due the
Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR
§3.1 GENERAL
§3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number.The term"Contractor"means the Contractor or the Contractor's
authorized representative.
§3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract,or by tests,
inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor.
ails
§3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
§3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary,before starting each portion of the Work,the Contractor
shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA* Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 13
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
§1.3 CAPITALIZATION +•�
§1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are(1)specifically defined,(2)the titles
of numbered articles or(3)the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects.
§1.4 INTERPRETATION
§1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as"all"and"any"
and articles such as "the" and"an,"but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears
in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. .w
§1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
§1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor.If either the Owner or Contractor or
both do not sign all the Contract Documents,the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request.
§1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site,
become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal
observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.
§1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS,SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE
§1.6.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents,including those in electronic form,prepared by the "N
Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the
Contractor is described.The Contractor may retain one record set.Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor,
Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings,Specifications
and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants,and unless otherwise indicated the
Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of them and will retain all common law,
statutory and other reserved rights,in addition to the copyrights.All copies of Instruments of Service,except the
Contractor's record set,shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect,on request,upon completion of
the Work.The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's
consultants,and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor,are for use solely with respect to this Project.They are
not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other
projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the
Owner,Architect and the Architect's consultants.The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors and material
or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings,Specifications and
other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the
execution of their Work under the Contract Documents.All copies made under this authorization shall bear the
statutory copyright notice,if any,shown on the Drawings,Specifications and other documents prepared by the
Architect and the Architect's consultants.Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for
other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's
or Architect's consultants'copyrights or other reserved rights.
ARTICLE 2 OWNER
§2.1 GENERAL
§2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have
express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization.
Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1,the Architect does not have such authority.The term"Owner" means
the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative.
we
§2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request,information
necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate,give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights.Such
information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, 4W
usually referred to as the site,and the Owner's interest therein.
§2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER
§2.2.1 The Owner shall,at the written request of the Contractor,prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter, r
furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's
obligations under the Contract.Furnishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to commencement or
AIA Document A201 Tu—1997.Copyright 01911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 12
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04102/2006 under Order we
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
PIP
ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
§1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
§1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor(hereinafter the Agreement),
Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions),Drawings,Specifications,Addenda
issued prior to execution of the Contract,other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after
execution of the Contract.A Modification is(1)a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties,(2)a
>w Change Order,(3)a Construction Change Directive or(4)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by
the Architect.Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement,the Contract Documents do not include other
documents such as bidding requirements(advertisement or invitation to bid,Instructions to Bidders,sample forms,
the Contractor's bid or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements).
§1.1.2 THE CONTRACT
The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction.The Contract represents the entire and integrated
agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,representations or agreements,either written
or oral.The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification.The Contract Documents shall not be
construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind(1)between the Architect and Contractor,(2)between the
Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor,(3)between the Owner and Architect or(4)between any persons
or entities other than the Owner and Contractor.The Architect shall,however,be entitled to performance and
enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties.
§1.1.3 THE WORK
The term"Work"means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents,whether completed or
partially completed,and includes all other labor,materials,equipment and services provided or to be provided by
the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations.The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.
§1.1.4 THE PROJECT
The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole
or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors.
§1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS
The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design,location and
! ! dimensions of the Work,generally including plans,elevations,sections,details, schedules and diagrams.
§1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS
The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials,
equipment,systems,standards and workmanship for the Work,and performance of related services.
§1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL
The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements,sample
forms,Conditions of the Contract and Specifications.
§1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
§1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and
completion of the Work by the Contractor.The Contract Documents are complementary,and what is required by
one shall be as binding as if required by all;performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent
! consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the
indicated results.
§1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions,sections and articles,and arrangement of Drawings shall not
control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be
performed by any trade.
§1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,words which have well-known technical or construction
industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.
AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
" Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 1
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
wo
1.6, 3.4.2,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2, 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,4.3,4.4.8,4.6.5,
9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6,
Written Interpretations 12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.3, 14
4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 Written Orders
Written Notice 1.1.1,2.3,3.9,4.3.6,7,8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2,
13.5.2, 14.3.1
ws
+�w
w
w
ew
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 10
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/0212006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
w 5 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE
Subcontractors,Work by CONTRACT
1.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.1,4.2.3,5.2.3,5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2, 14
9.6.7 Tests and Inspections
Subcontractual Relations 3.1.3,3.3.3,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2,
5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2,9.6,9.10 10.2.1,11.4.7,11.4.8,14.1, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1,13.5
14.2.1,14.3.2 TIME
Submittals 8
1.6,3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6,9.2, Time,Delays and Extensions of
9.3,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.1.3 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,
Subrogation,Waivers of 7.4.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2
6.1.1, 11.4.5,11.4.7 Time Limits
Substantial Completion 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1,
4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, 4,2,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,5.2,5.3,5.4, 6.2.4,7.3,7.4,
9.10.4.2, 12.2, 13.7 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9,
Substantial Completion,Definition of 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5,
9.8.1 13.7, 14
Substitution of Subcontractors Time Limits on Claims
5.2.3,5.2.4 4.3.2,4.3.4,4.3.8,4.4,4.5,4,6
Substitution of Architect Title to Work
4.1.3 9.3.2,9.3.3
Substitutions of Materials UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF
3.4.2,3.5.1,7.3.7 WORK
Sub-subcontractor,Definition of 12
5.1.2 Uncovering of Work
! ' Subsurface Conditions 12.1
4.3.4 Unforeseen Conditions
Successors and Assigns 4.3.4,8.3.1, 10.3
13.2 Unit Prices
Superintendent 4.3.9,7.3.3.2
3.9,10.2.6 Use of Documents
Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.1.1, 1.6,2.2.5,3.12.6,5.3
!► 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,4.3,3,6.1.3, Use of Site
6.2.4,7.1.3,7.3.6,8.2,8.3.1,9.4.2, 10, 12, 14 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1
Surety Values,Schedule of
4.4.7,5.4.1.2,9.8.5,9.10.2,9.10.3, 14.2.2 9.2,9.3.1
Surety,Consent of Waiver of Claims by the Architect
9.10.2,9.10.3 13.4.2
Surveys Waiver of Claims by the Contractor
2.2.3 4.3.10,9.10.5, 11.4.7, 13.4.2
Suspension by the Owner for Convenience Waiver of Claims by the Owner
14.4 4.3.10,9.9.3,9.10.3,9.10.4, 11.4.3, 11.4.5, 11.4.7,
Suspension of the Work 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.4
5.4.2, 14.3 Waiver of Consequential Damages
Suspension or Termination of the Contract 4.3.10,14.2.4
4.3.6,5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, 14 Waiver of Liens
Taxes 9.10.2,9.10.4
3.6,3.8.2.1,7,3.6.4 Waivers of Subrogation
Termination by the Contractor 6.1.1, 11.4.5,11.4.7
4.3.10,14.1 Warranty
Termination by the Owner for Cause 3.5,4.2.9,4.3.53,9.3.3,9.8.4,9.9,1,9.10.4,12.2.2,
4.3.10,5.4.1.1,14.2 13.7.1.3
Termination of the Architect Weather Delays
tI 4.1.3 4.3.7.2
Termination of the Contractor Work,Definition of
14.2.2 1.1.3
Written Consent
AIA Document A201 T"—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 9
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AWA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1 000211160 1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
...
Performance Bond and Payment Bond Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and as
7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 Architect
Permits,Fees and Notices 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.11,3.12,4.2,5.2,6.1.3,9.2,9.8.2
2.2.2,3.7,3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 Review of Shop Drawings,Product Data and
PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION Samples by Contractor OR
OF 3.12
10 Rights and Remedies
1.1.2,.2.3,2.4,3.5.1,3.15.2,4.2.6,4.3.4,4.5,4.6,5.3, so
Polychlorinated Biphenyl 5.4,6.1,6.3,7.3.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3,
10.3.1 12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.4, 14
Product Data,Definition of Royalties,Patents and Copyrights
3.12.2 3.17 '
Product Data and Samples,Shop Drawings Rules and Notices for Arbitration
3.11,3.12,4.2.7 4.6.2
Progress and Completion Safety of Persons and Property «
4.2.2,4.3.3,8.2,9.8,9.9.1, 14.1.4 10.2,10.6
Progress Payments Safety Precautions and Programs
4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 3.3.1,4.2.2,4.2.7,5.3.1,10.1, 10.2, 10.6
Project,Definition of the Samples,Definition of
1.1.4 3.12.3
Project Management Protective Liability Samples,Shop Drawings,Product Data and
Insurance 3.11,3.12,4.2.7
11.3 Samples at the Site,Documents and
Project Manual,Definition of the 3.11
1.1.7 Schedule of Values
Project Manuals 9.2,9.3.1
2.2.5 Schedules,
Project Representatives 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.Construction12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,
4.2.10 6.1.3
Property Insurance Separate Contracts and Contractors
10.2.5,11.4 1.1.4,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,4.2.7,4.6.4,6,8.3.1,
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.5
10 Shop Drawings,Definition of
Regulations and Laws 3.12.1
1.6,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples
9.6.4,9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4,13.5.1, 3.11,3.12,4.2.7
13.5.2, 13.6, 14 Site,Use of
Rejection of Work 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1
3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.2.1 Site Inspections
Releases and Waivers of Liens 1.2.2,3.2.1,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.10.1, 13.5
9.10.2 Site Visits,Architect's
Representations 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5
1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1, Special Inspections and Testing
9.8.2,9.10.1 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5
Representatives Specifications,Definition of the
2.1.1,3.1.1,3.9,4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.10,5.1.1,5.1.2, 1.1.6
13.2.1 Specifications,The
Resolution of Claims and Disputes 1.1.1,1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.2.2, 1.6,3.11,3.12.10,3.17
4.4,4.5,4.6 Statute of Limitations
Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7
3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2, 6.3,9.5.1, Stopping the Work
10 2.3,4.3.6,9.7, 10.3, 14.1
Retainage Stored Materials
9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 11.4.1.4 +
Review of Contract Documents and Field Subcontractor,Definition of
Conditions by Contractor 5.1.1
1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3,3.12.7,6.1.3 SUBCONTRACTORS ,
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. $
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIAO Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order wue
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
Materials,Labor,Equipment and 1.6,2.1.1,2.3,2.4,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.12.10,3.14.2,4.1.2,
1.1.3,1.1.6, 1.6.1,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.23,3.12,3.13, 4.1.3,4.2.4,4.2.9,4.3.6,4.4.7, 5.2.1,5.2.4,5.4.1,
3.15.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1, 7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3, 6.1,6.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,8.2.2,8.3.1,9.3.1,9.3.2,9.5.1,
9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 9.9.1,9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.4.3, 11.4.10,
Means,Methods,Techniques,Sequences and 12.2.2, 12.3.1, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4
' Procedures of Construction Owner's Financial Capability
3.3.1,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,9.4.2 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5
Mechanic's Lien Owner's Liability Insurance
k 4.4.8 11.2
Mediation Owner's Loss of Use Insurance
4.4.1,4.4.5,4.4.6,4.4.8,4.5,4.6.1,4.6.2,8.3.1, 10.5 11.4.3
!! Minor Changes in the Work Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors
1.1.2,
1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.6,7.1,7.4
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work
13 2.4,12.2.4.14.2.2.2
Modifications,Definition of Owner's Right to Clean Up
1.1.1 6.3
Modifications to the Contract Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to
1.1.1, 1.1.2,3.7.3,3.11,4.1.2,4.2.1,5.2.3,7,8.3.1, Award Separate Contracts
9.7, 10.3.2, 11.4.1 6.1
Mutual Responsibility Owner's Right to Stop the Work
6.2 2'3
Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of Owner's Right to Suspend the Work
9.6.6,9.9.3,12.3 14.3
Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract
2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.5,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.4, 14.2
12.2.1, 13.7.1.3 Ownership and Use of Drawings,Specifications
Notice and Other Instruments of Service
2.2.1,2.3,2.4,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.7.2,3.7.4,3.12.9,4.3, 1.1.1,1.6,2.2.5,3.2.1,3.11.1,3.17.1,4.2.12,5.3
4.4.8,4.6.5,5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, Partial Occupancy or Use
,y
11.4.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1, 14.2 9.6.6,9.9, 11.4.1.5
Notice,Written Patching,Cutting and
2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,4.3,4.4.8,4.6.5, 3.14,6.25
5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, Patents
12.2.2, 12.2.4,13.3, 14 3.17
Notice of Testing and Inspections Payment,Applications for
4.2.5,7.3.8,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7.1,9.8.5,
13.5.1, 13.5.2
Notice to Proceed 9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.5, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
8 2 2 Payment,Certificates for
Notices,Permits,Fees and 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1,9.10.1,
2.2.2,3.7,3.13,7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4
Observations,Contractor's Payment,Failure of
1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3,4.3.4 4.3.6,9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6
Occupancy
Payment,Final
2.2.2,9.6.6,9.8, 11.4.1.5 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1,
Orders,Written 11.4.5, 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
1.1.1,2.3,3.9,4.3.6,7,8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, Payment Bond,Performance Bond and
13.5.2, 14.3.1 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9,11.5
OWNER Payments,Progress
2 4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3
Owner,Definition of PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
2.1 9
Owner,Information and Services Required of the Payments to Subcontractors
2.1.2,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, 5.4.2,9.5.1.3,9.6.2,9.6.3,9.6.4,9.6.7, 11.4.8,
6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 14.2.1.2
11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 PCB
Owner's Authority 10.3.1
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.copyright Law and international Treaties. T
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale. (2468110893)
User Notes:
1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2,2.2.3,2.2.5,3.1,3.3,3.4,3.5,3.7, Insurance,Project Management Protective ..,
3.10,3.12,3.14,4.2.2,4.2.3,4.3.3,6.2.2,7.1.3,7.3.4, Liability
8.2,9.5,9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3 11.3
Extensions of Time Insurance,Property
3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3,7.4.1, 10.2.5,11.4
9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 Insurance,Stored Materials
Failure of Payment 9.3.2, 11.4.1.4
4.3.6,9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6 INSURANCE AND BONDS ..w
Faulty Work 11
(See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy
Final Completion and Final Payment 9.9.1, 11.4.1.5
4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10,11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, Insurance Companies,Settlement with
11.4.5, 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 11.4.10
Financial Arrangements,Owner's Intent of the Contract Documents
2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 1.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13,7.4
Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Interest
11.4 13.6
GENERAL PROVISIONS Interpretation
1 1.2.3,1.4,4.1.1,4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,8.1.4
Governing Law Interpretations,Written
13.1 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6
Guarantees(See Warranty) Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required ON
Hazardous Materials 4.6.4
10.2.4,10.3, 10.5 Judgment on Final Award
Identification of Contract Documents 4.6.6
1.5.1 Labor and Materials,Equipment
Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1,
5,2.1 42.6,4.2.7,5.21,6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3,
Indemnification 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 NO
3.17,3.18,9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.5, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.7 Labor Disputes
Information and Services Required of the Owner 8.3.1
2.1.2,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, Laws and Regulations
6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 1.6,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6,
11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 9.6.4,9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1,
Injury or Damage to Person or Property 13.5.2, 13.6, 14
4.3.8,10.2,10.6 Liens
Inspections 2.1.2,4.4.8,8.2.2,9.3.3,9.10
3.1.3,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.2, Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder
9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 4.6.4
Instructions to Bidders Limitations,Statutes of "
1.1.1 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7
Instructions to the Contractor Limitations of Liability
3.2.3,3.3.1,3.8.1,4.2.8,5.2.1,7, 12,8.2.2, 13.5.2 2.3,3.2.1,3.5.1,3.7.3,3.12.8,3.12.10,3.17,3.18, as
Insurance 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.12,6.2.2,9.4.2,9.6.4, 9.6.7,9.10.4,
3.18.1,6.1.1,7.3.6,8.2.1,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.4.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2
9.10.5, 11 Limitations of Time
Insurance,Boiler and Machinery 2.1.2,2.2,2.4, 3.2.1,3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1, 40
11.4.2 4.2.7,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,5.2,5.3, 5.4,6.2.4,7.3,7.4,
Insurance,Contractor's Liability 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9,
11.1 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5,
Insurance,Effective Date of 13.7, 14
8.2.2, 11.1.2 Loss of Use Insurance
Insurance,Loss of Use 11.4.3
11.4.3 Material Suppliers so
Insurance,Owner's Liability 1.6,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2.1,9.3,9.4.2,9.6,9.10.5
11.2 Materials,Hazardous
10.2.4, 10.3, 10.5
w
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright 041911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 6
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order so
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 6.2.5,3.14
11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1, Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate
Contractor's Liability Insurance Contractors
11.1 3.14.2,6.2.4,9.2.1.5, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 11.1,
Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors 11.4, 12.2.4
and Owner's Forces Damage to the Work
3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,6, 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 3.14.2,9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 11.4, 12.2.4
Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors Damages,Claims for
1.2.2,3.3.2,3.18.1,3.18.2,5,9.6.2,9.6.7,9.10.2, 3.2.3,3.18,4.3.10,6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.3.3,
'
11.4.1.2, 11.4.7, 11.4.8 11.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4
Contractor's Relationship with the Architect Damages for Delay
'
1.1.2,1.6,3.1.3,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.4.2,3.5.1, 6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7, 10.3.2
3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18, 4.1.2,4.1.3,4.2, Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of
4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.7,5.2,6.2.2,7, 8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4, 8.1.2
M 9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.4.7, 12, Date of Substantial Completion,Definition of
13.4.2, 13.5 8.1.3
Contractor's Representations Day,Definition of
1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.8.2 8.1.4
Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Decisions of the Architect
Work 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.5,
3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, 4.4.6,4.5,6.3,7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4,
10 9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4
Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Decisions to Withhold Certification
1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3 9.4.1,9.5,9.7, 14.1.1.3
Contractor's Right to Stop the Work Defective or Nonconforming Work,Acceptance,
9.7 Rejection and Correction of
Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.5,9.5.1,9.5.2,9.6.6,9.8.2,
4.3.10, 14.1 9.9.3,9.10.4, 12.2.1, 13.7.1.3
Contractor's Submittals Defective Work,Definition of
3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6,9.2,9.3, 3.5.1
9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.5.2 Definitions
Contractor's Superintendent 1.1,2.1.1,3.1,3.5.1,3.12.1,3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1,
3.9, 10.2.6 4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.3.6,8.1, 9.1,9.8.1
Contractor's Supervision and Construction Delays and Extensions of Time
Procedures 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.I,
1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, 7.4.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2
6.2.4,7.1.3,7.3.4,7.3.6,8.2, 10, 12, 14 Disputes
Contractual Liability Insurance 4.1.4,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.3,7.3.8
11.1.1.8, 11.2, 11.3 Documents and Samples at the Site
Coordination and Correlation 3.11
1.2, 1.5.2,3.3.1,3.10,3.12.6,6.1.3,6.2.1 Drawings,Definition of
Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.1.5
1.6,2.2.5,3.11 Drawings and Specifications,Use and Ownership of
Copyrights 1.1.1, 1.3,2.2.5,3.11,5.3
1.6,3.17 Effective Date of Insurance
Correction of Work 8.2.2, 11.1.2
+I 2.3,2.4,3.7.4,4.2.1,9.4.2,9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1, 12.1.2, Emergencies
12.2, 13.7.1.3 4.3.5,10.6, 14.1.1.2
Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents Employees,Contractor's
1.2 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3,
Cost,Definition of 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1
7.3.6 Equipment,Labor,Materials and
Costs 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1,
2.4,3.2.3,3.7.4, 3.8.2,3.15.2,4.3,5.4.2,6.1.1,6.2.3, 4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3,
7.3.3.3,7.3.6,7.3.7,7.3.8,9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.5, 11.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2
11.4, 12.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14 Execution and Progress of the Work
Cutting and Patching
AIA Document A201TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. Ail rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 5
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04102/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
9.8.3,9.8.4,9.8.5 1.6.1,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6.4,
Certificates for Payment 4.6.6,9.6.4, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1,
4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7.1,9.10.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3
9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions
Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval 4.3.4,8.3.1, 10.3
13.5.4 Conditions of the Contract
Certificates of Insurance 1.1.1, 1.1.7,6.1.1,6.1.4
9.10.2, 11.1.3 Consent,Written
Change Orders 1.6,3.4.2, 3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2,
1.1.1,2.4.1,3.4.2,3.8.2.3,3.11.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.4, 9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2
4.3.9,5.2.3,7.1,7.2,7.3,8.3.1,9.3.1.1,9.10.3, CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY
11.4.1.2, 11.4.4, 11.4.9, 12.1.2 SEPARATE CONTRACTORS **
Change Orders,Definition of 1.1.4,6
7.2.1 Construction Change Directive,Definition of
CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.3.1
3.11,4.2.8,7,8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 11.4.9 Construction Change Directives
Claim,Definition of 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.9,7.1,7.3,9.3.1.1
4.3.1 Construction Schedules,Contractor's
Claims and Disputes 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3
3.2.3,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.1.1,6.3,7.3.8,9.3.3,9.10.4, Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts
10.3.3 5.4,14.2.2.2
Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims Continuing Contract Performance
4.6.5 4.3.3
Claims for Additional Cost Contract,Definition of
3.2.3,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1.1,7.3.8, 10.3.2 1.1.2
Claims for Additional Time CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR
3.2.3,4.3.4,4.3.7,6.1.1,8.3.2, 10.3.2 SUSPENSION OF THE
Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions 5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, 14
4.3.4 Contract Administration
Claims for 3
es Dama
g .1.3,4,9.4,9.5
3.2.3,3.18,4.3.10,6.1.1, 8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.3.3, Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating
11.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4 to
Claims Subject to Arbitration 3.7.1,3.10,5.2,6.1, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 11.5.1 +�*
4.4.1,4.5.1,4.6.1 Contract Documents,The
Cleaning Up 1.1,1.2
3.15,6.3 Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of
Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period 1.6,2.2.5,5.3
13.7 Contract Documents,Definition of
Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to 1.1.1
2.2.1,3.2.1,3.4.1, 3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12.6,43.5,5.2.1, Contract Sum
5.2.3,6.2.2,8.1.2, 8.2.2,8.3.1, 11.1, 11.4.1, 11.4.6, 3.8,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2,7.3,7.4,9.1,9.4.2,
11.5.1 9.5.1.4,9.6.7,9.7, 10.3.2, 11.4.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2
Commencement of the Work,Definition of Contract Sum,Definition of
8.1.2 9.1
Communications Facilitating Contract Contract Time
Administration 4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1.3,7.3,7.4, 8.1.1,8.2,
3.9.1,4.2.4 8.3.1,9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2 ,
Completion,Conditions Relating to Contract Time,Definition of
1.6.1,3.4.1,3.11,3.15,4.2.2,4.2.9,8.2,9.4.2,9.8, 8.1.1
9.9.1,9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2 CONTRACTOR
COMPLETION,PAYMENTS AND 3 *�*
9 Contractor,Definition of
Completion,Substantial 3.1,6.1.2
4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, Contractor's Construction Schedules ..
9.10.4.2, 12.2, 13.7 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3
Compliance with Laws Contractor's Employees
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA'O Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 4
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/1512006,and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(2468110893)
A!w
INDEX 3.1.3,4.2,4.3.4,4.4,9.4,9.5
(Numbers and Topics in Bold are Section Headings) Architect's Approvals
2.4,3.1.3,3.5.1,3.10.2,4.2.7
Acceptance of Nonconforming Work Architect's Authority to Reject Work
9.6.6,9.9.3,12.3 3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1
Acceptance of Work Architect's Copyright
9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.3 1.6
Access to Work Architect's Decisions
3.16,6.2.1,12.1 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.5,
Accident Prevention 4.4.6,4.5,6.3,7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4,
4.2.3, 10 9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4
Acts and Omissions Architect's Inspections
3.2,3.3.2,3.12.8,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,4.4.1,8.3.1, 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5
9.5.1, 10.2.5, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1 Architect's Instructions
Addenda 3.2.3,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.8,7.4.1, 12.1, 13.5.2
1.1.1,3.11 Architect's Interpretations
Additional Costs,Claims for 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6
4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1.1, 10.3 Architect's Project Representative
Additional Inspections and Testing 4.2.10
9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5 Architect's Relationship with Contractor
Additional Time,Claims for 1.1.2, 1.6,3.1.3,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.4.2,3.5.1,
4.3.4,4.3.7,8.3.2 3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18,4.1.2,4.1.3,4.2,
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.7,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4,
3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3,11.3, 11.4.7, 12,
Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 13.4.2, 13.5
1.1.1 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors
Aesthetic Effect 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6,9.6.3,9.6.4, 11.4.7
4.2.13,4.5.1 Architect's Representations
Allowances 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1
3.8 Architect's Site Visits
All-risk Insurance 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1,
11.4.1.1 13.5
Applications for Payment Asbestos
4.2.5,7.3.8,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7.1,9.8.5, 10.3.1
9.10, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Attorneys' Fees
Approvals 3.18.1,9.10.2, 10.3.3
2.4,3.1.3,3.5,3.10.2,3.12,4.2.7,9.3.2,13.4.2, 13.5 Award of Separate Contracts
Arbitration 6.1.1,6.1.2
4.3.3,4.4,4.5.1,4.5.2,4.6,8.3.1,9.7.1, 11.4.9, Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for
11.4.10 Portions of the Work
Architect 5.2
4.1 Basic Definitions
Architect,Definition of 1.1
4.1.1 Bidding Requirements
Architect,Extent of Authority 1.1.1, 1.1.7,5.2.1, 11.5.1
2.4,3.12.7,4.2,4.3.6,4.4,5.2,6.3,7.1.2,7.3.6,7.4, Boiler and Machinery Insurance
9.2,9.3.1,9.4, 9.5,9.8.3,9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 11.4.2
13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Bonds,Lien
Architect,Limitations of Authority and 9.10.2
Responsibility Bonds,Performance,and Payment
2.1.1,3.3.3,3.12.4,3.12.8,3.12.10,4.1.2,4.2.1, 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5
4.2.2,4.2.3,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.10,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.4, Building Permit
5.2.1,7.4,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.6 3.7.1
Architect's Additional Services and Expenses Capitalization
2.4, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 1.3
Architect's Administration of the Contract Certificate of Substantial Completion
AIA Document A20i TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 3
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12115/2006,and is not for resale.
User Notes: (2468110893)
14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT «.
WIN
me
4"
M0
ON
go
AIA Document A201 TM—1997.Copyright ®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 2
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/02/2006 under Order
No.1 00021 1 1 60_1 which expires on 12/15/2006,and is not for resale. MR
User Notes:
(2468110893)
�a »= Docu ment A201 TM — 1991
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction
for the following PROJECT:
(Name and location or address): ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS:
Wilson&Gardner The author of this document has
Wilson and Gardiner Houses added information needed for its
Smith College completion.The author may also
Northampton,MA 01060 have revised the text of the original
AIA standard form.An Additions and
THE OWNER: Deletions Report that notes added
(Name and address): information as well as revisions to
Trustees of Smith College the standard form text is available
No 126 West Street from the author and should be
reviewed.A vertical line in the left
Northampton,MA 01060 margin of this document indicates
where the author has added
THE ARCHITECT: necessary information and where
(Name and address): the author has added to or deleted
Archimetrics Design Studio from the original AIA text.
Mailing Address: 180 Strong Street
� (Studio located at 13 Railroad Street) This document has important legal
Amherst,MA 01002 consequences. Consultation with an
attorney is encouraged with respect
to its completion or modification.
wll
TABLE OF ARTICLES This document has been approved
and endorsed by The Associated
1 GENERAL PROVISIONS General Contractors of America
4"
2 OWNER
o 3 CONTRACTOR
4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
5 SUBCONTRACTORS
w 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
7 CHANGES IN THE WORK
8 TIME
9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
11 INSURANCE AND BONDS
12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
AIA Document A201 n'—1997.Copyright ®1911,'1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987 and 1997 by The American
Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.
Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be
prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 10:30:31 on 04/0212006 under Order
No.1000211160_1 which expires on 12/1512006,and is not for resale. (2468110893)
User Notes:
BATHROOM RENOVATIONS TO WILSON AND GARDINER HOUSES
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES - NOT APPLICABLE
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
BATHROOM RENOVATIONS TO WILSON AND GARDINER HOUSES
102113 .... TOILET COMPARTMENTS .......................................... ................................... 5
102800 ....TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES............. ................................... 7
DIVISION 1 1 - EQUIPMENT - NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS - NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION - NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT - NOT APPLICABLE
Facility Services Subgroup
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
215300 .... FIRE PROTECTION..................................................... ................................... 22
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
225400 .... PLUMBING................................................................ ................................... 35
± ! DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
235500 .... HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ...... ................................... 79
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
266100 ELECTRICAL .................................. 32
Site and Infrastructure Subgroup
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK - NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS - NOT APPLICABLE
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
BATHROOM RENOVATIONS TO WILSON AND GARDINER HOUSES
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE - NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY - NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 05 - METALS
055213 .... PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS.......................................... ................................... 8
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
061000 .... ROUGH CARPENTRY ................................................. ................................... 10
061600 .... SHEATHING.............................................................. ................................... 4
062023 .... INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY ................................... ................................... 8
064023 .... INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK................... ................................... 1 1
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
072100 .... THERMAL INSULATION ............................................. ................................... 6
076100 .... SHEET METAL ROOFING............................................ ................................... 12 .R.
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
081113 .... HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081433 .... STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS ................................. ................................... 8
085200 .... WOOD WINDOWS...................................................... ................................... 12
087100 .... DOOR HARDWARE.................................................... ................................... 14
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
0921 16.23 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES ................
092216 .... NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092613 .... GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING................................... ................................... 10
096516 .... RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING...................................... ................................... 7
097500 .... PVC WALL COVERINGS.............................................. ................................... 4
099123 .... INTERIOR PAINTING.................................................. ................................... 9
099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING.................. . �.
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
BATHROOM RENOVATIONS TO WILSON AND GARDINER HOUSES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
[Division ... Section Title............................................................. ................................... Pages
GENERAL CONDITIONS
AIA A-201 General Conditions of the Contract............................................................42
e•
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
General Requirements Subgroup
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 .... SUMMARY ................................................................ ................................... 5
012300 ....ALTERNATES ............................................................ ................................... 2
012600 .... CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES ................. ................................... 3
012900.... PAYMENT PROCEDURES............................................ ................................... 6
013100 ... PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION.......... ................................... 10
013200 ... CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION.......... ................................... 1 1
01 3300 ... SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
014000 .... QUALITY REQUIREMENTS.......................................... ................................... 7
015000 ....TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS .................. ................................... 9
<' 016000 ... PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
........................................ ................................... 10
017300 .... EXECUTION .............................................................. ................................... 7
017329 .... CUTTING AND PATCHING......................................... ................................... 6
017419 .... CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL................................. 8
017700 .... CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES .......................................... ................................... 6
017823 ... OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA..................... ................................... 10
017839 .... PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ................................ ................................... 5
Facility Construction Subgroup
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
! " NOT APPLICABLE
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
7
7
3
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
9
7
1
0 ,60' 7
PROJECT MANUAL
BATHROOM RENOVATIONS
WILSON & GARDINER HOUSES
SMITH COLLEGE, NORTHAMPTON, MA
a � y-� Ej,K E 3
l
l
� n
o
s
Architect
ARCHIMETRICS DESIGN STUDIO
1.80 STRONG STREET,AMHERST, MA 01002
PH 413-548-9955 FAx 413-253-7825
Consulting Engineers
LINDGREN&SHARPLES
435 COTTAGE STREET,SPRINGFIELD, MA 01004.4005
PH 413-732-4336 FAx 413-731-0786
Set No.-----